Annex Manager

Annex Manager
User Guide
Part No. 166-024-389 December 1996
Rev. A
Copyright 1996 Bay Networks, Inc.

All rights reserved. Printed in the USA. December 1996. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, congurations, technical data, and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specied in this document. The information in this document is proprietary to Bay Networks, Inc. The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license.
Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.
Notice for All Other Executive Agencies

Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to, or accompany the delivery of, this computer software, the rights of the United States Government regarding its use, reproduction, and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19.
Trademarks of Bay Networks, Inc.

Annex, Remote Annex, Annex Manager, Remote Annex 2000, Remote Annex 4000, Remote Annex 6100, Remote Annex 6300, Remote Annex 5390/Async, Remote Annex 5391/CT1, Remote Annex 5393/PRI, BayStack Remote Annex 2000 Server, Quick2Cong, Bay Networks, Bay Networks Press, and the Bay Networks logo are trademarks of Bay Networks, Inc.
Third Party Trademarks

All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Statement of Conditions
In the interest of improving internal design, operational function, and/or reliability, Bay Networks, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice. Bay Networks, Inc. does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product(s) or circuit layout(s) described herein. In addition, the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure (that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties).
Contents
Preface
About the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Introduction
Annex Manager Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii Annex Manager Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi Sun Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii HP Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii IBM Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii SCO Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Part 1 Annex Manager Basics

Chapter 1 Installing Annex Manager
Annex Manager Delivery and Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Installing the Annex Manager Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Setting Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Working with SunNet Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Linking Annex Manager with SunNet Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Using SunNet Manager Discovery to Find Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Running Annex Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Chapter 2 Window Basics

Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Mouse and Keyboard Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Using Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Controlling the Window Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Changing a Windows Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Using Annex Manager Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Moving Windows and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Using Scroll Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Using the Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Using Fields, Buttons, and Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Using Text Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Using Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Using List Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Understanding Message and Output Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Annex Manager User Guide
iii
Contents
Chapter 3 Working with Annex Manager Windows

Understanding Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Using Annex Manager Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Using Secondary Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Using the File Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Understanding the Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Using the Cancel Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Using the Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Understanding Warning Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Using Help Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Displaying Help Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Understanding the Help Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Saving Help Window Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Changing Site Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Displaying the Site Parameters Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Understanding the Site Parameters Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Changing Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Chapter 4 Using the Main Window

Using Setup and Customize Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Understanding the Main Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Using the Specification Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Verifying Annex Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Using the Configuration Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Saving and Opening Annex Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Saving an Annex List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Opening an Annex List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Editing List Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Displaying SNMP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Displaying the SNMP Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Understanding the SNMP Information Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Viewing and Updating SNMP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Part 2 Setup Mode

Chapter 5 Setup Mode Basics
Understanding Setup Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Setup Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Setup Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Setup Window Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Confirmation Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-9
Annex Manager User Guide iv
Contents
Chapter 6 Selecting General Settings

Using the General Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Push Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the General (continued) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6-4 6-4 6-9
Chapter 7 Setting Asynchronous Port Values

Selecting Async Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Understanding the Async Ports Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Using the Edit Async Ports Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Understanding the Edit Async Ports Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Using the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Understanding the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Selecting Async Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Chapter 8 Setting ISDN Primary Rate Annex Values

Using the Call Defaults Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Understanding the Call Defaults Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Selecting Call Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Using the Channels Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Understanding the Channels Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Assigning Remote Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Using the T1/PRI Line Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Understanding the T1/PRI Line Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Setting the Switch Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Chapter 9 Editing Modem Definitions

Understanding the Edit Modem Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Using Push Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Creating and Changing Modem Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Changing Definitions for Annexes with Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Changing Definitions for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Removing a Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Understanding the Modem Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Editing Modem Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Creating New Modem Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Editing the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Chapter 10 Setting Security Values

Understanding the Security Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Using Push Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Selecting Security Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Annex Manager User Guide v
Contents
Part 3 Customize Mode

Chapter 11 Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT Windows
Using the AppleTalk Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Understanding the AppleTalk Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Changing AppleTalk Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Using the IP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Understanding the IP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Changing IP Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Using the IPX Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Understanding the IPX Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Selecting IPX Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Using the LAT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Understanding the LAT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Entering LAT Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Chapter 12 Using and Creating Parameter Groups

Working with Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the User Defined Parameter Groups Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the User Defined Parameter Groups Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating or Modifying a User Defined Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12-3 12-3 12-4 12-7
Chapter 13 Viewing and Changing Parameters

Viewing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Displaying the Show Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Understanding the Show Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Viewing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Changing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Displaying the Set Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Understanding the Set Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Changing Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Identifying Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Understanding Warning Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Understanding Output and Message Box Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Chapter 14 Viewing, Creating, and Executing Scripts

Viewing Script Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the View Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the View Script Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 14-3 14-4 14-6
Annex Manager User Guide vi
Contents
Creating New Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Displaying the Create Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Understanding the Create Script Window Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Creating a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Editing Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 Changing Parameter Values Using Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Displaying the Execute Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Understanding the Execute Script Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17 Executing a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Identifying Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 Create Script Command Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 Execute Script Command Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Chapter 15 Comparing and Copying Parameters and Values

Comparing Parameters and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Displaying the Compare Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Understanding the Compare Window Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 Selecting Annexes and Scripts for Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Using Compare Window Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 Comparing Parameters and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 Copying Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 Displaying the Copy Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 Understanding the Copy Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12 Copying Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 Identifying Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 Compare Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 Copy Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
Part 4 Control and Status Commands

Chapter 16 Booting and Resetting Annexes
Booting Annexes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Displaying the Boot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Understanding the Boot Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 Booting Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Resetting Annex Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9 Displaying the Reset Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10 Understanding the Reset Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Resetting an Annex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14 Broadcasting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15 Displaying the Broadcast Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16 Understanding the Broadcast Window Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16 Sending a Broadcast Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18 Configuring PRI Internal Modems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 Displaying the Set PRI Internal Modems Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 Understanding the Set PRI Internal Modems Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Annex Manager User Guide vii
Contents
Changing Internal Modem Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Chapter 17 Displaying Status Information

Displaying Annex Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Displaying the Annex Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Understanding the Annex Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5 Displaying Asynchronous Port Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5 Displaying the Annex Async Port Status Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5 Understanding the Annex Async Port Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10 Viewing Asynchronous Port Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10 Displaying Interface Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11 Displaying the Annex Interface Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11 Understanding the Annex Interface Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14 Displaying PRI Channels Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15 Displaying the Annex PRI Channels Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15 Understanding the Annex PRI Channels Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19 Viewing PRI Channels Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19 Displaying PRI Internal CSU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20 Displaying the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20 Understanding the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-21 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-27 Viewing PRI Internal CSU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-27 Displaying T1 Internal CSU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28 Displaying the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28 Understanding the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-29 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-34 Viewing T1 Internal CSU Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-35 Displaying T1 Modem Calls Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-35 Displaying the Annex Modem Calls Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36 Understanding the Annex Modem Calls Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-37 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38 Viewing T1 Modem Calls Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38 Displaying UDAS Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39 Displaying the Annex UDAS Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39 Understanding the Annex UDAS Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-40 Using Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-42 Viewing UDAS Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-42 Identifying Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43 Using the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43 Discovering Annexes using a Search Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-48 Updating and Saving Discover Annexes Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-49 Using the Discover Annexes/Network Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-50
Annex Manager User Guide viii
Contents
Part 5 Reference Information

Chapter 18 Annex Manager and SNMP
SNMP Protocol Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNMP Management Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SNMP Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the Annex for SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Community String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard MIB Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIB Object Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Describing and Naming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trap Hosts and Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annex Restrictions on Standard MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 18-2 18-3 18-3 18-4 18-4 18-4 18-5 18-6 18-6 18-7 18-8
Chapter 19 Annex Parameters Chapter 20 Troubleshooting
Annex Manager User Guide ix
Contents
Annex Manager User Guide x
Figures
Figure 1-1. Initialization Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Figure 2-1. Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Figure 2-2. List Box with Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Figure 2-3. Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Figure 2-4. Check Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Figure 2-5. Annex List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Figure 2-6. Set Window Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Figure 2-7. Compare Window Output Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Figure 3-1. File Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Figure 3-2. Conrmation Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Figure 3-3. Overwrite Conrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Figure 3-4. Cancel Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Figure 3-5. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Figure 3-6. Warning Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Figure 3-7. Window Item Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Figure 3-8. Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Figure 3-9. Save Output/Messages File Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Figure 3-10. Site Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Figure 4-1. Main Window in Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Figure 4-2. Main Window in Customize Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Figure 4-3. Automatic Discovery Process Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Figure 4-4. Creating Annex LIst Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Figure 4-5. Main Window with Annex List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Figure 4-6. Annex List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Figure 4-7. Annex Info Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Figure 4-8. Main Window Conguration Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Figure 4-9. Save Annex List Selection Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Figure 4-10. Open Annex List Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Figure 4-11. SNMP Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Figure 5-1. Setup Mode Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Figure 5-2. General Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Figure 5-3. Closing Conrmation Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Figure 6-1. General Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Figure 6-2. General (continued) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Figure 6-3. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Figure 7-1. Async Ports Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Figure 7-2. Edit Async Ports Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Figure 7-3. Edit Async Ports (continued) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Figure 7-4. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Figure 8-1. Call Defaults Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Figure 8-2. Channels Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Figure 8-3. T1/PRI Line Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Figure 9-1. Edit Modem Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Figure 9-2. Modem Denition ConfIrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Figure 9-3. Modem Denition ConfIrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Figure 9-4. Remove Modem Denition Conrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Figure 9-5. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Figure 9-6. Conguration File Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
xi
Figures
Figure 9-7. Edit Conguration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Figure 10-1. Security Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1 Figure 10-2. Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Figure 11-1. AppleTalk Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1 Figure 11-2. IP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3 Figure 11-3. Reset Parameters Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5 Figure 11-4. IPX Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 Figure 11-5. LAT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8 Figure 12-1. User Dened Parameter Groups Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Figure 12-2. User-dened Parameter Groups Name Entry Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8 Figure 13-1. Show Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Figure 13-2. Set Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-8 Figure 13-3. Differing Values Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13 Figure 13-4. Set Command Conrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14 Figure 13-5. Set Command Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15 Figure 14-1. View Script Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Figure 14-2. Create Script Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8 Figure 14-3. Create Script Port Entry Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-12 Figure 14-4. Script File Selection Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-14 Figure 14-5. Execute Script Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17 Figure 14-6. Script Port Entry Window for Execute Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 Figure 14-7. Execute Script Conrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21 Figure 14-8. Execute Script Reset Parameters Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-21 Figure 15-1. Compare Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2 Figure 15-2. Compare Window for two Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5 Figure 15-3. Compare Window for Annex and Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6 Figure 15-4. Compare Window for Two Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7 Figure 15-5. Copy Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-12 Figure 15-6. Copy Command Conrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-18 Figure 15-7. Copy Command Reset Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-18 Figure 16-1. Boot Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-2 Figure 16-2. Boot Command Conrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-8 Figure 16-3. Reset Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-10 Figure 16-4. Reset Command Conrmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-15 Figure 16-5. Broadcast Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-16 Figure 16-6. Set PRI Internal Modems Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-20 Figure 17-1. Annex Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-2 Figure 17-2. Annex Async Port Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-6 Figure 17-3. Annex Interface Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12 Figure 17-4. Annex PRI Channels Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-16 Figure 17-5. Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-21 Figure 17-6. Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-29 Figure 17-7. Annex Modem Calls Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-36 Figure 17-8. Annex UDAS Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-40 Figure 17-9. Discover Annexes/Search Device Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-44 Figure 17-10. Annex LIst File Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-49 Figure 17-11. Discover Annexes/Network Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-51 Figure 17-12. Discover Annexes/Network Process Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-52 Figure 17-13. Creating Annex List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-53
Annex Manager User Guide xii
Figures
Figure 18-1. Network Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Annex Manager User Guide xiii
Figures
Annex Manager User Guide xiv
Tables
Table 2-1. Mouse Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Table 2-2. Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Table 15-1. Comparison Output Box Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 Table 18-1. Supported Standard MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8 Table 18-2. RFC 1213 MIB-II Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9 Table 18-3. RFC 1398 Ethernet MIB Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10 Table 18-4. RFC 1316 Character MIB Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10 Table 18-5. RFC 1317 RS-232 MIB Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12 Table 18-6. RFC 1389 RIPv2 MIB Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14 Table 18-7. RFC 1243 AppleTalk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15 Table 18-8. RFC 1406 DS1 MIB Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
xv
Tables
Annex Manager User Guide xvi
Preface
nnex Manager is a graphical user interface that allows you to congure one or more Annexes easily and quickly. Annex Managers window software gives you access to all Annex SNMP-congurable parameters and commands. The Annex Manager User Guide is intended for System Administrators or others who need to congure Annex remote access communication servers. It assumes that you are familiar with network protocols and that you know the parameter values you need to congure Annexes.
This guide is part of the complete Annex documentation set. You should refer to other manuals for information not related to the Annex Manager graphical user interface.
About the Documentation

This book provides complete Annex Manager documentation. It explains all Annex Manager commands and gives you step-by-step directions for using each command. In addition, it describes each parameter eligible for Annex Manager processing.
xvii
Preface
The Annex Manager User Guide includes the following parts and chapters:
Introduction provides an overview of Annex Manager features and platforms. Part 1, Annex Manager Basics: Chapter 1, Installing Annex Manager provides directions for installing the software. Chapter 2, Window Basics presents basic windows tools that you can use throughout any Annex Manager session. Chapter 3, Working with Annex Manager Windows describes Annex Managers command, secondary, warning, and help windows. Chapter 4, Using the Main Window explains all features in the main window. It includes directions for creating and using Annex lists.
Part 2, Setup Mode: Chapter 5, Setup Mode Basics describes the windows and special features of the Setup mode. Chapter 6, Selecting General Settings discusses how to use the two General windows in Setup mode to set the most commonly-used Annex parameters. Chapter 7, Setting Asynchronous Port Values explains how to select and edit asynchronous port settings and modem denitions in Setup Mode.
xviii
Preface
Chapter 8, Setting ISDN Primary Rate Annex Values describes how to set frequently-used Call Default parameters, assign remote addresses to channels, and set the T1/PRI line switch type. Chapter 9, Editing Modem Denitions explains how to edit a modem denition in your conguration les. Chapter 10, Setting Security Values describes how to set frequently-used Annex security settings. Chapter 11, Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX and LAT Windows explains how to set frequently-used values for these protocols.
Part 3, Customize Mode: Chapter 12, Using and Creating Parameter Groups describes how to create your own parameter listings that you can use in any Annex Manager session. Chapter 13, Viewing and Changing Parameters provides instructions for using the Show and Set commands. Chapter 14, Viewing, Creating, and Executing Scripts explains the commands that allow you to create a set of parameter values, to store them as a script, and to apply a scripts values to one or more Annexes. Chapter 15, Comparing and Copying Parameters and Values discusses the commands that allow you to verify parameters and values in existing Annexes and scripts, and to apply one Annexs parameter values to other Annexes.
xix
Preface
Part 4, Control and Status Commands: Chapter 16, Booting and Resetting Annexes provides instructions for the Boot, Reset, and Broadcast commands. Chapter 17, Displaying Status Information describes the commands that give you status information for Annexes, ports, channels, and interfaces.
Part 5, Reference Information: Chapter 18, Annex Manager and SNMP presents a brief overview of SNMP and its relationship to the Annex and Annex Manager. Chapter 19, Annex Parameters describes each parameter eligible for Annex Manager processing. It includes each parameters type, allowable values, Annex Manager default value, and the pre-dened lists in which each parameter appears. Chapter 20, Troubleshooting gives detailed answers to the questions most frequently asked by Annex Manager users.
The Index provides detailed page references for the entire Annex Manager User Guide.
xx
Preface
Documentation Conventions
This books conventions allow you to use Annex Manager easily. You can use the book as a reference guide, nding descriptions of single elements, or follow directions through a chapter. The following table lists the Annex Manager User Guide conventions.
Convention: Represents:
Italics
Window font
Parameter font
Book titles, chapter titles, and chapter headings. Text from any Annex Manager window. Parameter names, tool names, lenames, and directory names. Keycaps. Window push buttons. Notes provide important information.
Key
Button Name
Warnings inform you about conditions that can have adverse effects on processing. Cautions notify you about dangerous conditions.
xxi
Preface
xxii
Introduction
nnex Manager allows system administrators to monitor and congure the Annexes in the network. It is a host-based, window oriented, conguration and management application designed to manage Bay Networks Annex remote access communication servers. Annex Manager offers the functionality of the older Annex host-based na conguration tool in an easier to use format. In addition, it provides basic monitoring capabilities that were previously available only by connecting directly to the Annex.
Annex Manager Features

Annex Manager offers advanced features through a graphical user interface. It allows you to:
Congure Annexes with Setup or Customize mode: Setup mode allows users to congure one or more Annexes by setting the most commonly used parameters. Customize mode lets users set individual Annex parameters and provides access to all main menu commands.
Simplify conguration operations using pre-dened parameter groups. Create additional parameter groups for easy conguration. Support multiple Annex hardware versions, including the Annex3, Micro Annex XL, Remote Annex RA2000, RA4000, RA6100, and RA6300 products; Cabletron CSMIM, CSMIM-T1, and MODMIM; and Bay Networks 5390.
xxiii
Introduction
Display online documentation for all Annex conguration parameters and for all Annex Manager windows and elds. Show and set values for all Annex conguration parameters. Save current conguration parameter settings into script les and restore settings from these les. Using script commands, you can: Create ASCII text les and edit them with standard workstation editors. Use predened conguration script les to congure Annexes and ports.
Compare parameters and values for two Annexes, for an Annex and a script, or for two scripts. Copy the current parameter settings from one port to another or from one Annex to another. Retrieve basic status and statistics information from an Annex or from a specic port on more than one Annex. Dene site specic defaults. Identify Annexes in the network. Save lists of Annex names or addresses. Display default values for each conguration parameter. Boot and reset Annexes. Edit Annex conguration le. Reset ports or Annex subsystems automatically after you change parameter settings.
xxiv
Introduction
Annex Manager Environment

Annex Manager is an SNMP-based management application that uses the X/Motif graphical environment for its user interface and the standard SNMP protocol to send commands to the Annex. Since it is designed to run stand-alone, Annex Manager includes statically-linked SNMP protocol routines and the X/Motif binary libraries. The installation process copies the appropriate binary executable and all the associated help and data les from the distribution media to the workstation's disk storage. Although it is not a requirement, you should consider installing Annex Manager on the same workstation you use for the Annex software installation. Annex Manager depends on the proprietary MIB dened for the Annex and on the various standard MIBs supported by the Annex. As such, Annex Manager cannot manage other SNMP-manageable nodes in the network, and is not intended to be a generic SNMP management tool. Annex Manager may be loosely coupled with several standard network management products such as SunNet Manager, HP/Openview, or IBM Netview for AIX. However, Annex Manager is not tightly integrated with these products.
xxv
Introduction
System Requirements
Release 2.3 of Annex Manager is intended to run on a workstation running BSD Unix (Sun Sparc, HP, RS/6000, SCO Unix). The following sections list the hardware and software requirements for installing and running Annex Manager.
Memory Requirements
You must have at least 10 MB of free disk space available prior to installation.We recommend at least 32 MB of RAM, although specic memory requirements vary depending on the type of workstation and the other tasks that run concurrently with Annex Manager. Annex Manager works best with a color monitor directly attached to the workstation or a color X-window terminal connected to the UNIX host over the network. Annex Manager also supports a grey-scale X-window terminal attached to the workstation. Any X-window terminal used with Annex Manager must have at least 2 MB of RAM.
Platforms
Annex Manager runs on the following platforms:
SunOS 4.1.3C or 4.1.4, Solaris 2.4 with SunOS compatibility mode, and Solaris 2.5. HP-UX 9.0.5 or 10.0. AIX 4.1.4. SCO/UNIX Release 3.2.
xxvi
Introduction
Sun Requirements
Annex Manager runs under SunOS and Solaris on SPARC Systems.
HP Requirements
Annex Manager runs under HP-UX 9.0.5 or 10.0 on HP 9000 Series 700 Workstations.
IBM Requirements
Annex Manager runs under AIX 4.1.4 on IBM RS/6000 workstations.
SCO Requirements
Annex Manager runs under SCO/Unix Release 3.2 and the X windowing system. You should have a 486 CPU with 16 MB RAM, 20 MB of available disk space, and a CD-ROM drive or a 3.5 oppy drive to install the software.
xxvii
Introduction
xxviii
Chapter 1 Installing Annex Manager

nnex Manager uses simple, step-by-step installation procedures. When you follow the directions in this section, you can install Annex Manager easily and quickly. This section includes:
Annex Manager Delivery and Platforms Installing the Application Setting Environment Variables Working with SunNet Manager Running Annex Manager
Annex Manager Delivery and Platforms

You can receive the Annex Manager installation le (tarle) on a disk, tape, or as an electronically-transmitted le. The application runs on AIX, HP-UX, Solaris, and SunOS platforms. You can use the instructions in this section for any Annex Manager medium or platform. The directions in this chapter use the window font to indicate the commands and names you need to type, and to show you samples of the installation script.
1-1
Chapter 1
Installing Annex Manager
Part 1
Annex Manager Basics
Installing the Annex Manager Application

Annex Manager installation uses the same installation script as Remote Annex Software. To install Annex Manager, you extract the installation script and run it. After you set environment variables, you can run the application. Annex Managers installation procedure uses simple, interactive steps.
Using the Installation Script
To install Annex Manager:

1. Create a directory in which to place the setup directory you extract from the media. The setup directory contains installation scripts, release notes, and a release version le. Type:
% mkdir annex/setup % cd annex
2. 3.
Extract the setup directory from the media. Type:

xvf <tar-device-name> setup
Execute the setup/install script. Type

% setup/install
The script responds with a welcome message as shown in the following example:
**************************************************** It is required that you run this script as root ***************************************************** This command is used to install Annex Software (boot images, security, command line management) and Annex Manager (X-Motif GUI management application). The versions installed are: Annex Software R13.2 Annex Manager R2.3 At any question prompt you can escape to a shell by typing "!". When you exit that shell you will bounce back to the question prompt. Many of the questions will have default answers in square brackets; pressing carriage return will select the default. Do you want to continue (y/n/q=quit) [y]:
1-2
Part 1
Chapter 1
4.
Select the media type you want to use to install the products:
What type of install will be performed? 1. Floppy Disks 2. Tape 3. Tarle previously copied to hard disk 4. Reinstall from previously extracted software on hard drive 5. Quit
5.
After you select a media type, the installation script requests further information based on your previous selection. The example below shows you the questions that the installation script asks for each media type: For Floppy Drives:
Enter the install source type [1]: 1 What is the name of the oppy drive that has the tarle Name:
For Tape Drives:

Enter the install source type [1]: 2 What is the name of the tape drive that has the tarle Name:
For the tarle:

Enter the install source type [1]: 3 What is the fully specied path and name of the tarle Name:
1-3
Chapter 1
Part 1
6.
Specify whether you want to install the Annex Software or Annex Manager. To install Annex Manager, enter 2 at the prompt:
After installing one product you will be asked if you want to install the other product. Indicate desired action: 1) Install Annex Software 2) Install Annex Manager 3) Quit Enter desired action [1]: 2 For the installation to proceed, we must copy software to a directory on a hard disk on the host. Please enter the name of the directory to be used.
7.
Specify a directory in which you want to install Annex Manager:

Enter the name of the Annex Manager installation directory. Directory name [/usr/annex/gui_am_R2.3]: /u1/annex_manager
To merge existing Annex Manager data with this new installation, enter a new, unused directory.
The installation script will extract Annex Manager from the tar device:
Calling command: tar -xf <tar_device> gui_am This may take some time.
1-4
Part 1
Chapter 1
8.
After the extraction, the installation script will begin to install Annex Manager and will prompt you for information:
Beginning Annex Manager 2.3 Installation The environment variable GUI_AM_DIR is set to '/usr/annex/ gui_am_R2.3'. The installation script will merge data from the current installation (unknown) in '/usr/annex/gui_am_R2.3' into the installation directory, '/u1/annex_manager'.
9.
If you installed Annex Manager previously, the installation merges existing data les in the new directory. To merge les, select c, as shown in the example below. If you do not want to merge les, abort the installation, make the necessary changes and restart the installation process from the beginning.
If this is correct, press 'c' to continue. Otherwise, - abort by pressing 'a - make the necessary changes for your correct installation - restart the installation process. Continue (c/a) [c]
10. The installation script detects the platform automatically and installs only the binaries for the appropriate platform:
The installation program has detected that you are currently running the SunOS operating system. Is this correct (y/n) [y]
1-5
Chapter 1
Part 1
11. Enter a username for the person responsible for maintaining Annex Manager les. If you enter root, only root can change these les:
The installation program will change the ownership of Annex Manager les to root. Only owner of certain conguration les may modify those les. To have the installation script change the ownership to another user id, enter the username now or press return to accept root. Enter Username [root] root
12. Enter group ids for users allowed to read and write to Annex Manager les:
The installation program will change the group id of Annex Manager les and directories to group 'bin'. Only members of this group can add data les. To have the installation script change the group id, enter the group id now, or press return to accept bin. Enter Group id [bin] annex
13. Conrm the installation directory you entered previously:

Annex Manager 2.3 will be installed in /u1/annex_manager If this is the correct directory press 'c' to continue or 'a' to abort the installation. Continue or Abort (c/a) [c] Installing Annex Manager 2.3 into '/u1/annex_manager/GUI_AM_R2.3'... Extracting data les... Extracting SunOS version of executable and uid...
1-6
Part 1
Chapter 1
14. List the users allowed to run Annex Manager and use the Set, Execute Script, Copy, Boot, and Reset commands:
In order for users to congure the Annex (use Set, Execute Script, Copy, Boot, and Reset commands) you must enter their user names in the user access list. root will be added to the user access list automatically. This is the current access list root Do you want to add other names to the user access list (y/n) [y] Enter user names (one per line) to permit set access. Type "<CR>", "." or ^D on a line by itself to end. Enter a? to print the current access list User name [<CR> to end]
15.
Select a color scheme for displaying Annex Manager:

What default color scheme do you want (c=color/m=mono) [c] m Finishing installation... Installation complete. To Run Annex Manager, you need to set your environment as follows: 1. If you have changed the recommended installation directory, set the GUI_AM_DIR environment variable to $PWD. 2. Put the $PWD/bin directory in your path 3. Set the DISPLAY environment to point to the host where you want Annex Manager to appear. You can put these commands in your .cshrc, .login, .prole, or some other equivalent script. To run the Annex Manager, type gui_am at the shell prompt. Consult the README le for release information.
When you complete this step, you can set up the environment to run Annex Manager.
1-7
Chapter 1
Part 1
Setting Environment Variables

When you complete installation procedures you need to set environment variables:
1. 2. 3. Set the GUI_AM_DIR environment variable to: /u1/annex_manager Put the /u1/annex_manager/bin directory in your path. Set the DISPLAY environment to point to the host where you want Annex Manager to appear. You can put these commands in your .cshrc, .login, .prole, or an equivalent script.
Working with SunNet Manager

Although Annex Manager is a stand-alone application, it can be loosely linked to SunNet Manager so that a network administrator can click on an icon representing an Annex in the network map and select Annex Manager from a list of tools for that node. The steps described here are specic to SunNet Manager Release 2.2 and may vary if you are using a different version of SunNet Manager.
1-8
Part 1
Chapter 1
Linking Annex Manager with SunNet Manager

You can link Annex Manager and SunNet Manager from the Console Commands/Tools option menu or from Annex icons. In both cases, you must link Annex Manager in the xylogics.schema le located in the /usr/ snm/struct directory. Adding Annex Manager to the Console Commands/Tools Option Menu To add Annex Manager to the Console Commands/Tools option menu:
Add the following information in the instance elementCommand section of the xylogics.schema le.
instance element Command ( (SNM_Console Annex-Manager... $GUI_AM_DIR/bin/gui_am) )
Please refer to Chapter 8 in the SunNet Manager User's Guide for information about adding Annex Manager to the Tools option menu while SunNet Manager is running.
1-9
Chapter 1
Part 1
Adding Annex Manager to the Annex Icons To add Annex Manager to the Annex Icons:
1. Add the following information in the instant elementCommand section of the xylogics.schema le.
instance elementCommand ( (component.annexII "Annex-Manager..." "$GUI_AM_DIR/bin/gui_am") (component.microannex "Annex-Manager..." "$GUI_AM_DIR/bin/gui_am") (component.annex3 "Annex-Manager..." "$GUI_AM_DIR/bin/gui_am") )
2.
Place mouse cursor on the Annex icon and click the MENU button to display the popup menu.
3.
On the popup menu, select Annex Manager under the Tools option.
Please refer to the SunNet Manager User's Guide for more information.
1-10
Part 1
Chapter 1
Using SunNet Manager Discovery to Find Annexes

The Discovery tool uses the object identier (OID) or system description retrieved from a device through SNMP to specify which type of element it will create. You must add components of each Annex model to the discover.conf le located in the /var/adm/snm directory for Discovery to create Annex elements. For more information, please refer to Chapter 5 in the SunNet Manager Reference Manual. Currently, all Annex models return the same OID for the sysOid object. SunNet Manager Discovery cannot distinguish among Annex hardware models. To use the Discovery tool:
Add the following lines to the #MAPPINGS section:
Annex3 Micro Annex Annex-II component.annex3 component.microannex component.annexII
1-11
Chapter 1
Part 1
Running Annex Manager

You can run Annex Manager after you install the application and set environment variables: Type gui_am at the shell prompt. If you did not set a path, type cd <install directory>/bin and then type gui_am or type the full path.
gui_am is a script le that sets environment variables and runs Annex Managers gui_am_exe executable. You should not invoke gui_am_exe from the command line.
A window appears that informs you about the initialization process.
Figure 1-1. Initialization Window
When the initialization process ends, this window disappears and you can use Annex Manager.
1-12
Chapter 2 Window Basics

nnex Manager provides simple tools for controlling window displays and entering information. This chapter teaches you to use Annex Manager windows. It includes the following sections:
Window Elements describes the components that comprise most Annex Manager windows. Mouse and Keyboard Techniques explains common mouse operations and corresponding keyboard commands. Controlling the Window Display provides instructions for changing a windows size, moving a window, reducing a window to an icon, using scroll bars, and using the control menu. Using Fields, Buttons, and Boxes describes each type of Annex Manager eld, button, and box, and gives instructions for selecting and entering information.
After you become familiar with the techniques described here, you will be able to use Annex Manager easily and efciently.
This book describes all window conventions for the Motif window manager. If you use another window manager, the methods you use may vary.
2-1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Window Elements
Annex Manager uses Motif elements such as title, menu and scroll bars, list boxes, and help windows. Annex Managers main window serves as an example, since it uses most available elements.
Control menu button Title bar Menu bar Minimize button Maximize button
Text eld Cursor
WARNING
Push button
List box
Option button
Scroll Border
Figure 2-1. Window Elements
If you are familiar with windows applications, you recognize many elements in the main window.
2-2
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
The elements listed below can appear in any Annex Manager window:
Title bar labels each window. Borders allow you to change a windows size using a mouse. Control menu button displays a menu for moving, sizing, and closing a window. Mouse pointer shows you the mouse location in a window. When you move the mouse, the pointer moves accordingly. Cursor, sometimes called an insertion point, appears in a text eld when you can enter or change the elds value. You can type only when you see the cursor blinking. Scroll bars allow you to move through a list box when information is too long or too wide for the box. You can use the scroll bars to view all available text. Minimize button converts all open Annex Manager windows to an icon on your desktop. Maximize button toggles the main windows size, enlarging it from the standard size to ll your terminals screen or restoring it to its original size. Text elds display specic pieces of information. You can type new values or change existing values in some text elds. List boxes display items you can select for Annex Manager processing. The mouse can select one or more items and can display help information about a parameter. Message and output boxes display information about the actions you take and about Annex Manager operations. Message boxes monitor action, while output boxes show the results of an action. Both boxes can include warning or status messages. Option buttons, marked with a small rectangle ( ), provide several selections automatically. You can hold the mouse button to display all options and to select the one you need.
2-3
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Push buttons are large rectangular buttons that instruct the system to take action. When a push buttons label is followed by an ellipsis (...), these buttons display an additional window. Radio buttons, marked with a diamond-shape ( ), turn a selection on or off. These buttons appear in sets of two or more; you can select only one button in each set. Check buttons, marked with a square ( ), turn a selection on or off. You can select one or more buttons in the set.
The pull-down menu appears only in the main window:

The menu bar stores the pull-down menus you can use for Annex Manager commands and for help facilities. Some menu selections duplicate Annex Manager buttons; other operations appear only in these menus.
Mouse and Keyboard Techniques

Annex Manager allows you to navigate in windows and enter information using a mouse, keyboard commands, or a combination of both methods. This section tells you how the mouse works and explains the keyboard commands that can substitute for the mouse.
Using the Mouse

Annex Manager uses a mouse to display windows, select text elds, lists, and buttons, and respond to warning and help windows. You use the same point and click mouse techniques found in other interfaces. The following table lists terms, actions, and results that occur when you use the mouse.
2-4
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Table 2-1. Mouse Operation
Term Click Double click
If you: Press and release the mouse button Press and release the mouse button twice, quickly Hold the mouse button and move the mouse
The mouse: Selects a window, box, text eld, button, or list item Displays help when cursor is on an Annex parameter or parameter group Moves a window, scrolls through information in a box, selects text, or selects a range of list items Relocates the mouse pointer
Drag
Point
Move the mouse pointer to an item
Annex Manager does not use the right or center mouse buttons. For information about selecting items from lists, see Using List Boxes later in this chapter.
Using Keyboard Commands

Annex Manager provides the following keyboard commands that can substitute for clicking or dragging the mouse pointer.
2-5
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Figure 2-2. Keyboard Commands
If you press:
Tab
Annex Manager: Places the cursor in the next eld, box, or button
Shift
Tab
Places the cursor in the previous eld, box, or button Selects an item from a list or menu
Return
Space bar Space bar + ,

Shift
Displays information about an Annex list item Moves the pointer through a list or a menu Selects text in a eld Acknowledges le selection windows, warning boxes, and help messages
, +
, or
or
Return
or or
Delete
Deletes a character to the cursors right or left, based on your keyboard conguration. Displays a help message for a list item, a eld, or a button Places the cursor in the menu bar
Help
F1
F10
Ctr;
+ +
Tab
moves the cursor to the next eld +

Tab
Shift
Ctr;
moves the cursor to the previous eld
Clicking the mouse button produces the same result as using Tab , Shift + Tab , the space bar, or Return . Dragging the pointer produces the same result as using arrow keys or Shift + arrow keys.
2-6
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Controlling the Window Display

Annex Manager allows you to arrange your desktop to suit your own work style. You can reduce the Annex Manager application to an icon, change a windows size, move a window, and scroll through lists and text areas. This section gives you instructions for these operations and for using the control menu.
Changing a Windows Size

Annex Manager displays windows in a default size. You can change a windows size by using the maximize button ( ), which expands the window to ll your desktop, or by using the mouse, which lets you choose any size for the window.
Using Borders to Change Window Size
To change a windows size using the mouse:

1. Place the mouse pointer in the windows border.
To size the entire window, place the pointer in the windows corner; its shape changes to .
To size only the horizontal or vertical dimensions, place the pointer in the border; its shape changes to
2.
Hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer
The windows border becomes an outline as you move the pointer.

3. Release the mouse button when the border reaches the size you need.
2-7
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Using the Maximize Button to Change Window Size
To change a windows size using the maximize button:

1. 2. Move the cursor to the maximize ( ) button in the windows upper right corner. Click the left mouse button.
The window expands to ll your desktop.
To restore the window to its original size after you use the maximize button, click the button again.
You can also use the Control menus Size option to alter a windows size. For more information, see Using the Control Menu later in this chapter.
Using Annex Manager Icons

If you need room on your desktop for other applications, you can reduce any open Annex Manager window to an icon. When you restore an icon, the window opens in the size and location that displayed before you reduced it.
Reducing a Window to an Icon
To reduce a window to an icon:

1. 2. Move the mouse pointer to the minimize ( ) button in the windows upper right corner. Click the mouse button.
The window icon appears on your screen.
2-8
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Restoring an Icon
To restore a window to its original size and location:

1. 2. Move the pointer over the icon. Click the mouse button to display the icon menu.
The icon menu offers the same selections as the control menu.
3. Move the pointer to Restore and click the left mouse button again.
You can skip steps 2 and 3 by double clicking on the icon.
Moving Windows and Icons

You can move a window or the Annex Manager icon to a more convenient location on your desktop. Since you may use certain Annex Manager windows more often than others, you can position these windows to suit your needs.
Moving a Window
To move a window:
1. 2. Place the pointer in the windows title bar. Drag the pointer.
The windows border becomes an outline as you move the pointer.

3. Release the mouse button when the border reaches the new location.
If one window on your desktop partially covers another, you can click the mouse on the covered window to bring it forward.
Moving an Icon
If you have arranged your desktop so that an icon is covered by another window, use the Lower option described later in this section and then move the icon using the steps listed above.
2-9
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Using Scroll Bars

When a box is too small to display all available information, scroll bars let you view complete lists or messages. The sample below shows a list box with scroll bars.
scroll box in an active scroll bar
WARNING scroll box in an inactive scroll bar
Figure 2-3. List Box with Scroll Bars
Scroll bars are horizontal or vertical areas that contain scroll boxes. In the example above, scroll boxes are the white area. These boxes indicate whether the scroll bar is active: scroll boxes change size to reect the proportion of material that the window displays. The example above shows active and inactive scroll bars:
The vertical scroll bar is active. The scroll box lls about one third of the available space, indicating that there is more information. The horizontal scroll bar is inactive. The scroll box lls the bar, indicating that complete information is displayed.
2-10
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
When scroll bars are active, you can click the mouse button to move the display one line at a time or one page (the size of the box) at a time. You can view information from any position in the list by dragging the mouse pointer.
Using the Mouse to Scroll
To view one line at a time:

1. 2. Move the pointer to the arrow at the top or bottom of the scroll bar. Click the mouse button.
From the top arrow, the display moves up one line. From the bottom arrow, it moves down one line.
To view one page at a time:

1. 2. Move the pointer to the scroll bar above or below the vertical scroll box or to the left or right of the horizontal scroll box. Click the mouse button.
The list displays according to the location of the pointer. For example, if you place the pointer below the vertical scroll box, the display moves down one page.
To scroll through the display:

1. 2. Move the pointer to the scroll box. Hold the left mouse button.
The list moves as long as you hold the mouse button.

3. Release the mouse button when you reach the position you want.
Using Arrow Keys to Scroll
You can use the or arrow keys to scroll through a list or message box. If you click an arrow key, the display moves one line at a time. If you hold an arrow key, the display scrolls.
2-11
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Using the Control Menu

The control menu appears in every Annex Manager window. It allows you to move and size a window, to change the window to and from an icon, and to control the windows display in relation to other windows on your desktop. This section gives you directions for using each control menu option.
The Close option appears in Annex Manager running the Motif window manager only in the main window. Other window Close managers may vary. You should always use the buttons provided on Annex Manager screens.
The control menu uses standard window features:

Active options appear in black type and inactive options appear in grey. The key sequence for each option appears next to the option. If your keyboard does not have a key labeled Alt, consult your hardware documentation to nd the corresponding key. The rst letter of each option is underlined. When you display the control menu, you can select an option by typing the underlined letter on your keyboard.
Displaying the Control Menu Window

Displaying the menu
To display a control menu option:

1. 2. 3. Move the pointer to the menu control button in the windows upper left corner. Click the mouse button or hold it down to display the menu. Click the mouse button on the option you need, or drag the pointer to the option and release the button.
You can also type the underlined letter.
2-12
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Using Control Menu Options The Maximize, Minimize, and Restore options allow you to change a window to and from an icon.
The Maximize option enlarges a window to the size of your desktop. The Minimize option shrinks a window to an icon. The Restore option returns all open Annex Manager windows to their original sizes.
Maximize and Minimize have the same effect on a window as the buttons in
the windows upper right corner. For more information about these buttons, refer to Using Annex Manager Icons earlier in this chapter.
Using the Move Option
To alter a windows position on your desktop:

1. Select Move and click the mouse button.
The pointer changes to and the windows border becomes an outline as you move the pointer.
2. Release the mouse button when the border reaches the new location.
The window appears in its new location and the pointer returns to .
You can move a window by following these steps or by using the directions in Moving Windows and Icons on page 2-9.
2-13
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Using the Size Option
The Size option lets you shrink or stretch a window. To change a windows size:
1. Select Size and click the mouse button.
The pointer changes to

2.
Move the pointer to the border.
The pointer changes to

3.
Continue to move the pointer to reach the size you need.
The border becomes an outline as you move the pointer.

4. Release the mouse button when the border reaches the new size.
The window displays in its new size and the pointer returns to
You can change a windows size by using this option or by following the directions in Changing a Windows Size on page 2-7. The Lower option moves any Annex Manager window to the back of your desktop. When you use this option on overlapping windows, the window in the foreground moves, revealing the window that was covered.
Using the Lower Option
To change the display:

1. 2. Select the window you want to move. Select Lower and click the mouse button.
If you position a window so that it is partially visible, you can click anywhere on its border to bring it to the foreground.
Using the Close Option
The Close option appears only in the Annex Manager main window. This option allows you to exit Annex Manager software. While this option is available, you should always use the Annex Manager Exit entry in the main menu.
2-14
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Using Fields, Buttons, and Boxes

Text elds, buttons, and boxes allow you to select or enter information in an Annex Manager window. This section explains how you can recognize these elements and gives you directions for using each one.
Using Text Fields

A text eld contains a single piece of information displayed in a box. For example, the main window provides text elds for Annex names, passwords, and port numbers. Some text elds allow you to enter or change values; others simply display information.
Entering Text Field Information
The cursor appears in a text eld when you can enter or change the elds value. To use a text eld:
1. Place the pointer in the eld and click the mouse button.
The border of the eld is highlighted and the cursor blinks.

2. Type new information or edit the value that displays.
You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor or the Shift and arrow keys to select text when you are editing existing text.
If you edit a text eld that uses more than one line, you must press Ctr; + Tab to move to the next eld, or Shift + Ctr; + Tab to move to the previous eld.
When you complete your work in the window, Annex Manager uses the new value for processing.
2-15
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Using Buttons
Annex Manager provides several types of buttons that allow you to select information. Buttons control list box contents, window displays, and Annex Manager processing. This section describes each button type and gives you directions for using buttons. An option button appears as a box with a small rectangle ( ) following the text. These buttons display a menu: you can select one item and place it in the box.
Selecting Items in Option Buttons
To use an option button:

1. Move the pointer inside the button and click or hold the mouse button.
The menu appears.

2. Move the mouse to highlight the item you want and click or release the mouse button.
Your selection appears in the box.
Push buttons instruct the system to begin a process or display a new window. For example, a push button can add an Annex to a list or show parameter values. These buttons display as boxes with text inside ( Help ).
Using Push Buttons
To use a push button:

1. 2. Move the pointer inside the button. Click the mouse button.
An ellipsis (...) following a push button label indicates that pressing the button will display another window.
2-16
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Using Radio Buttons Radio buttons allow you to turn a selection on or off. These buttons are marked with a diamond shape ( ) that the window manager lls in when you select a button. Radio buttons always appear in a box in sets of two or more. You can select only one button in each set.
Selecting Radio Buttons
To use a radio button:

1. 2. Move the pointer to the diamond shape ( ). Click the mouse button.
When you select a radio button, the diamonds center is highlighted. If you select another button in the set, the highlighting of the rst button disappears.
Figure 2-4 shows the radio buttons in the Boot command.
Figure 2-4. Radio Buttons
2-17
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Using Check Buttons Check buttons are marked with a small square ( ) that precedes a label. They allow you to turn a selection on or off. You can select one or more check buttons.
Selecting Check Buttons
To use check buttons:

1. 2. Move the pointer to the square shape ( ). Click the mouse button.
When you turn a selection on, the center of the square is highlighted. When you turn a selection off, the center of the square is empty.
3. Move the pointer to the next check button you want to select and repeat steps 1 and 2.
When you select more than one button, the previously selected buttons remain highlighted.
Figure 2-5 shows the check buttons in the Create Script command. The Main Window Parameters button is turned on.
Figure 2-5. Check Buttons
2-18
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Using List Boxes

Annex Manager uses several types of boxes:
List boxes display items you can select for Annex Manager processing. When complete information cannot t into a box, horizontal and vertical scroll bars allow you to view the complete list. Message boxes monitor Annex Manager operations. These boxes can include status and error messages. Output boxes display the results of Annex Manager processing.
Selecting Items in List Boxes List boxes store information about Annexes, parameters, and les. These boxes, which always include an identifying label, allow you to select items for Annex Manager processing. The example below shows an Annex List box.
Figure 2-6. Annex List Box
2-19
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Annex Manager provides several methods for selecting and deselecting items from a list box. You can combine these methods in any list box that permits you to select more than one item. Selected items are always highlighted.
Selecting One Item
Some lists permit you to select only one item in a list box. To select one item:
1. 2. Move the pointer to the item you want to select. Click the mouse button.
Annex Manager highlights the item, indicating that it is selected.
You can search through a list by selecting one item and typing the beginning letters of the item you want to nd. The list will scroll automatically to the item that matches your entry.
Selecting More than One Item
In many lists, you can select more than one item. To select items one at a time:
1. Move the pointer to the rst item you want to select and click the mouse button.
The item appears highlighted, indicating that it is selected.

2. 3. Move the pointer to the next item you want to select. Hold
Ctrl
and click the mouse button.
The item is selected in addition to any items you selected previously. You can repeat this step to select as many items as you need.
2-20
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Selecting a Range of Items
Annex Manager provides two ways to select a range of items, depending on your previous selections. To select a range of items when you have not yet selected items:
1. Move the pointer to the rst item you want to select and hold the mouse button.
Annex Manager highlights the rst item.

2. Drag the pointer through all items you want to select.
Each item is highlighted as the pointer moves past.

3. Release the mouse button on the last item you want in the range.
Annex Manager highlights all items to indicate that they are selected.
You can skip steps 2 and 3 by selecting the rst item in the range, moving the pointer to the last item you want to select, pressing Shift , and clicking the mouse.
Adding a Range of Items
To select a range when you have already selected items and/or ranges:
1. Move the pointer to the rst item you want to select, hold and hold the mouse button.
Ctrl
Annex Manager highlights the rst item.

2. Drag the pointer through all items you want to select.
Each item is highlighted as the pointer moves past.

3. Release the mouse button on the last item you want in the range.
Annex Manager highlights all items, indicating that they are selected.
You can skip steps 2 and 3 by selecting the rst item in the range, moving the pointer to the last item you want to select, pressing Shift , and clicking the mouse.
2-21
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Deselecting Items in LIst Boxes You can deselect single items or a range of items in a list box. In addition, you can deselect all your previous selections.
Deselecting One Item
To deselect a list item:

1. 2. Move the pointer to any selected item. Hold
Ctrl
and click the mouse button.
The highlighting disappears, indicating that the item is deselected. Deselecting a Range of Items
To deselect a range of items:

1. 2. Move the pointer to the rst item you want to deselect, hold Ctrl , and hold the mouse button. Drag the pointer through all items you want to deselect.
Each items highlighting disappears as the pointer moves past.

3. Release the mouse button on the last item you want to deselect.
Annex Manager removes highlighting from the range of items, indicating that they are no longer selected. Deselecting All Items
To deselect all items in a list box:

1. 2. Move the pointer to any item in the list box. Click the mouse button.
Highlighting disappears from all items except the one on which you placed the pointer.
3. Keep the pointer on the remaining selected item, hold click the mouse button.
Ctrl
, and
Annex Manager removes highlighting from the item. The list box does not contain selected items.
2-22
Part 1
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Understanding Message and Output Boxes

Message and output boxes display details about Annex Manager processing: their contents report on the operations you use and can include error and status messages. You cannot enter information in these boxes. Reading Message Boxes
Message boxes monitor Annex Manager operations by displaying status and error information. The example below shows the Set message box.
WARNING
Figure 2-7. Set Window Message Box
This message box summarizes the Show Values command: it lists each parameter and noties you that Annex Manager has completed the Show Values request.
2-23
Chapter 2
Window Basics
Part 1
Reading Output Boxes

Output boxes show the results of Annex Manager commands. Like message boxes, output boxes can include error and status messages. The example below shows the Compare output box for two Annexes.
Figure 2-8. Compare Window Output Box
In this example, the output box displays the differences in parameter values between Annexes. The box lists each parameter and includes the values for each Annex.
2-24
Chapter 3 Working with Annex Manager Windows

nnex Manager looks and works like many graphical user interfaces. Its main window displays basic information. Each entry you select from the pull-down menu or from the main window displays its own command window. Some commands require additional windows when you enter or change values. This chapter describes Annex Manager windows in the following sections:
Understanding Window Types discusses the relationship between Annex Managers main, command, and secondary windows. Using Annex Manager Menus describes each entry in the pulldown menu. Using Secondary Windows explains File Selection, Conrmation, Reset Parameters, and Cancel windows. Understanding Warning Windows tells you how and why warnings appear and gives you instructions for acknowledging these windows. Using Help Windows describes the three types of online help that give you information about Annex Manager commands and selections. Changing Site Defaults explains the Site Parameters command, which changes default values that display in the Show command and in help messages.
3-1
Chapter 3
Working with Annex Manager Windows
Part 1
Understanding Window Types

Annex Manager uses several kinds of windows to help you congure Annexes:
The main window always appears rst and stays on your desktop as long as you are using Annex Manager. This window includes the pull-down menu, which gives you access to all Annex Manager commands. Each command or Setup mode selection uses its own window. These windows appear when you select pull-down menu entries or Setup eld selections. Some windows require secondary windows for processing. Annex Manager uses the following windows, which are described later in this chapter. The File Selection window lets you enter a path and le name or choose an existing le in which to store the scripts and lists you create. In addition, this window lets you select les for storing help messages and command output. The Conrmation window appears when you change an Annex conguration or when you choose to overwrite an existing le that you created. This window gives you information about the changes that will occur. The Cancel window appears if an Annex Manager command takes a longer than average time for processing. It lets you know how much processing has occurred and allows you to cancel the command.
3-2
Part 1
Chapter 3
The Reset Parameters window appears only when you select Conrm Auto Reset from the pull-down menu. This window informs you that Annex Manager will reset the Annexes you selected.
Some commands have their own secondary windows. For example, the Port Entry window appears only in the Create Script and Execute Script commands. Although these are secondary windows, this book describes them as part of each command.
Using Annex Manager Menus

Annex Managers main window gives you access to all Annex Manager commands and options through its pull-down menu. This menu is located just below the windows title bar. The following list describes the menus headings as well as the commands and operations it provides:
The File heading provides tools you can use with Annex Manager commands.
Open Annex List places a saved Annex List in the main windows list box. Save Annex List allows you to create an Annex list and to save it for future use. View Script
displays complete information for an existing lets you choose parameters and values for a
script.
Create Script
new script.
Exit
closes Annex Manager software.
3-3
Chapter 3
Part 1
The Congure heading includes the commands you use to recongure an Annex:
Boot
allows you to boot one or more active Annexes. sends messages to all ports on one or more
Broadcast
Annexes. two commands that identify Annexes and other devices on your network.
Reset Discover Annexes provides
changes a specic Annex or port conguration without rebooting. access to Annex Managers Setup mode.
Setup provides
Compare matches parameters and values for two Annexes, an Annex and a script, or two scripts. Copy copies parameter values from one Annex to one or more Annexes. Execute Script
applies a scripts values to one or more
Annexes.
Set
lets you change parameter values for one or more Annexes. displays current parameter values for one or more Annexes.
Show
3-4
Part 1
Chapter 3
The Options heading includes commands that let you create parameter groups, view SNMP information, set your sites SNMP default values, and change SNMP defaults. you to select parameters and store them as a group. lets you change your sites parameter default values that display in Help messages and in the Show command.
Site Parameters SNMP Information displays basic SNMP information about a User-dened Parameter Groups allows
single Annex. determines whether Annex Manager requires you to verify a reset procedure for the Set, Copy and Execute Script commands. If you choose this option, (the default turns it on) you must respond to the window that appears before Annex Manager will change a conguration. If you do not select this option, the reset procedure occurs automatically.
Conrm Auto Reset
The Status heading provides access to commands that give you current Annex, port, and interface information:
Annex Status
displays basic information about an Annex.
Async Port displays
basic information about one or more asynchronous ports. you to view current information about an Annexs interfaces. basic information about ISDN Primary Rate
Interface allows
PRI provides
Annexes.
T1 displays
basic statistics about T1 ports. information for all active tunnel interfaces. system information for Annexes
DVS provides
Verify Annex State checks
The Mode menu lets you choose Setup or Customize modes.
3-5
Chapter 3
Part 1
Using Secondary Windows

An Annex Managers secondary window appears when a command requires information that its window does not accommodate. For example, if you create a new script, the File Selection window allows you to specify a path and le name that will store the script. This section describes the secondary windows common to more than one command. It includes:
Using the File Selection Window Understanding the Conrmation Window Using the Cancel Window Using the Reset Parameters Window Some commands have their own secondary windows. For example, the Port Entry window appears only in the Create Script and Execute Script commands. This book describes these exclusive secondary windows as part of each command.
3-6
Part 1
Chapter 3
Using the File Selection Window

File Selection windows allow you to select a le from a list box or to enter
a directory and le information. Annex Manager commands then use the les you select for processing. Figure 3-1 below shows the le selection window that displays when you use the Open Annex List command.
WARNING
Figure 3-1. File Selection Window
The le selection windows title reects the command name. For example, the Open Annex List command displays the Annex List Selection window illustrated above; the Create Script window displays the Script Selection window. Each command displays les appropriate for its processing. For example, the Open Annex List command displays the default directory for Annex lists, while the Create Script window displays the default script directory. We recommend that you use the default directory included in the le selection window.
Annex Manager User Guide 3-7
Chapter 3
Part 1
Understanding the File Selection Window Format All le selection windows use the following elds, boxes, and buttons:
The Filter eld determines the information that appears in the Directories and Files boxes. This eld displays the default directory for the command you are using. An asterisk indicates that all les in the lters directory appear in the Files box. If you enter another le path or select a directory from the Filter Directories box and press Return or , the Directories box lists all directories and the Files box lists all les located in the specied Filter directory. The Directories box lists all directories specied by the lter. When you select a directory, your selection is added to the Filter Filter eld. If you then choose , the Files box displays all les in the directory you selected.
The Filter eld considers text that follows the last slash to be a le lter. If you select a directory from the Directories box without clearing the Filter eld, the le selection window places your selection in the existing path, preceding the le lter.
The Files box lists all les in the specied directory. When you click on a le name, it appears in the Selection eld. The Selection eld stores the le that the current command will use. You can: Use the Filter eld, Directories box, and Files box to locate an existing le name or to add a new le name to an existing directory. Enter another path and le name when you need a le from another directory, or when you want to add a new le name to another directory.
OK When you choose , the command you are using works on the le you specied. If you are changing an existing le, a conrmation window appears so that you can verify your choice.
3-8
Part 1
Chapter 3
Using Push Buttons The le selection window uses the following push buttons:

OK
activates the command you are using for the le you
specied. changes the windows display. When you type a new path and le name in the Filter eld or select an item from Filter the Directories window and press , the Filter eld, Directories box, Files box, and Selection eld display information based on your entry.
Filter Cancel
removes the le selection window from your
display. displays a window that explains how the le selection window works for the command you are using.
Help
Editing Files You can use an ASCII text editor to change the list or script les you save. Annex Manager veries each le according to its rst four lines. When you edit these les, you must use Annex Manager conventions:
List les begin with:
# # DB_VERSION: V1.0 # FORMAT: Annex Name | Community String | Timeout | Retries #
Script les begin with:

# # DB_VERSION: V1.0 # FORMAT: Parameter Name | Port Type | Port Number | Value #
You can enter comment lines as long as each line begins with the pound sign (#). Annex Manager processing ignores these lines.
You can nd additional information about editing les in Chapter 4 and Chapter 14.
Annex Manager User Guide 3-9
Chapter 3
Part 1
Understanding the Conrmation Window

The Conrmation window appears when you use a command that will change an Annex conguration, or when you choose an eligible existing le from the le selection window. This window gives you information about the changes that will occur. Figure 3-2 shows a sample Conrmation window for the Copy command.
Figure 3-2. Conrmation Window

OK You must respond to this window. You can select to continue Cancel the commands processing, or to return to the command window.
Figure 3-3 shows the window that appears when you try to store a list in an existing le.
Figure 3-3. Overwrite Conrmation Window
3-10
Part 1
Chapter 3
Using the Cancel Window

The Cancel window appears if an Annex Manager command takes a longer than average time for processing. It lets you know how much processing has occurred and allows you to cancel the command.
Cancelling a command does not restore values or undo processing that occurred before you issued the cancellation.
Figure 3-4 shows the window for the Discover Annexes command.
WARNING
Figure 3-4. Cancel Window
The Cancel window uses a dynamic graph to show you the percentage of processing that has taken place. If you nd that the operation is taking too long, you can press Cancel to return to the command window.
3-11
Chapter 3
Part 1
Using the Reset Parameters Window

The pull-down menus Conrm Auto Reset entry determines whether Annex Manager requires you to verify a reset procedure for the Set, Copy, and Execute Script commands. If you changed parameters that require resetting an Annex, Annex Manager displays the Reset Parameters window (see Figure 3-5) after the command completes its processing. If you choose Conrm Auto Reset, you must respond to the Reset Parameters window. Selecting the Conrm Auto Reset Option It is selected when you begin using Annex Manager. If you have deselected this entry, you can click the mouse on Conrm Auto Reset in the Options menu to activate the window.
Conrm Auto Reset is the only menu entry that is a check button.
WARNING
Figure 3-5. Reset Parameters Window
If you use Set, Copy, or Execute Script to change parameter values and do not select the Conrm Auto Reset option, Annex Manager will reset the Annexes you selected without notifying you. If you change values for port parameters only, Annex Manager will reset the ports you selected. It will not reset the entire Annex.
3-12
Part 1
Chapter 3
Understanding Warning Windows

Annex Manager displays warning windows when you enter invalid information or choose an option that Annex Manager cannot process. You must acknowledge warning windows before you can continue your work. Figure 3-6 shows a warning window that appears for a command that requires you to select an Annex.
Figure 3-6. Warning Window
Acknowledging Warning Windows
To acknowledge a warning window:

1. 2. Move the pointer to
OK
Click the mouse button.
The warning window disappears. You can also acknowledge the warning box by moving the pointer into the box and pressing
Return
After you acknowledge the warning window you can return to your work.
If you do not understand why a warning window appeared, acknowledge the window and consult the help facility for more detailed information.
3-13
Chapter 3
Part 1
Using Help Windows

The online help facility gives you detailed information about the commands, boxes, elds, buttons, parameter groups and parameters you use to congure an Annex. Annex Manager offers three types of online help:
Information about Customize mode elds, commands and parameters appears in a standard Annex Manager window. You can save this windows information in a text le. Information about all Setup mode elds, single elds in Customize mode, and all boxes and buttons appears in a small window labelled Window Item Help. You cannot save the contents of these windows. Short descriptions of Setup mode elds appear automatically at the bottom of every Setup mode window.
This section explains how you can use help windows. It includes:
Displaying Help Windows Understanding the Help Window Format Saving Help Window Contents
Displaying Help Windows

You can use keyboard commands to display information about elds, boxes, and buttons. Mouse commands display information about command windows and about parameters.
3-14
Part 1
Chapter 3
Displaying Window Item Help

Displaying a Help Window
To display help about a eld, box, or button:

1. Move the cursor to any eld, box, or button.
You can use the mouse or Tab to move the cursor. Be sure that the item you are selecting is highlighted.
2. Press
F1
or
Help
The Window Item Help window appears.
Figure 3-7 shows a help message for the main windows Add button.
WARNING
Figure 3-7. Window Item Help
Acknowledging Help Windows

Responding to a Help Window
You can acknowledge this kind of help window at any time:

1. 2. Move the pointer to
OK
.
Return
Click the mouse button or press
The help window disappears.
You cannot save information directly from Window Item Help. However, the help windows that appear when you press the commands button include information on each window element and allow you to save window contents.
3-15
Chapter 3
Part 1
Displaying Command and Parameter Help Information about command windows and parameters appears in a large window that includes a box and push buttons. You can leave this window on your desktop, use it for any command or parameter, and save the contents of the box in a le.
Displaying Command Information
To display information about a command:

1. 2. Display any command window or the main window. Click
Help
The Help window appears. From the main window, use the pulldown menus Help entry and select Main Window. The Help entry also includes a help message that describes the main menu bar. Displaying Parameter Information
To display information about a parameter group or a single parameter:

1. 2. Display any command window that includes parameter groups or single parameter names. Double Click the mouse button on the parameter name or the parameter group name.
The Help window appears.
3-16
Part 1
Chapter 3
Figure 3-8 shows the Help window for the Set command.
Figure 3-8. Help Window
You can leave this kind of help window on your desktop as you use Annex Manager. Each time you select command help or help on parameters, Annex Manager adds help text to the window.
3-17
Chapter 3
Part 1
Understanding the Help Window Format

The Help window that stores command and parameter help uses a box and push buttons. If you keep this window open on your desktop, you can use it to display one or more help messages at any time. Reading the Help Window Box The Help window displays information in a single box. These messages mirror the Annex Manager User Guide. They include:
An overview of each command. Information about the command windows format. Descriptions of the elds, buttons, and boxes that comprise the command window. Special notes or warnings about using the command. Short descriptions of each parameter eligible for Annex Manager processing.
You can save help messages that appear in this box, but you cannot edit them or delete portions of their text. Using Push Buttons The Help window uses the following push buttons:

Clear
removes all existing text from the window.
Save Help displays the standard File Selection window, which allows you to save the windows contents in a le. Close
removes the Help window from your display.
3-18
Part 1
Chapter 3
Saving Help Window Contents

You can leave the Help window on your desktop and add information to it as you use Annex Manager. The help window allows you to save its contents in a le at any time.
You can include parameter help in Help windows by highlighting a parameter or an input area and pressing F1 or Help .
Saving Help Information
To save help messages:

1. Display the Help window.
You can display this window by clicking any commands Help button or by clicking twice on a parameter name or parameter group.
2. Press
Save Help
The Save Output/File Selection window (see Figure 3-9).
Figure 3-9. Save Output/Messages File Selection Window
3-19
Chapter 3
Part 1
The Save Output/Messages File Selection window displays the default text directory. It allows you to:
Overwrite an existing le that you created by selecting its name. When you choose an existing le, a conrmation window lets you verify your selection. You cannot overwrite a le that someone else created. Enter a new le name.
When you choose , Annex Manager stores the contents of the OK Help window in the le you specied.
Changing Site Defaults

The Site Parameters command lets you change default parameter values that display in the Show command if you select the Verbose Output button that displays in help messages. You can use this command to inform users about your
site's default value so that they can congure Annexes appropriately. Using this command changes values in help messages only. You cannot use it to change the parameter default settings that the Annex uses for processing.
3-20
Part 1
Chapter 3
Displaying the Site Parameters Window

Using the Site Parameters Command
The Site Parameters command lets you change the display of a parameters default value. To use this command:
1. Select Site Parameters from the Options menu.
The Site Parameters window appears (see Figure 3-10).
WARNING
Figure 3-10. Site Parameters Window
Understanding the Site Parameters Window Format

The Site Parameters window is divided into two sections: the left-hand section lets you choose a parameter from an existing list. The right-hand section shows you the parameter's name and current help default value, and lets you enter a new value for display.
3-21
Chapter 3
Part 1
Choosing Lists and Parameters This windows option button allows you to choose a parameter list. The box below the option button displays each parameter included in the list you choose. The option button lets you select:

Annex Only List
to display all parameters, excluding port
parameters.
Async Port List Printer Port List Enet Port List
to display asynchronous port parameters. to display printer port parameters.
to display Ethernet port parameters. to display DS0 channel parameters
DSO Channel List DS1 Line List
to display DS1 line parameters.
When you choose a list, the box below this button displays all parameters included in the list. You can select a single parameter from this list. Understanding the Default Value Area The windows right-hand side displays current default values and lets you enter a new default value for help messages and for the Show command.
Before you select a parameter, the small box at the top of the window displays nothing selected. When you choose a parameter, its name appears here. The AM Default area displays Annex Manager's default for the parameter you chose. The Annex retains this value as its default, regardless of the changes you enter with this command. The Site Default eld allows you to enter a new value for the parameter you chose. Again, this value appears only in the parameter's help message and in the Show command if you select the Verbose Output button. It does not change the value used for processing.
3-22
Part 1
Chapter 3
Using Push Buttons The Site Parameters command uses the following push buttons:
Apply activates the command, changing the default value that appears in the help message and in the Show command. Apply You can press and click twice on the parameter in the box to check your work. Delete removes your site default and replaces it with Annex Manager's default. Help
displays a window that explains the Site Parameters removes the Site Parameters window from your
command.
Close
display.
Changing Default Values

Using the Site Parameters Command
To change the default values that display:

1. Choose a list from the option button.
All parameters included in the list you choose will appear in the list box.
2. Select a single parameter from the list.
Annex Managers default value for the parameter you chose appears in the box in the right side of the window.
3-23
Chapter 3
Part 1
3.
Enter a value in the Site Default eld.
This eld appears as an option button or a text eld, depending on the parameter you selected. If it displays as an option button, you can choose a value from the list. If it displays as a text eld, you can type a value.
4. Press
Apply
Annex Manager changes the default value displayed in the parameters help message and in the Show command to the value you entered. This value appears for display purposes only.
3-24
Chapter 4 Using the Main Window
he main window includes Annex Managers pull-down menu and provides access to Setup and Customize modes. This chapter includes:
Using Setup and Customize Modes Understanding the Main Window Format Saving and Opening Annex Lists Displaying SNMP Information
Using Setup and Customize Modes

Annex Manager provides two modes:
Setup mode allows you congure one or more Annexes quickly. It provides a series of windows that allow you to choose basic Annex and port settings. The main window appears in Setup mode when Annex Manager appears on your desktop. Customize mode allows you to set any Annex parameter. You can choose parameter values using a group of related parameters, or you can select one or more individual parameters.
4-1
Chapter 4
Using the Main Window
Part 1
The main window rst appears in Setup mode.
WARNING
Figure 4-1. Main Window in Setup Mode
In Setup mode, you can use the main window to enter one or more Annex names or IP addresses, add or remove Annexes from the list, and display the Setup mode windows.
This mode allows you limited access to Annex Managers pulldown menu. You cannot chose the View Script, Create Script, Compare, Copy, Execute Script, Show, Set, User-dened Parameter Groups, or Site Parameters commands.
4-2
Part 1
Chapter 4
If you choose Customize from the Mode menu, Annex Manager expands the main window.
Specication area WARNING
Conguration area
Figure 4-2. Main Window in Customize Mode
In Customize mode, you have access to all Annex Manager commands. This chapter explains how the main window works in Setup and Customize modes.
4-3
Chapter 4
Part 1
Understanding the Main Window Format

In Customize mode, the main window is divided into specication and
conguration areas. These areas work together, allowing you to select Annex names and parameter options.
In the specication area, you can select one or more Annexes from a list. This area appears in Setup mode. In the conguration area, you choose the parameter groups or lists you will use for the Annexes you selected. This area appears only in Customize mode.
The information required in the specication and conguration areas depends on the command you choose. When you complete required information, you can use Setup windows and other Annex Manager commands.
The main window displays at all times when you use Annex Manager. In Customize mode, you can return to this window at any time to change list or parameter information. In Setup mode, you must close all other Setup windows before you can return to the main window.
Using the Specication Area

The main windows specication area stores an Annex list. Annex Managers conguration and status commands work for the Annexes that appear on the list.
4-4
Part 1
Chapter 4
Understanding the Automatic Annex List When you start Annex Manager, the software nds all available Annexes on your local network and places them in the main windows Annex List box with their hardware types.
To disable this process, type -nod argument when you load Annex Manager (e.g., type gui_am -nod).
Annex Manager displays a new window over the main window to inform you that the automatic discovery process is taking place.
Figure 4-3. Automatic Discovery Process Window
As Figure 4-3 shows, this message window indicates that you have not entered a specic Internet Address or Subnet Mask. In addition, it includes the default broadcast address for your local network, and a default timeout value.
You can use the -dn (Discover Network), -ds (Discover Subnet mask) and -dt (Discover Timeout) command arguments when you load Annex Manager to override default settings. For example, you can type gui_am -dn 132.245.88.0 -ds 255.255.255.0 -dt 5 to discover Annexes for the 132.245.88.0 internet address and 255.255.255.0 subnet mask with a response time of 5 seconds. You cannot use -dn and -ds separately. Annex Manager does not require that you enter a new timeout value.
4-5
Chapter 4
Part 1
When Annex Manager completes the discovery process, a window informs you about the number of Annexes that will be loaded in the Annex List.
Figure 4-4. Creating Annex LIst Window
The main windows Annex List box includes all available Annexes on your local network.
WARNING
Figure 4-5. Main Window with Annex List
You can save any list using the Save Annex List command or recreate a saved list using the Open Annex List command. In addition, you can change lists using Add and Remove . Instructions for saving, opening, and changing lists appear later in this chapter.
4-6
Part 1
Chapter 4
Creating an Annex List

Creating a List
When you create an Annex list, Annex Manager veries the name you enter and displays it, with its hardware type, in the Annex List box. To create an Annex list:
1. Enter a name or an IP address in the Annex eld.
You can enter an Annex name or its IP address. If you add an Annex to this list using one identier (e.g., a name) and repeat the process using the other identier (e.g. the IP address) for the same Annex, a message informs you that the Annex is already included in the list. If you enter a device with which Annex Manager cannot communicate via SNMP, NOT REACHABLE displays in place of the Annex type. If you enter a device name that responds to SNMP but is not an Annex, or if you enter the name of an unknown device, a warning message informs you that the device cannot be added to the list. For more information about the NOT REACHABLE designation, see Chapter 20.
2. Enter the Annexs SNMP community string in the Community eld.
The default string for the Annex is public. This string appears automatically if you do not complete this eld.
If you enter a valid Annex name and an incorrect SNMP community string, the Annex appears in the list as NOT REACHABLE.
3. Click
Add
or press
Return
The Annex name appears in the list box. All names appear in the order in which you enter them.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for as many Annexes as you need.
If you use public as your community string, you can skip steps 2 and 3 by entering an Annex name and Add pressing Return or . The default community string displays and the Annex name appears in the list.
4-7
Chapter 4
Part 1
If you need to add Annexes later, you can return to this area.
Figure 4-6. Annex List
You can save any list using the File menus Save Annex List command. This menu also provides the Open Annex List command, which recreates a saved list. Instructions for saving and opening lists appear later in this chapter. Selecting Items in Lists
Selecting an Annex
Many Annex Manager commands require you to select Annexes from the main windows list. To select one or more Annexes:
1. Create an Annex list.
For instructions, see Creating an Annex List in this chapter.

2. Click the mouse button on each Annex you want.
You can select as many Annexes as you need. (Some commands allow you to select only one Annex.) To deselect an Annex, hold Ctrl and click on any highlighted item. To display Annex information, choose name in the list.
Annex Info
or double click on any Annex
After you create a list, you can use the Setup mode or the Customize modes conguration area.
4-8
Part 1
Chapter 4
Changing Annex Lists As you use commands to congure Annexes, you may need to change your original Annex list. You can change or verify list items at any time by using specication area buttons.

Adding to a List
Add Remove Annex Info
adds an Annex to the existing list. removes one or more devices from the list. displays basic information about any Annex you
select.
To add an Annex to a list:

1. Enter an Annex name and a community string.
If you use the default community string (public) you do not need to complete this eld.
2. Click
Add
or press
Return
The device you entered appears in the Annex list box. Deleting from a List
To delete a device from an existing list:

1. Select one or more devices from the list box.
Annex Manager highlights your selections.

2. Choose
Remove
Annex Manager removes the devices you selected.
4-9
Chapter 4
Part 1
Using the Annex Info Button
To display basic information about an Annex:

1. Select a single Annex from the list box.
Annex Manager highlights your selection. If you select more than one Annex, a warning window informs you that the Annex Info window will contain information about the rst Annex you selected. You can select an Annex and choose Verify Annex State from the Status menu to insure that the Annex Info window will display current information.
2. Choose
Annex Info
or press
Return
The Annex Info window appears.
Figure 4-7. Annex Info Window
4-10
Part 1
Chapter 4
Verifying Annex Status

Because an Annex list can contain Annexes or other devices that are not reachable, you may want to verify the status of these items.
Verifying Status
To verify information about an Annex list device or to change the list:

1. 2. Select one or more items from the Annex list box. Select Verify Annex State from the Status menu.
If you select an Annex whose status has changed from NOT REACHABLE, the Annexs type replaces the original message. If you select a device that is now reachable but is not an Annex, Annex Manager removes it from the list. If an Annex has the NOT REACHABLE status because you added it using an invalid Community string, and you use Verify Annex State again, Annex Manager attempts to connect using the original string. If this string differs from the one currently displayed in the Community eld, Annex Manager attempts to connect using the string that appears in the eld.
4-11
Chapter 4
Part 1
Using the Conguration Area

In Customize mode, the main windows conguration area allows you to select parameter options for processing. Some Annex Manager commands use the Annexes you select in the specication area and the parameter options you select here. The following example shows the conguration areas initial display.
WARNING
Figure 4-8. Main Window Conguration Area
To complete this area, you need to select a Parameter Option and choose individual items from the parameter list. You can then use the Show, Set, and other Annex Manager commands.
4-12
Part 1
Chapter 4
Choosing Parameter Options The Annex Manager commands available through Customize mode use the Annexes you select in the specication area and the parameters you select in the conguration area. The conguration areas Parameter Options button controls the lists that display below it:
The Pre-dened Groups option displays system-supplied groups of parameters. Each group is comprised of related Annex parameters. The User-dened Groups list displays the parameter groups you have created and saved with the User-dened Parameter Groups command. The Annex Only List option includes all parameters, excluding port parameters. The Async Port List option displays asynchronous port parameters The Printer Port List option includes printer port parameters. The Enet Port List option displays Ethernet port parameters. The DS0 Channels List option displays DS0 channel parameter values. The DS1 Line List option displays T1 DS1 port parameter values. If you choose Pre-dened Groups or User-dened Groups, you can select one item. For all other options you can select as many items as you need.
When you click the mouse, the Parameter Options box displays the corresponding list. When the list appears you can click the mouse button on each list item you want to select.
4-13
Chapter 4
Part 1
Selecting a Parameter Option
To select an option:
1. 2. Hold the mouse on the Parameter Options button. Highlight the option you want and release the button.
The list box changes according to the option you select.
Some commands require you to select an item from the list box. For example, the Set command changes parameter values based on your selections in this area.
Selecting Groups or Lists
To select items:
1. Hold the mouse button on the Parameter Options button, highlight your choice, and release the button.
The appropriate list displays in the box.

2. Click the mouse button on each list item you want.
If you choose Pre-dened Groups or User-dened Groups, you can select one item. For all other options, you can select as many items as you need. Annex Manager highlights the items you choose. To deselect an item, hold Ctrl and click the mouse again on any highlighted item.
Using Push Buttons The main window uses the Show and Set push buttons:
invokes the Show command that allows you to display parameter values.
Show Set invokes the Set command that allows you to change parameter values.
4-14
Part 1
Chapter 4
Saving and Opening Annex Lists

When you create an Annex list, you can use the File menus Save Annex List and Open Annex List commands. Save Annex List stores the list you created; Open Annex List places it in the main windows specication area, so that you can use it for Annex Manager processing. When you save or open a list, Annex Manager stores community string, timeout, and retry information for each Annex.
Save Annex List
and Open Annex List use the le selection window described in Chapter 3. You should be familiar with this window before you save and open Annex lists.
Saving an Annex List

Saving a List
The Save Annex List command stores any Annex list in a le. To save an Annex list:
1. Move the pointer to the File menu and click on Save Annex List.
The Annex List Selection window appears.
Figure 4-9. Save Annex List Selection Window
4-15
Chapter 4
Part 1
The Annex List Selection window displays the default list directory. We recommend strongly that you save les in this directory. The selection window allows you to: q Select a list that will overwrite an existing list. When you select an existing list, a window appears that allows you to verify your choice. You cannot overwrite a list that someone else created. Create a new list by entering a new le name or a path OK . and name and choosing
When you complete this window, Annex Manager saves the list in the le you specied.
Opening an Annex List

Opening a Saved List
Open Annex List places any list you have saved in the main windows specication area, so you can use it for Annex Manager processing. To open a saved list:
1.
Move the pointer to the File menu and click on Open Annex List.
The Annex List Selection window appears.
4-16
Part 1
Chapter 4
Figure 4-10. Open Annex List Selection Window

2. Choose a list from the Files box and click
Return OK
or press
If you store lists in another directory, you can enter a path and le name in the Selection eld. Annex Manager attempts to communicate with each device on the list, displaying its type or the NOT REACHABLE designation. The list appears in the main windows specication area, replacing the new list. For more detailed information about Annex Managers standard File Selection window, see Chapter 3.
4-17
Chapter 4
Part 1
Editing List Files

You can use an ascii editor to change the list les you save in the selection window. Annex Manager veries each le according to its rst four lines. When you edit these les, you must use Annex Manager conventions. List les always begin with:
# # DB_VERSION: V1.0 # FORMAT: Annex Name | Community String | Timeout | Retries #
For example, you might enter emma| public | 2 | 2. You can enter comment lines as long as each line begins with the pound sign (#). Annex Manager processing ignores these lines.
Displaying SNMP Information

The SNMP Information command lets you see and update timeout, retries, and community string information for one or more Annexes or for Annex Managers defaults. This section includes:
Displaying the SNMP Information Window Understanding the SNMP Information Window Format Viewing and Updating SNMP Information
4-18
Part 1
Chapter 4
Displaying the SNMP Information Window

Displaying the window
SNMP Information
appears in the Options menu. To display the window:
1.
Create an Annex list and select one or more Annexes.
For more information, see Creating Annex Lists in this chapter.
If you are changing Annex Manager defaults, you do not need to create an Annex list rst. You can begin with step 2.
2. Move the pointer to the Options menu and select SNMP
Information.
The SNMP Information window appears (see Figure 4-11).
WARNING
Figure 4-11. SNMP Information Window
4-19
Chapter 4
Part 1
Understanding the SNMP Information Window Format

The SNMP Information window uses text elds, check buttons, and push buttons. You can update information that appears in the text elds for one or more Annexes or you can change Annex Managers default values.
Annex Manager saves the values you change using SNMP for an active session only. When you exit Annex Manager, the original Timeout, Retries, and Community String values are reinstated.
Information
Using Text Fields

SNMP Information
uses the following text elds:
Timeout species the length of time in seconds that Annex Manager waits for a response. You can enter a number of seconds here. If you leave this eld blank, SNMP Information uses Annex Managers ve second default. Retries
controls the number of times that Annex Manager tries to reach an Annex or other device on the network. You can enter a number here. If you leave this eld blank, the command uses Annex Managers default of 0 (zero) retries.
Community String species the SNMP password Annex Manager
uses to communicate with Annexes. You can enter a new string here. If you do not complete this eld, Annex Manager uses public, which is the default community string. The SNMP Information commands initial display does not include values for these elds. To display current Annex values or Annex Managers default values, you must use Show Default or Show Annex .
4-20
Part 1
Chapter 4
Using Check Buttons

SNMP Information
uses the following check buttons to change values for one or more Annexes or to change Annex Managers default values:

Update Selected Annex(es) on Apply
changes values for one or
more Annexes.
Update Default Values on Apply changes Annex Managers SNMP
defaults based on the values in the text elds.
Using Push Buttons

SNMP Information
uses the following push buttons:
activates the command and changes Timeout, Retries, and Community String values.
Apply Show Default
displays SNMP default values in the windows text
elds. displays current Annex values in the windows text elds. If you selected multiple Annexes that have different values, a warning window informs you that the SNMP Information will not display these values.
Show Annex Help Close
displays a window explaining this command. removes the SNMP Information window from your
display.
4-21
Chapter 4
Part 1
Viewing and Updating SNMP Information

Using the SNMP Information Command
To check current SNMP information or to change Annex values:

1. Create an Annex list and select one or more Annexes.
For information. Creating Annex Lists in this chapter. If you want to change Annex Managers SNMP default values only, you can skip this step.
2. 3. Move the pointer to the Option menu and choose SNMP
Information.
Enter new values for Timeout, Retries and/or Community String or use Show Default or Show Annex to display current values.
Show Default
always displays Annex Managers default values. The
values that display when you use Show Annex depend on the Annexes you selected in the main window: q q If you select a single Annex or multiple Annexes that have the same values, text elds display current values. If you select multiple Annexes that have different values, a warning window informs you that where differences Apply exist, values will not display. If you choose
under this circumstance, Annex Manager uses its default values.

4. Select Update Selected Annex(es) on Apply and/or Update Default Values on Apply.
You can select one or both check buttons.

5. Choose
Apply
Annex Manager changes Annex or default values based on the check buttons you selected and on values in the text elds.
4-22
Chapter 5 Setup Mode Basics

nnex Managers Setup mode appears when you rst use Annex Manager software. This mode allows you to congure one or more Annexes by setting the most commonly used parameters.
The Setup mode limits your access to Annex Manager commands. If you use this mode, you can use only the Open Annex List, Save Annex List, Boot, Broadcast, Discover Annexes, PRI Internal Modems, Reset, SNMP Information, Conrm Auto Reset, and all Status commands. Commands that are unavailable appear in grey text. You can use the menus Mode heading to switch from Setup to Customize mode. Customize mode lets you set individual Annex parameters and provides access to all main menu commands. For detailed information about using Customize mode, see Part 3.
A series of Setup mode windows allows you to change Annex settings. Each window groups related settings and provides access to elds based on your previous selections. You can select:
The General window to change the most commonly used Annex settings. If you press this windows More button, a second window allows you to view and change additional Annex settings. The Async Ports window to select one or more ports. When you press Edit Port here, you can change port and modem congurations. The Call Defaults window to set the most commonly-used parameters for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes.
5-1
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
Part 2
Setup Mode
The Channels window to assign remote addresses to ISDN Primary Rate Annex channels. The T1/PRI Line window to set the ISDN Primary Rate Annexs switch type. The Security window to change security settings. The AppleTalk window to congure Annexes that use the same AppleTalk zone. The IP window to select Internet address and interface routing settings. The IPX window to choose an IPX frame type. The LAT window to change LAT servers and group codes.
Setup mode uses windows that allow you to change Annex settings as well as Help, Warning, and Conrmation windows. This section explains Setup mode windows in the following sections:
Understanding Setup Windows Displaying Setup Windows Understanding Setup Window Fields Using Push Buttons Using Conrmation Windows
5-2
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
Understanding Setup Windows

Setup mode uses the following types of windows:
The main window provides access to Setup mode windows. Although it always appears, you cannot return to it unless you rst close all Setup mode windows. Setup mode lets you change frequently-used settings in General, Async Ports, Call Defaults, Channels, PRI Line, Security, AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT windows. You can display a window by selecting an option from the Setup eld that appears in each window. When you complete the windows elds and press Apply , your changes take effect. You can then choose another Setup eld option or press Close to return to the main window. A Conrmation window appears if you change settings and press Close rather than Apply . This window informs you that your changes will not take effect if you continue the closing process. A Reset Parameters window informs you that Annex Manager needs to reset Annexes or ports for your changes to take effect. This window appears only when you select Conrm Auto Reset from the main windows pull-down menu.
Help Help windows appear when you press or F1 , as they do for all Annex Manager modes and commands. In addition, the Setup mode provides a single line at the bottom of each window that gives you a brief summary for each eld. A short message appears automatically as you move the mouse pointer.
The Reset Parameters, Warning, and Help windows are the same for all Annex Manager windows. For more information about these windows, refer to Chapter 3.
5-3
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
Part 2
Setup Mode
Displaying Setup Windows

You must begin with the main window to display Setup windows. When you press Setup in the main window and the rst Setup mode window appears, you can display additional windows.

To display the Setup modes windows, you must start from Annex Managers main window (see Figure 5-1). For detailed information about the main window, see Chapter 4.
Figure 5-1. Setup Mode Main Window
5-4
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
Displaying the rst Setup Window
To display the rst Setup window:

For information about creating Annex lists, see Chapter 4.

2. Press
Setup
The General window appears (see Figure 5-2). Like all other Setup mode windows, this window includes the Setup eld.
WARNING
Figure 5-2. General Window
The Setup eld at the top of this window also appears in the Async Ports,
Call Defaults, Channels, T1/PRI Line, Security, AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT windows.
You can use it to display another Setup window.
5-5
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
Part 2
Setup Mode
Using the Setup Field

The Setup eld controls the windows that appear in Annex Managers Setup mode. When you rst use Setup mode, the General window appears. This window includes the Setup eld, as does any window that appears when you choose one of the Setup options. You can use Setup from any window in which it appears.
Using the Setup Field
To use this eld:

1. Display any window that includes the Setup eld.
The General window displays rst.

2. Move the pointer to the Setup eld and select any available option.
Understanding Setup Window Fields

When you select an option from the Setup eld, Annex Manager displays another window that allows you to change Annex settings. Once you enter or select new values and press Apply , Annex Manager changes settings on the Annexes you selected. Your selections in a Setup mode window may not allow you to use certain elds. Fields that are unavailable appear in grey text: you cannot place the cursor in these elds or change their settings. For example, if the Async Ports windows Modem button is not selected, you cannot use the Modem Name eld, Edit Modem or the Edit Modem window.
5-6
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
When a Setup window rst appears, each eld automatically displays a value based on the Annexes or ports you selected. If the Annexes or ports you selected:
Have the same settings for a eld, the current value appears automatically. For example, if you choose several ports that use the same type of modem, modems name appears in the Name eld. Do not have values set for a text eld, that eld displays . Have different settings, a eld does not display a value: Text elds and option menus appear blank. Radio buttons appear with no buttons selected. If you select multiple Annexes or ports and you want to view or change values for a single Annex or port, you can return to the main window or the Edit Async Ports window to select a single Annex or port.
Using Push Buttons

When you choose a Setup eld option, the windows that appear use the following push buttons:
Apply sets any changes you made in a window for the Annexes you selected. The Reset Parameters window appears if you chose the Conrm Auto Reset option from the main windows menu if the changes you made require the Annexes you selected to be reset. If you did not choose Conrm Auto Reset, Annex Manager resets values without notifying you.
5-7
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
Part 2
Setup Mode
Restore displays current values for all elds in a window. You can change values in the window and then press Restore to display current values for the Annexes you selected. This button works only if you have not yet pressed Apply . Help
displays a window explaining each Setup mode
window.
Close removes a window from your display and returns you to the main window.
The General and Async Ports options use a series of windows. These windows use the following push buttons in addition to those listed above:
More displays an additional window related to the window in which it appears. This button appears in the General and Edit Async Ports windows. OK returns you the previous window in a series. After OK you press , you must press Apply on the rst window in the series. Annex Manager will not change Annex OK settings until you press Apply . appears in the General (continued), Edit Async Ports and Edit Modem windows. Cancel closes a window and displays the previous window in a series. If you change values and then press Cancel , Annex Manager will not store the new values you selected. Cancel appears in the General (continued), Edit Async Ports and Edit Modem windows. Edit Port Update
displays the Edit Async Ports window.
Ports
gives you the current status of each port in the Async window list. displays the Edit Modem window. deletes modems dened in the Annex conguration
Edit Modem Remove
le.
5-8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
Using Conrmation Windows

If you enter or select new values in any window and press Close rather than Apply , Annex Manager displays a conrmation window informing you that your changes will not take effect if you continue the closing process.
Figure 5-3. Closing Conrmation Window

OK You can press to continue closing the window or return to the window, where you should press Apply . Cancel
to
5-9
Chapter 5
Setup Mode Basics
Part 2
Setup Mode
5-10
Chapter 6 Selecting General Settings

nnex Manager provides two General windows. You can change basic Annex settings in the rst window and display a second window to change additional settings. This chapter describes the General windows in the following sections:

Displaying the Window
Using the General Window Using the General (continued) Window Selecting General Settings
Setup
To display the rst General window, press
in the main window.
Figure 6-1. General Window
6-1
Chapter 6
Selecting General Settings
Part 2
Setup Mode
Using the General Window

The General window includes basic Annex information in Boot Info, Logging, and Time boxes. The Boot Info box uses the following elds:
Default Host identies the host used for the host server and for all services unless you enter host addresses in the General (continued) window. When this window rst appears, the Default Host eld displays the current address in the Annex's pref_load_addr parameter.
When you congure an Annex for the rst time, the Security Preferred Host, DHCP Preferred Host, Nameserver Preferred Host, Nameserver Alternate Host, Time Host, Logging Host, and Dump Host elds are 0.0.0.0. In this situation, Annex Manager sets those elds to the address in the Host eld. You can change these addresses using the General (continued) window.
Load Sequence species available network interfaces and the order in which they are used for a down-line load or an up-line dump. You can list more than one interface by using commas to separate interface names. You can enter:
net
to specify a local area network.
sl + port number (e.g., sl2) to specify a SLIP line. If you enter sl
and a port number, you must enter an address in the
slip_load_dump_host parameter.
self to instruct an Annex to boot its image from the Flash ROMs. Since the Annex cannot dump back to itself, you should include a secondary interface here by entering self,net or self,sl+port number.
6-2
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 6
Boot Image contains the image le name loaded by default when the Annex is booted. This name can use up to 100 characters. Cong File denes the name for the conguration le maintained on the boot host. The Annex uses this le for information on gateways, rotaries, macros, and services. It must reside in the /usr/spool/erpcd/bfs directory.
The Logging box provides the following elds:

Log messages at and above determines the priority levels that the Annex logs. You can choose: emergency alert
to log hardware failures.
to log all Annex reboots.
critical to log conguration and initialization problems such as conguration le format errors or lack of memory. error
to log all line initialization errors. to log minor problems.
warning notice
to log time server queries and information about responses.

info to start and end CLI sessions and Annex jobs created by rlogin, telnet, connect, ping and tap commands. debug all
to start and end any Annex process.
to log messages at all levels. to disable message logging.
none
6-3
Chapter 6
Part 2
Setup Mode
The Time box includes the following elds:
Use daylight savings in
allows the Annex to adjust for daylight savings time in your geographic location. You can select a single location from the list. denes the time zone in which the Annex resides. You can enter a positive number of minutes for time zones west of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or a negative number for time zones east of GMT. For example, you would enter 300 for New York, since it is ve hours west of GMT, or 60 for Paris, which is one hour east of GMT.
Minutes west of GMT
Using Push Buttons

The General window uses the More , Apply , Restore , Help , and Close push buttons. For detailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5.
Using the General (continued) Window

The General (continued) window allows you to change additional security, DHCP, nameserver, time, logging, software options, dump, and password settings for the Annexes selected in the main window.
6-4
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 6
To display this window, press
More
on the General window.
WARNING
Figure 6-2. General (continued) Window
6-5
Chapter 6
Part 2
Setup Mode
Understanding the General (continued) Window This window allows you to change basic Annex settings in addition to those included in the rst window. The Security box provides host information and broadcast message settings for Annex security. It includes the following elds and buttons:

Preferred Host Alternate Host
contains the IP address of the security host. contains the IP address of the backup security
host. Broadcast On and OFF determine whether or not an Annex broadcasts for security validation if the preferred security servers are not available.
On The button activates the ACP security server, including security for AppleTalk, CLI, and SLIP/PPP connections.
The
OFF
button deactivates security.
If the selected Annex uses these security systems, the On button is selected when the window rst appears. In this case, the enable_security parameter is activated. If you change the setting to OFF, Annex Manager deactivates security but does not change the enable_security parameter setting.
The DHCP box provides host information and broadcast message settings for Annex DHCP. It includes the following elds and buttons:
Preferred Host
contains the IP address of the DHCP server that the client attempts to use as the primary source for DHCP services.
Alternate Host contains the IP address of the DHCP server that the client attempts to use as a backup source for DHCP services when the primary DHCP server does not respond. backup security server.
6-6
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 6
The DHCP elds are optional and may be 0.0.0.0. When enabled, the client broadcasts DHCP messages.
Broadcast On and OFF determine whether or not an Annex broadcasts for a DHCP server if the preferred DHCP servers are not available. The
On
button activates the ACP security server.
The Nameserver box denes a type of name service and host addresses:
Preferred Service denes the type of name service used with the Nameserver boxs Preferred Host eld. You can select none, dns, or ien_116. Alternate Service denes the type of name service used with the Nameserver boxs Alternate Host eld. The Annex uses this service and host when the service specied in the Preferred Service eld is not available.You can select none, dns, or ien_116. Preferred Host
contains a host address for the Preferred Service contains a host address for the Alternate Service
you selected.
Alternate Host
you selected.
The Time box controls the time server host:
Host lists the IP address that an Annex queries for time service. You can enter:
6-7
Chapter 6
Part 2
Setup Mode
A loopback address (127.0.0.1) to disable time service queries. A host address to send queries to a specic host. A broadcast address to send queries to a specic network or networks instead of sending a general broadcast to all networks. 0.0.0.0 to direct the Annex to query the boot host.
The Logging box species a log host for the Annexes you selected:
Host contains an IP address for the host that logs Annex messages. If you enter 0.0.0.0, the Annex broadcasts its log messages.
The Software Options box lists the options you can use on the Annexes you selected:
The left-hand Software Options box activates routing and ltering, AppleTalk functions and parameters, IPX, and the CLI tn3270 command. You must contact your supplier to obtain the key value for the features you choose. Available options appear in black text; those that are unavailable appear in grey. The right-hand Software Options box restricts access to LATspecic Annex commands, parameters, functions, and to the LAT protocol within the Annex. You must contact your supplier to obtain a LAT key. After you set the key, your system administrator must reboot the Annex.
You can use the Software Options box only when you select a single Annex in the main window. The Dump box allows you to change dump host information:
Dump Host contains an IP address for the host on which the Annex creates dump les. If you do not want dump les, you can enter 0.0.0.0.
The Password box allows you to change the superuser password.
6-8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 6
Superuser Password modies the Annex's administrative password used for access to the superuser CLI commands and for administrative access to an Annex. This password overrides the CLI lock and virtual CLI passwords. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this value as set or unset. These passwords use 1 to 16 characters.
Using Push Buttons

OK The General (continued) window uses the , Help , and Cancel push buttons. For detailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5.

To view or change values in the General windows:
1. Create an Annex list, select one or more Annexes, and press
Setup
The General window appears.

2. Enter or Select new values in any eld.
If you complete your work in the rst window and do not need to use the second window, go to step 5.
3. Press
More
The General (continued) window appears.

4. Enter or select new values in any eld and press
OK
The General window reappears.

5. Press
Apply
6-9
Chapter 6
Part 2
Setup Mode
The Reset Parameters window appears if you selected the Conrm Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and if the settings you changed require Annex Manager to reset Annexes. If you did not select Conrm Auto Reset, Annex Manager resets Annexes without notifying you.
6-10
Chapter 7 Setting Asynchronous Port Values

nnex Managers Setup mode provides windows you can use to set port values for the Annexes you select:
The Async Ports window allows you to select the ports whose settings you want to view or change. The Edit Async Ports and Edit Async Ports (continued) windows include the most commonly used port and modem settings.
This chapter describes these windows in the following sections:

Selecting Async Ports Using the Edit Async Ports Window Using the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window Selecting Async Port Settings
7-1
Chapter 7
Setting Asynchronous Port Values
Part 2
Setup Mode
Selecting Async Ports

The Async Ports window allows you to select individual ports. To display this window select Async Ports from the Setup eld.
Figure 7-1. Async Ports Window
7-2
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 7
Understanding the Async Ports Window

The Async Ports window allows you to select the ports whose settings you want to view or change. It provides port information in its Async Ports box as well as several push buttons. This window provides port information in its Async Ports box. It includes the following categories:

Annex Name displays the name or IP address of each Annex you
selected in the main window.

Port# provides Mode
the number of each port.
displays the current setting for the type of access on each includes the name of the modem attached to each
port.
Modem Type
port.
Status
provides the current state for each port.
The information in this box is current as of the time you selected Async Ports in the Setup eld. You can press Update at any time to display the most recent values.
You can select one or more ports by clicking the mouse in the Async Ports box.
7-3
Chapter 7
Part 2
Setup Mode
Using Push Buttons This window uses the buttons:

Edit Port Edit Port
Update
Help
, and
Close
push
displays the Edit Async Ports window. You can use this button only after you select one or more ports in the list.
Update Help
gives you the current status of each port in the list. displays a window explaining the Async Ports
window.
Close removes the Async Ports window from your display and returns you to the main window.
Using the Edit Async Ports Window

After you select ports in the Async Ports window, you can change modem and interface settings in the Edit Async Ports window. In addition, you can use push buttons to display the Edit Async Ports (continued) window and the Edit Modems window.
To display this window, select one or more ports in the Async Ports window and press Edit Port .
7-4
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 7
Figure 7-2. Edit Async Ports Window
7-5
Chapter 7
Part 2
Setup Mode
Understanding the Edit Async Ports Window

The Edit Async Ports window allows you to view and change modem and interface settings for the ports you selected. It groups related settings in boxes, and provides access to the Edit Async Ports (continued) window and to the Edit Modem window. The Port Options box determines whether the ports you selected use modems and denes the type of access that is available on these ports.
The Type box contains the Modem, No Modem, Disable, and Other buttons. These buttons dene several settings for modem conguration. The button you choose here, combined with your selections in the Direction box, determines the available selections in the Mode box. indicates that the ports you selected will use the modem specied in the Edit Modem windows Modem Name eld. This button selects the Modem Signals button and sets Flow Control to Hardware.
Modem No Modem indicates that the ports you select will not use a modem. It deselects Modem Signals, sets Flow Control to Software, and disables the Modem box.
disables the port. If you select this button, you cannot enter additional information in the window.
Disable Other indicates that one or more ports you selected currently
dene x25, tn3270, pc, terminal, or printer as the type of device attached to a port. You can return to the main window and use Annex Managers Customize mode to check these values. If the Other button is selected when this window appears, you can select the Modem, No Modem, or Disable buttons. You cannot select the Other button.
7-6
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 7
The Direction box determines whether the port transmits and/or receives data. The outgoing and incoming buttons allow the port to use outgoing or incoming connections. You can select outgoing, incoming, or both. These buttons, combined with your selections in the Type box, determine the Mode box options you can use. When an option is unavailable, it appears in grey: you cannot select such options.
The Mode box denes the type of access available on a port. This box includes the following buttons:
Autodetect allows a port to identify an incoming packet's protocol as IPX, PPP, ARAP or CLI. Serial provides access to modems, serial line printers, and other serial devices attached to this outgoing port. PPP species that a port can perform as a network interface
using PPP. species that a port can perform as a network interface using ARAP.
ARAP IPX allows dial-in Novell access with the Fastened II client. Telnet automatically connects a user to a host via the telnet Rlogin/Telnet
command. You can specify the host and arguments in the boxs Argument eld.
SLIP species that a port can perform as a network interface
using SLIP. allows a port connected to a terminal or incoming modem access to the Annex Command Line Interface (CLI). CLI provides access to the network and connections to other hosts via the telnet, connect, rlogin, and tn3270 commands.
CLI
7-7
Chapter 7
Part 2
Setup Mode
Dedicated automatically connects a user with the host dened in the Dedicated box. Once you enter a host address there, you can choose whether the port will communicate via telnet or rlogin. NDP allows dial-in with authentication by Novell, dial-out, and routing. Rlogin automatically connects a user to a host via the rlogin Rlogin/Telnet
command. You can specify the host and arguments in the boxs Argument eld.
Other indicates that one or more Annexes you selected currently use modes that differ from the options displayed in the Mode box. You can use the Set command in Annex Managers Customize mode to check these values, or you can select another option here. You cannot select the Other button.
If you select Autodetect, PPP, ARAP, IPX, or SLIP, Annex Manager does not allow an Annex to determine modem speed automatically. If you select Serial, CLI, Telnet, Dedicated, NDP, or Rlogin and the Annexes you chose are set to select modem speed automatically, Annex Manager does not change this condition. For more information about modem speeds, refer to the Autobaud and Speed parameters described in Chapter 19 and to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX.
7-8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 7
The Line Control box denes ow control and line speed settings using the following elds:
The Modem Signals box indicates whether the ports you selected will use a modem for ow control. When you select the On button, the ports and modem use DCD, DTR, and DSR signals.
The Flow Control box species the type of signals an Annex uses
to control data transfer. If you select:

None,
the port does not use hardware or software ow control. the port uses CTS/RTS signals.
Hardware, Software,
the port uses xon/xoff signals.
Other displays if the Annexes you selected have ow control
set to a value that is not Hardware, Software, or None. If you select another setting here, you cannot select Other again. The Speed box denes the baud rate of the asynchronous line between a device and an Annex. The value you enter must match the device's baud rate. For a port with a modem, Speed is typically set to the maximum speed that the modem supports (e.g., 115200).
All Annexes do not support all port speeds. Please refer to your Annex hardware guides for detailed information.
7-9
Chapter 7
Part 2
Setup Mode
The Modem box lists modem names and provides access to the Edit Modem window.
The eld in this box species the type of modem attached to the ports you selected. You can display a list that includes all modems dened in the Annex conguration le and in include les for the Annexes you selected.
This list displays names from the Annex conguration le followed by names in any include le. If you edit a modem denition that originates in an include le, Annex Manager copies the denition, places the edited version in the Annex conguration le, and displays its name. You cannot congure modem information if you select multiple Annexes that do not use the same conguration le on the same host. (The conguration le does not have to reside on the same host as does Annex Manager.) In addition, you cannot congure modem information if you select one or more Annexes where the preferred boot host is different from the actual boot host.
The modem name that displays when the window rst appears depends on your port selections: If you selected one port, or multiple ports that use the same modem, this eld shows the current modem name. If you selected ports that use different modems, this eld will be blank. If you continue to use this window and do not enter a name here, Annex Manager will not change modem values when you press Apply . If the modem name is not set for the ports you selected, <undened> appears.
7-10
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 7
If the ports you selected use a modem that does not appear in the list, Annex Manager adds the name to the list, displays a warning window, and creates a default modem denition in the conguration le. You can press Edit Modem to display, change, or delete this denition.
For detailed information about the Edit Modem Window, refer to Chapter 9.
The Interface Options box displays information in the Settings, Address

Assignment, Interface Protocol, AppleTalk, Rlogin/Telnet, and Dedicated boxes.
The Settings box displays address and protocol information for the ports you selected. denes the IP address for the port on the Annex side of a link when the Annex does not obtain the address from the hosts acp_dialup le.
Local Address Remote Address contains the IP address for the port at the other end of the serial line if the Annex does not obtain the address from the acp_dialup le. Subnet Mask contains the Annexs IP subnet mask. This elds initial display is based on the network portion of the Annexs IP address.
Entering an incorrect Subnet Mask can cause routing problems.
The Address Assignment box allows an Annex to request an address from a host-based server. The Address Assignment buttons are used in conjunction with the Local Address and Remote Address elds: If you select the Security Server button, the Annex searches the acp_dialup le for the remote clients user name and sets local and remote addresses and subnet mask.
7-11
Chapter 7
Part 2
Setup Mode
If the le contains a matching user name and: The local and remote addresses exist in the acp_dialup le, the Annex uses those values. The acp_dialup le contains a remote address but not a local address, the Annex uses the remote address from the le and the Annexs IP address for the local address.
If the le does not contain a matching user name, the Annex uses values from the Local Address, Remote Address, and Subnet Mask elds: If both elds contain addresses, the Annex uses these values. If both elds are set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex negotiates for both addresses with the remote PPP client. The connection is denied for a remote SLIP client.
If the le contains a local address and the remote address is set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex uses the local address and negotiates with the remote PPP client for the remote addresses. The connection is denied for a remote SLIP client.
If you select the dhcp button, the Annex contacts a DHCP server to request a remote address. If you select the Local button, the Annex uses the IP address at the other end of the serial line.
The Interface Protocol box lists the control protocols for which the Annex negotiates. You can select a single button or any combination of the following buttons:
atcp ipcp
species AppleTalk Protocol Control Protocol. species Internet Protocol Control Protocol.
7-12
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 7
species the Internet Packet Exchange Control Protocol.

ipxcp ccp species
the Compression Control Protocol.
The AppleTalk box uses the Node ID eld.
Node ID species the AppleTalk hint used by the Annex on a specic port. You can enter an ID in decimal or hexadecimal notation. Each ID has two parts separated by a dot:
A network address ranges from 0 to 65534 (0x0000 to 0xFFFE). A node address ranges from 0 to 254 (0x00 to 0xFE).
For example, 191.253, 0x00FR.253 and 191.0xFD designate the same address. You can enter numbers ranging from 0 to 65534.255.
The Rlogin/Telnet box allows you to specify arguments for rlogin and telnet connections.
Argument contains the commands used when you select Rlogin or Telnet in the Mode box. You should include a host name or
address here. You can enter up to 100 characters.
The Dedicated box allows you to choose a host and the rlogin or telnet applications for ports connected directly to a host.

Host Address contains the IP address of a host to which this port will connect. Method
selects the application to which an Annex port can connect. You can select the Rlogin or Telnet button.
When an option is unavailable it appears in grey: you cannot select such options.
7-13
Chapter 7
Part 2
Setup Mode
Using Push Buttons This window uses Apply , Help , Close , and More push buttons. For detailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5.
Using the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window

Annex Managers Edit Async Ports (continued) window allows you to select port settings for PPP security, inactivity timers, and the LAT protocol.
To display this window, press
More
in the Edit Async Ports window.
WARNING
Figure 7-3. Edit Async Ports (continued) Window
7-14
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 7
Understanding the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window

The Edit Async Ports (continued) window provides access to additional port settings in PPP Security, Time, and LAT boxes. The PPP Security box denes data for authorization on a remote PPP peer. This box uses the following elds:
Remote Username
contains the user name by which the Annex identies itself when the remote PPP peer asks for authentication. This name can contain up to 15 characters.
Remote Password denes the password that the Annex uses when the remote PPP peer requests authentication. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this parameter's value as set or unset. This name can contain up to 15 characters.
The Time box denes activity on the ports you selected and controls inactivity timers.
CLI Inactivity Timer species the amount of time in minutes that the Annex remains idle before disconnecting a CLI session from a port. Entering 0 (zero) disables the timer; entering 255 causes the Annex to disconnect as soon as it exits from its last job. You can enter any number of minutes up to 255. Unlike the port inactivity timer, this timer does not disconnect a CLI session with active jobs. Port Inactivity Timer species the number of minutes that a port can remain inactive. If the timer expires, the Annex terminates all sessions and resets the port. You can use the Input is Activity and Output Is Activity buttons to dene activity as input to the port or output from the port. If you do not use these buttons, the timer runs independent of activity. You can enter any number of minutes up to 255 minutes.
7-15
Chapter 7
Part 2
Setup Mode
Input Is Activity buttons dene activity as input. If you click the On button, the Annex resets the inactivity timer when it receives
input at the port.

Output Is Activity buttons denes activity as output. If you click the On button, the Annex resets the inactivity timer when it
sends output from the port.
The LAT box denes group codes.
Authorized Groups species the LAT protocol remote group codes that are accessible to users on an Annex port. You can enter all, none, a series of numbers separated by commas (e.g., 1, 5, 7) or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g., 1, 5, 200-255). You can use any number between 0 and 255.
Using Push Buttons

OK Help The Edit Async Ports (continued) window uses the , , and Cancel push buttons. For detailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5.
Selecting Async Port Settings

This section gives you directions for using Annex Managers three Async Ports windows.
Selecting Ports
Before you can change port settings, you need to select specic ports:
1. Create an Annex list, select one or more Annexes, and press
Setup
The General window appears.

2. Select Async Ports from the Setup button.
The Async Ports window appears.
7-16
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 7
3.
Choose one or more ports from the list.
The next windows settings display current values based on your selections here. If you choose ports whose settings differ, some elds in the next window may be blank, or may not be accessible. If the Async Ports window has been displayed on your screen for some time or if you have changed values, you can press Update to see the most recent port status.
4. Press
Edit Port
The Edit Async Ports window appears. Changing Port Settings
The Edit Async Ports window displays current settings for the ports you selected and allows you to change these settings:
1. 2. Display the Edit Async Ports window. Select buttons in the Port Options box that are appropriate for the ports you chose.
The selections you make here control the availability of the remaining elds. For detailed information about the Port Options box, see Understanding the Edit Async Ports Window earlier in this chapter.
3. Press
More
The Edit Async Ports (continued) window appears.

4. Enter or change information in the PPP Security, Time, or LAT boxes.
Available elds depend on your selections in the previous window. For detailed information, see Understanding the Edit Async Ports (continued) Window earlier in this chapter.
5. Press
OK
The Edit Async Ports window reappears.
7-17
Chapter 7
Part 2
Setup Mode
6.
Press
Apply
7-18
Chapter 8 Setting ISDN Primary Rate Annex Values

nnex Manager allows you to congure ISDN Primary Rate Annexes in its Setup and Customize modes. The Setup mode allows you to change values for the most commonly-used parameters. The Customize mode provides access to all parameters and to the Annex conguration le. ISDN Primary Rate Annexes use circuit-switched B channels for voice (modem) and data calls and packet-switched D channels for call setup, teardown, and connection management over dedicated trunk lines.
In the United States, Canada, and Japan, PRI service uses T1 trunk lines. A single T1 line supports 23 B channels and one D channel. In Europe and the Pacic Rim, PRI service uses E1 trunk lines. A single E1 line supports 30 B channels and 2 D channels.
The PRI line interface and the Ethernet port are the only physical ports on the ISDN Primary Rate Annex. When a user dials in to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex, calls are assigned dynamically to an available B channel. The Annex accepts:
Voice (modem) calls by negotiating for available B channels and modems and by checking conguration parameter settings. V.120 calls by using a terminal adapter (TA) to convert analog data into V.120 frames. After negotiating for B channels, resources, and conguration parameters, the Annex converts the V.120 frames into asynchronous data streams. Synchronous PPP calls from PCs with adapter cards that support PPP encapsulation over ISDN. Like modem and V.120 calls, these calls require negotiation for B channels, resources, and conguration parameters.
8-1
Chapter 8
Setting ISDN Primary Rate Annex Values
Part 2
Setup Mode
The ISDN Primary Rate Annex can assign a call to any available B channel. It uses:
Internal defaults for all parameters that are not set. The Annex uses these values unless you set Call Default and/or Session Parameter Block values. Call Default parameters settings that apply to all incoming calls. These parameters are similar to those you use for asynchronous ports. Session Parameter Blocks (SPB), stored in the pri section of your Annex conguration le, include Setup criteria and parameter values that the Annex uses to match incoming calls and override existing parameter values.
For detailed information about SPBs, refer to the Remote Annex 6300 Supplement to the Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX.
You can use Annex Managers Customize mode to set individual ISDN Primary Rate Annex parameters. Annex Managers Setup mode provides several windows you can use for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes:
The Call Defaults window allows you to set the most commonly used PRI parameter and modem settings. The Channels window allows you to set a remote address for each B-channel. The T1/PRI Line window allows you to select the type of central ofce switch that your telephone company provides. The Security window controls security systems on the Annex. For detailed information about this window, see Chapter 10.
This chapter describes these windows in the following sections:

Using the Call Defaults Window Using the Channels Window Using the T1/PRI Line Window
8-2
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 8
Using the Call Defaults Window

The Call Defaults window lets you change commonly-used parameter settings for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes. In addition, you can use the Edit Modems window to view and change internal modem denitions.
To display the Call Defaults window, select Call Defaults from the Setup eld.
Figure 8-1. Call Defaults Window
8-3
Chapter 8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Understanding the Call Defaults Window

The Call Defaults window allows you to view and change settings for the ISDN Primary Rate Annexes you selected. Call Defaults groups related settings in boxes and provides access to the Edit Modem window. The elds in the Edit Modem window apply to all calls established on an ISDN Primary Rate Annex unless settings in the conguration le override these values. The Direction box determines whether the port transmits and/or receives data.
The outgoing and incoming buttons allow the channel to use outgoing or incoming connections. You can select outgoing, incoming, or both. These buttons, combined with your selections in the Type box, determine the Mode options you can use. When an option is unavailable, it appears in grey: you cannot select such options
The Mode box denes the type of access available. This box includes the following buttons:

Autodetect allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to identify an incoming packet's protocol as IPX, PPP, ARAP or CLI. Serial provides access to modems, serial line printers, and other serial devices.
species that a connection can perform as a network interface using PPP.

PPP IPX
allows dial-in Novell access with the Fastlink II client.
automatically connects a user to a host via the telnet command. You can specify the host and arguments in the Rlogin/ Telnet boxs Argument eld.
Telnet SLIP
species that a call can perform as a network interface using SLIP.
8-4
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 8
CLI allows a terminal or incoming modem access to the Annex Command Line Interface (CLI). CLI provides access to the network and connections to other hosts via the telnet, connect, rlogin, and tn3270 commands. ARAP species that a connection can perform as a network interface using ARAP.
automatically connects a user to a host via the rlogin command. You can specify the host and arguments in the Rlogin/ Telnet boxs Argument eld.
Rlogin Other indicates that one or more Annexes you selected currently use modes that differ from the options displayed in the Mode box. You can use the Set command in Annex Managers Customize mode to check these values, or you can select another option here. You cannot select the Other button.
The Interface Options box displays information in the IP Addresses, PPP Interface
Protocol, AppleTalk, and Rlogin/Telnet boxes.
The IP Addresses box allows an Annex to request an address from the host-based security server. The Address Assignment buttons control settings for the Local Address eld in this window and the Remote Address eld in the Channels window: If you select the Security Server button, the Annex searches the acp_dialup le for the remote clients user name and sets local and remote addresses and subnet mask.
8-5
Chapter 8
Part 2
Setup Mode
If the le contains a matching user name and: The local and remote addresses exist in the acp_dialup le, the Annex uses those values. The acp_dialup le contains a remote address but not a local address, the Annex uses the remote address from the le and the Annexs IP address for the local address.
If the le does not contain a matching user name, the Annex uses values from the Local Address, Remote Address, and Subnet Mask elds: If both elds contain addresses, the Annex uses these values. If both elds are set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex negotiates for both addresses with the remote PPP client. The connection is denied for a remote SLIP client.
If the le contains a local address and the remote address is set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex uses the local address and negotiates with the remote PPP client for the remote addresses. The connection is denied for a remote SLIP client. If you select the dhcp button, the Annex contacts a DHCP server to request a remote address. If you select the Local button, the Annex uses the IP address at the other end of the serial line.
8-6
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 8
The Local Address eld denes the IP address for a connection on the ISDN Primary Rate Annex side of a link when the Annex does not obtain the address from the hosts acp_dialup le. The Subnet Mask eld contains the ISDN Primary Rate Annexs IP subnet mask. This elds initial display is based on the network portion of the Annexs IP address.
Entering an incorrect Subnet Mask can cause routing problems.
The PPP Interface Protocol box lists the control protocols for which the Annex negotiates. You can select a single button or any combination of the following buttons:
atcp ipcp
species AppleTalk Control Protocol. species Internet Protocol Control Protocol. species the Internet Packet Exchange Control Protocol.
ipxcp
ccp species the Compression Control Protocol. mp species
the MultiLink PPP Protocol.
The AppleTalk box uses the Node ID eld.

Node ID species the AppleTalk hint used by the ISDN Primary
Rate Annex. You can enter an ID in decimal or hexadecimal notation. Each ID has two parts separated by a dot: A network address ranges from 0 to 65534 (0x0000 to 0xFFFE). A node address ranges from 0 to 254 (0x00 to 0xFE). For example, 191.253, 0x00FR.253 and 191.0xFD designate the same address. You can enter numbers ranging from 0 to 65534.255.
8-7
Chapter 8
Part 2
Setup Mode
The Rlogin/Telnet box allows you to specify arguments for rlogin and telnet connections.
Argument
contains the commands used when you select
Rlogin or Telnet in the Mode box. You should include a host
name or address here. You can enter up to 100 characters.
The Time box denes activity and controls inactivity timers.

The Timer box controls inactivity timers. species the amount of time in minutes that the ISDN Primary Rate Annex remains idle before disconnecting a CLI session. Entering 0 (zero) disables the timer; entering 255 causes the Annex to disconnect as soon as it exits from its last job. You can enter any number of minutes up to 255. Unlike the call inactivity timer, this timer does not disconnect a CLI session with active jobs.
CLI Inactivity Timer
species the number of minutes that a connection can remain inactive. If the timer expires, the Annex terminates the call. You can use the Input is Activity and Output Is Activity buttons to dene incoming call activity. If you do not use these buttons, the timer runs independent of activity. You can enter any number of minutes up to 255 minutes.
Call Inactivity Timer
Input Is Activity buttons dene activity as input. If you click the On button, the Annex resets the inactivity timer when it receives
input through an established call.

Output Is Activity buttons denes activity as output. If you click the On button, the Annex resets the inactivity timer when it
sends output.
8-8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 8
The PPP Security box denes data for authorization on a remote PPP peer. This box uses the following elds:
Remote Username
contains the user name by which the ISDN Primary Rate Annex identies itself when the remote PPP peer asks for authentication. This name can contain up to 15 characters.
Remote Password denes the password that the ISDN Primary Rate Annex uses when the remote PPP peer requests authentication. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this parameter's value as set or unset. This name can contain up to 15 characters.
The Modem box provides access to the Edit Modem window.

When an option is unavailable it appears in grey: you cannot select such options.
Using Push Buttons This window uses Apply , Restore , Help , and Close push buttons. For detailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5. The Edit Modem button displays a window that allows you to change denitions for an ISDN Primary Rate Annexs internal modems. You can edit internal modems only from this window. For detailed information, see Chapter 9.
8-9
Chapter 8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Selecting Call Default Settings

This section gives you directions for using Annex Managers Call Defaults window.
Selecting Settings
To use the Call Defaults window:

1. 2. Display the Call Defaults window. Enter or change information in the Mode, Interface, Time, or PPP Security boxes.
If you enter information and then need to return to the values that displayed originally, you can press Restore .
3. Press
Apply
Annex Manager changes values for the ISDN Primary Rate Annexes you selected. You cannot use Restore after you press Apply .
Using the Channels Window

Setup modes Channels window allows you to assign a remote address to a B-channel for SLIP or PPP connections.
8-10
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 8
To display the window, select Channels from the Setup eld.
WARNING
Figure 8-2. Channels Window
Understanding the Channels Window

The Channels window allows you to select a B-channel for a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex and to assign a remote address to it. This window uses the Channels box and Remote Address eld. The Channels box provides information about the ISDN Primary Rate Annex you selected. It includes the following categories:

Annex Name
displays the name or IP address of the Annex you selected in the main window. lists each channel in the Annex.
Channel #
8-11
Chapter 8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Remote Address lists the current address associated with each channel. If this column displays 0.0.0.0, the Annex and the peer will negotiate for an address.
The information in this box is current as of the time you selected Channels from the Setup eld.
The Remote Address eld assigns an address to the channel you selected. You can enter an IP address here. Using Push Buttons This window uses Apply , Help , and Close information about push buttons, see Chapter 5. buttons. For detailed
Assigning Remote Addresses

Assigning Addresses
To assign a remote address to a B-channel:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex in the main window. Display the Channels window. Select a single channel from the Channels box. Enter an IP address in the Remote Address eld. Press
Apply
Annex Manager changes the channels address. The next call that uses the channel you selected will use the address you enter here.
8-12
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 8
Using the T1/PRI Line Window

The T1/PRI Line window allows you to set a type of switch provided by the telephone company for your T1/PRI line. The window displays information in the T1/PRI Line box. To display the window, select T1/PRI Line from the Setup eld.
WARNING
Figure 8-3. T1/PRI Line Window
8-13
Chapter 8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Understanding the T1/PRI Line Box

The T1/PRI Line box displays information in the Switch Type box. The Switch Type box uses only the Switch Type buttons.
Switch Type
denes the kind of switch the ISDN Primary Rate Annex uses. The value you select here depends on the switch provided by your telephone company. You can select: for AT&Ts 5ESS switch.
5ESS NI-2
for the switch that supports National ISDN2. for Nortels DMS100 switch.
DMS100 Default
to set the switch value to a null string ( ).
The T1/PRI Line window selects the Default and Other buttons based on current Switch Type settings:
Default is selected if Switch Type is not set when you rst use the T1/PRI Line window. If you do not choose another setting, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex you selected will use 5ESS for lines in the United States, ETS for European lines, and ETS-AUS for
Australian lines.
Other displays as selected if the Annex you chose is operating outside the United States. This setting indicates that the switch type is set to ETS or ETS-AUS. You can use CLI admin commands to check these values.
The FDL Type box allows you to congure the FDL standard. It describes the facilities data link use. This allows the telephone company to read the statistics maintained by an Annex and to perform diagnostic tests. There are four choices:
none att ansi Other
8-14
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 8
The Buildout box allows adjustment of the cable loss measurement between the last T1 signal regenerator and your location. This measurement is supplied by the telephone company at installation. You need to adjust your buildout based on this measurement.There are four choices:
odb 7.5db 15db 20.5db
Using Push Buttons This window uses Apply , Restore , Help , and Close detailed information about push buttons, see Chapter 5. buttons. For
Setting the Switch Type

Setting the Type
To set a switch type

1. 2. 3. Select a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex in the main window. Display the T1/PRI Line window. Select the 5ESS, NI-2, DMS100 or Default button.
Default will be selected if the switch type has not been set. Other
displays as selected when the ISDN Primary Rate Annex, operating outside the United States, has the switch type set to ETS or ETSAUS.
4. Press
Apply
Annex Manager sets the switch type.
8-15
Chapter 8
Part 2
Setup Mode
8-16
Chapter 9 Editing Modem Denitions

he Edit Modem window allows you to change an existing modems denition for any Annex and to create a new modem denition or to remove modem denitions for Annexes other than ISDN Primary Rate Annexes.
We recommend that you use the Edit Modem window to change modem denitions. You can, however, use the Congure menus Edit Conguration entry for the same purpose.
This chapter includes:

Understanding the Edit Modem Window Creating and Changing Modem Denitions Understanding the Modem Database Editing the Conguration File
Edit Modem
To display this window, press Defaults windows.
in the Edit Async Ports or Call
WARNING
Figure 9-1. Edit Modem Window
9-1
Chapter 9
Editing Modem Denitions
Part 2
Setup Mode
Understanding the Edit Modem Window

Modem denitions reside in the Annex conguration le. Default modem
denitions are stored in include les. If you change a denition that uses default values, Annex Manager copies the denition from the include le and places it in the Annex conguration le. The denitions you create or change here apply to all ports and all Annexes that use the same load host. Your changes may not apply solely to the Annexes or ports you selected.
Edit Modem
uses the following elds:
Modem Name species the type of modem attached to the ports or Annexes you selected. For Annexes with asynchronous ports, this eld automatically displays the name that appears in the Edit Async Port windows Modem Name eld. For ISDN Primary Rate Annexes, it displays the internal modem name from the Annex conguration le.
If this eld displays an existing modem name, Connect Status String, Dialin Setup Command, and Dialout Setup Command display current values. If this eld displays <undened> or is blank, Annex Manager provides default values in Connect Status String, Dialin Setup Command, and Dialout Setup Command. You can use these default values or enter new values.
If you want to view or edit a denition for a modem other OK than the one listed in the window, press here and select another name from the list. (continued on next page)
9-2
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 9
If the Edit Modem window appears with a modem name and you enter another existing name, Connect Status String, Dialin Setup Command and Dialout Setup Command will not automatically display values for the name you entered. If you press Apply at this point, Annex Manager will change the denition for the name you entered to the values displayed in the window. You can use this method to create a new denition with the same values as an existing one.
Connect Status String contains the string the Annex uses when it initiates an outbound call. This string lists all successful connect messages that the modem can return. You can enter up to 80 status codes. Dialin Setup Command contains the command the Annex sends to incoming modem ports before the rst user connects to a port. The command should include all modem steps required to answer a call coming into the Annex. For example, it should turn on the auto-answer feature and disable inbound modem connect messages. Dialout Setup Command
contains the command the Annex sends to all serial device ports before they becomes active. This command should contain all conguration information required for the Annex to initiate an outbound call. For example, it should disable the auto-answer feature and enable modem connect messages. You can enter up to 80 characters. displays default values for a modem when you have changed the default denition.
Revert to default modem values
9-3
Chapter 9
Part 2
Setup Mode
Using Push Buttons

OK Help The Edit Modem window uses the , , and Cancel push buttons. For Annexes with asynchronous ports, it uses the Remove button:
Remove deletes modems dened in the Annex conguration OK le. When you press , Annex Manager removes the modem name and denition from the Edit Async Port windows list. When you press Apply in the Edit Async Port window, Annex Manager deletes the modem denition from the Annex conguration le.
Creating and Changing Modem Denitions

The Edit Modem window lets you change existing modem denitions, create new ones, and remove denitions from the Annex conguration le.
Changing Denitions for Annexes with Ports

To edit or create a new denition for Annexes with asynchronous ports:
Changing Denitions for Annexes with Asynchronous Ports
1. 2. Display the Edit Async Ports window and choose the appropriate settings in the Port Options box. In the Modem boxs eld, choose the modem whose denition you want to edit, or choose <undened> to create a new denition from default values and press Edit Modem .
The Edit Modem window appears with current values for the modem you selected.
9-4
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 9
3.
Enter new values or change existing values in the Modem Name, Connect Status String, Dialin Setup Command, and Dialout Setup Command elds.
For detailed information about these elds, see Understanding the Edit Modem Window earlier in this chapter.
4. Press
OK
Annex Manager closes the Edit Modem window and returns you to the Edit Async Ports window.
5. Press
Apply OK
A conrmation window appears. You can press continue or Cancel to return to the window.
to
Figure 9-2. Modem Denition ConfIrmation Window
If you create a new modem denition or edit one that exists in the Annex conguration le, your changes modify the current le. If you edit a denition for which defaults exist, Annex Manager copies the denition and places it in the Annex conguration le. You can use the Revert to default modem values button in this case to see original values.
6. Copy the conguration le to alternate load hosts and to selfboot units
For more information, see Understanding the Modem Database later in this chapter.
9-5
Chapter 9
Part 2
Setup Mode
Changing Denitions for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes

To edit a denition for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes:
Changing Denitions for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes
1. 2. 3. Display the Call Defaults window and press
Edit Modem
Change existing values in the Connect Status String, Dialin Setup Command, and Dialout Setup Command elds. Press
OK
Annex Manager closes the Edit Modem window and returns you to the Call Defaults window.
4. Press
Apply OK
to
Figure 9-3. Modem Denition ConfIrmation Window
If you edit a modem denition that exists in the Annex conguration le, your changes modify the current le. If you edit a denition for which defaults exist, Annex Manager copies the denition and places it in the Annex conguration le. You can use the Revert to default modem values button in this case to see original values.
5. Copy the conguration le to alternate load hosts and to selfboot units
For more information, see Understanding the Modem Database later in this chapter.
9-6
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 9
Removing a Denition
You can remove a modem denition only for Annexes that have asynchronous ports. To remove a denition:
Removing Denitions
1. 2. Display the Edit Async Ports window and choose the appropriate settings in the Port Options box. In the Modem boxs eld, choose the modem whose denition you want to remove.
The Edit Modem window appears with current values for the modem you selected. You can remove only those denitions you created or modied. You cannot remove Annex Managers default denitions, since they exist in include les.
3. Press
Remove
.
OK
to
Figure 9-4. Remove Modem Denition Conrmation Window

OK When you press , Annex Manager displays the Edit Async Port window. If you remove a denition that you created, it will not appear in the modem list. If you remove a denition that has a default, the denitions values revert to default values and its name remains in the list.
9-7
Chapter 9
Part 2
Setup Mode
4.
Press
Apply
Understanding the Modem Database

Annex Managers modem database consists of modem denitions stored in the Annex conguration le and in include les. Annex Managers Setup mode gives you access to:
The modems section of the Annex conguration le. The Annexes you select must use the same conguration le on the same host and must use the same address for current and default boot hosts. The conguration le does not have to reside on the same host as does Annex Manager. Any include les referenced in the accessible Annex conguration les. These include les contain Annex Managers default modem denitions.
References to include les must follow modem denitions in the conguration le.
9-8
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 9

You can use Annex Manager to edit any modem denition:
If you edit a denition stored in the Annex conguration le, your changes overwrite current values in the le. If you edit a denition stored in an include le, Annex Manager copies the edited denition and places it in the Annex conguration le. If you edit the denition again, your changes overwrite current values in the conguration le; include le denitions retain their original values.
Creating New Modem Denitions

You can create new modem denitions using the Edit Async Port (continued) and Edit Modem windows.
If you enter a new name in the Edit Async Port windows Modem box, Annex Manager creates a denition with default values in the Annex conguration le. You can use these default values or change them in the Edit Modem window. If you enter a new name in the Edit Modem windows Modem box, Annex Manager copies the values that display at the time you enter the name and uses them in the new denition. You can use these values or edit them for the new denition.
9-9
Chapter 9
Part 2
Setup Mode
Editing the Conguration File

Annex Manager allows you to edit modem denitions using the Congure menu. If you select Annexes that use different conguration les, you cannot edit the les.
WARNING
Figure 9-6. Conguration File Window
Annex Manager identies the conguration le by querying the Annex, copying the le to a local host, and launching an editor with the le. You must dene the editor you want to use in the EDITOR environment variable.
9-10
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 9
Editing the File
To edit the le:

1. Choose Edit Conguration from the Congure menu.
The conguration le appears.

2. 3. Change, add, or remove modem denition information. Save and close the le.
When you end an editing session, Annex Manager displays a window informing you that you changed the conguration le.
Figure 9-7. Edit Conguration Window

Yes No You can select to update the le or to leave it unchanged. When you complete this window Annex Manager copies the le to its original location.
9-11
Chapter 9
Part 2
Setup Mode
9-12
Chapter 10 Setting Security Values

he Security window controls port security systems for the Annexes you selected in the main window. This chapter includes:

Understanding the Security Window Selecting Security Window Settings
To display the Security window, select Security from the Setup eld.
WARNING
Figure 10-1. Security Window
10-1
Chapter 10
Setting Security Values
Part 2
Setup Mode
Understanding the Security Window

The Security window divides settings into Incoming, Outgoing, Host Access, and VCLI categories. The Incoming box controls security for incoming ports and allows you to select a PPP security setting.
The On and Off buttons for Modem Ports, Non-modem Ports, and PRI Calls set security for the Annexes you chose in the main window. If you select the On button, Annex Manager activates the ACP security server, including security for AppleTalk, CLI, IPX, and SLIP/PPP connections for the ports or calls you selected.
Modem Ports and Non-modem Ports do not apply for ISDN Primary Rate Annexes. PRI Calls does not apply for Annexes with asynchronous ports.
The PPP Security Protocol box denes the security check that the Annex requires before it starts the network control protocol. You can select:
None. Pap
to use password authentication protocol. to use challenge-handshake protocol. to:
Chap
Chap/Pap
Request the challenge-handshake protocol. Request password authentication protocol if the peer rejects Chap.
10-2
Part 2
Setup Mode
Chapter 10
The Outgoing box activates security for modem and non-modem ports:
The On and Off buttons for Modem Ports and Non-modem Ports control host-based security for access through the port server. If you select the On buttons, authorized users only have access to the ports.
The Host Access box provides Restrict buttons:

The On and Off buttons for the Restrict eld activate host-based security that authorizes connections from CLI to a network host. If you select the On button, the security server authorizes a connection to a host from the Annex based on the acp_restrict le.
The VCLI box provides Security buttons:

The On and Off buttons for the Security eld control user validation on virtual CLI connections to an Annex. If you select the On button, the Annex uses the same user name and password validation for virtual CLI connections as it does for CLI security. If the Annexes you chose currently use this security system, the On button for Modem Ports, Non-modem Ports, Restrict, and Security will be selected when this window rst appears. In this case, the enable_security parameter is set to enabled. If you change all security settings in this window to Off, Annex Manager deactivates security but does not change the enable_security parameter setting.
Using Push Buttons

The Security window uses the Apply , Restore , Help , and Close push buttons. For detailed information about these buttons, refer to Chapter 5.
10-3
Chapter 10
Part 2
Setup Mode
Selecting Security Window Settings

Selecting Settings
To select new security settings:

1. 2. Display the Security window. Select new settings.
If the Security window rst appears with the Modem Ports and/or Non-modem Ports On and Off buttons selected, the enable_security parameter was set to enabled. If you select either Off button, Annex Manager deactivates security but does not change the enable_security setting.
3. Press
Apply
10-4
Chapter 11 Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT Windows

nnex Managers Setup mode provides windows that allow you to change frequently-used settings for AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT protocols. This chapter includes:
Using the AppleTalk Window Using the IP Window Using the IPX Window Using the LAT Window
Using the AppleTalk Window

Annex Managers AppleTalk window allows you to dene a zone for the Annexes you selected in the main window.
To display the window, select AppleTalk from the Setup eld.
WARNING
Figure 11-1. AppleTalk Window
11-1
Chapter 11
Using the AppleTalk, IP, IPX, and LAT Windows
Part 3
Customize Mode
Understanding the AppleTalk Window

This window uses only the Default Zone eld:
Default Zone
provides the AppleTalk zone name that the Annex uses at start-up. You can enter a name using up to 32 characters. You must use spaces to separate words (e.g., general engineering lab). To escape embedded spaces, use the backslash (\).
Using Push Buttons

The AppleTalk window uses the Apply , Restore , Help , and Close push buttons. For detailed information about these buttons, see Chapter 5.
Changing AppleTalk Window Settings

Changing Settings
You can enter new values for the AppleTalk windows Default Zone eld:
1. 2. 3. Display the AppleTalk window. Enter a new value for the Default Zone. Press
Apply
Annex Manager sets new values for the Default Zone.
11-2
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 11
Using the IP Window

The IP window allows you to specify addresses and IP information for the Annexes you selected in the main window.
To display the window, select IP from the Setup eld.
WARNING
Figure 11-2. IP Window
11-3
Chapter 11
Part 3
Customize Mode
Understanding the IP Window

This window allows you to view and change IP addresses and interface routing information for the Annexes you selected.
denes the Annex's IP address. This 32-bit address contains four 8-bit elds separated by periods. Each eld contains a number ranging from 0 to 255 or a hexadecimal number. The IP address always displays in decimal notation. You can use this eld only when you select a single Annex in the main window.
Internet Address Subnet Mask contains the IP subnet mask. This elds initial display is based on the network portion of the Annexs IP address. Entering an incorrect Subnet Mask can cause routing problems.
The Interface Routing box allows you to specify RIP versions.
Accept RIP version controls the RIP versions that an Annex accepts. You can enter:
1 2
to accept version 1 packets only. to accept version 2 packets only. to accept version 1 and 2 packets.
1 and 2
Send RIP version
controls the RIP versions that an Annex sends over IP interfaces. You can choose:
1 to broadcast address. 2 to multicast address. 2 to broadcast address.
11-4
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 11
Using Push Buttons

The IP window uses the Apply , Restore , Help , and Close push buttons. For more information about these buttons, see Chapter 5.
Changing IP Window Settings

Changing Settings
You can enter new values for the IP windows address and change selections for its RIP elds:
1. 2. 3. Display the IP window. Enter new values or change existing ones. Press
Apply
The Reset Parameters window appears if you selected the Conrm Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and if the settings you changed require Annex Manager to reset Annexes. If you did not select Conrm Auto Reset, Annex Manager rests Annexes without notifying you.
11-5
Chapter 11
Part 3
Customize Mode
Using the IPX Window

The IPX window allows you to specify the type of IPX frame used by the Annexes you selected.
To display the window, select IPX from the Setup eld.
WARNING
Figure 11-4. IPX Window
11-6
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 11
Understanding the IPX Window

The IPX window uses only the Frame Type box.
Frame Type denes framing used for IPX packets on the Ethernet interface. You can select 802.2, 802.3, SNAP, or Ethernet II.
Using Push Buttons

The IPX window uses the Apply , Restore , Help , and Close push buttons. For detailed information about these buttons, see Chapter 5.
Selecting IPX Window Settings

Changing Settings
You can change the IPX windows Frame Type:

1. 2. 3. Display the IPX window. Select a new value. Press
Apply
Annex Manager sets the Frame Type you selected.
11-7
Chapter 11
Part 3
Customize Mode
Using the LAT Window

The LAT window allows you to view and change server names and group codes for the Annexes you selected that use the LAT protocol.
To display the window, select LAT from the Setup eld.
WARNING
Figure 11-5. LAT Window
11-8
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 11
Understanding the LAT Window

The LAT window uses the following elds:
identies the Annex in the LAT protocol. The name you enter should match the VMS host's node name used in the HIC conguration le. The default value is LAT followed by the servers physical ethernet address (e.g., LAT_080002BF0020).
Server Name Remote Group Codes species LAT protocol remote group codes that can access local services offered by an Annex. To access these services, the Annex must have at least one enabled group code that matches the service's group codes. You can enter all, none, a series of numbers separated by commas, (e.g., 1, 5, 7) or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g. 1, 5, 200-255). You can use any number between 0 and 255. Virtual CLI Group Codes
species remote group codes that are assigned to virtual CLI users. All virtual CLI users have the same group code. You can enter all to enable all groups, none to disable all groups, a series of numbers separated by commas (e.g., 1, 5, 7), or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g. 1, 5, 200-255). You can use any number between 0 and 255.
11-9
Chapter 11
Part 3
Customize Mode
Using Push Buttons

The LAT window uses the Apply , Restore , Help , and Close push buttons. For detailed information about these buttons, see Chapter 5.
Entering LAT Window Settings

Entering Settings
You can change the LAT windows elds:

1. 2. Display the LAT window. Enter new values for the LAT server and/or group codes.
For detailed information about the LAT window, see Understanding the LAT Window earlier in this chapter.
3. Press
Apply
Annex Manager sets the new values you entered.
11-10
Chapter 12 Using and Creating Parameter Groups

nnex Managers Setup mode includes groups of related parameters that you can use to congure an Annex. In addition, you can create your own groups. This chapter explains each group delivered with the system and gives you directions for creating new groups. It includes:
Working with Parameter Groups Creating Parameter Groups
Working with Parameter Groups

When you select Pre-dened Groups from the main windows Parameter Options button, you can choose one of the following groups.
AppleTalk Basic_Annex Basic_Async_Port Call_Defaults Channel Cmd_Line_Editing Dedicated_Port Flow_Control IPX Idle_Timer LAT MOP Modem
12-1
Chapter 12
Using and Creating Parameter Groups
Part 3
Customize Mode
Modem_Internal Nameserver PPP PRI_Line Printer_Port Routing SLIP Security Sync_Call_Defaults SysLog T1_DS0 T1_DS1 TMux TN3270 Time_of_Day VCI_Interface Virtual_CLI
To see all parameters included in a particular group, select it from the list and click the mouse twice. For information about a particular parameter, select the parameter and click the mouse twice, or refer to Chapter 19.
12-2
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 12
Creating Parameter Groups

Annex Managers User-dened Parameter Groups command lets you select individual parameters to create your own groups. These groups appear in the main windows conguration area when you select the User-Dened Groups option. This section includes:
Displaying the User Dened Parameter Groups Window Understanding the User Dened Parameter Groups Window Format Creating or Modifying a User Dened Group
Displaying the User Dened Parameter Groups Window

The User Dened Parameter Groups command does not depend on information you enter in the main window. To display the window:
1. Move the pointer to the Options menu and choose User Dened
Parameter Groups.
The User Dened Parameter Groups window appears (see Figure 12-1).
12-3
Chapter 12
Part 3
Customize Mode
The example below shows the User-dened Parameter Groups window.
Figure 12-1. User Dened Parameter Groups Window
Understanding the User Dened Parameter Groups Window Format

The User Dened Parameter Groups window consists of a parameter group list, a parameter list, a work area, and push buttons. This section explains each area in the window.
12-4
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 12
Using the Parameter Groups Box When you display the User-dened Parameter Groups window, the Parameter Groups box automatically includes the names of all existing user dened groups. You can use this list to display the parameters included in a single View group by highlighting a group name and choosing the button, or by double clicking on a group name.
If you want to create a group by choosing individual parameters, you can use the Parameters box and the Work Area box. You do not have to use the Parameter Groups box.
Using the Parameters Box The Parameters box includes an option button and the list box. The option button controls the parameter list that displays below it. You can select one of the following options.
The Annex Only List option includes all parameters, excluding port parameters. The Async Port List option displays asynchronous port parameters. The Printer Port List option includes printer port parameters. The Enet Port List option displays Ethernet port parameters. The DS0 Channel List option displays DS0 Channel parameter values. The DS1 Line List option displays DS1 port parameter values.
12-5
Chapter 12
Part 3
Customize Mode
When you select one or more parameters from any list and choose Add >> , the parameters you selected appear in the Work Area. You can then create a group that includes all parameters you selected. You can also use this box with the Parameter Groups box. If you select a View group, choose , and place individual parameters from the Parameters box in the Work Area, the new or modied group you create will include the groups existing parameters as well as the ones you add.
You can double-click on any parameter in the Parameters or Work Area box to display a help message about the parameter.
Using the Work Area Box The Work Area displays the parameters in an existing group and stores the parameters you select in the Parameter Groups and Parameters boxes. You can select one or more parameters from the Work Area and choose << Remove Modify to remove the selected parameters from the list. Create and change an existing group or create a new one from parameters in this list. Using Push Buttons
User-dened Parameter Groups
displays the parameters that comprise an existing user dened group. When you select a group from the Parameter Groups box, parameters display in the Work Area.
View
removes any selected group and its parameters from Annex Manager les.
Delete
12-6
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 12
Modify overwrites parameters in an existing user dened group. It saves the parameters in the Work Area as new parameters, using the selected group name. For example, if you want to add a parameter to an existing group or delete one from Add >> it, you can display the parameters, use or << Remove , and choose Modify to store the amended parameter group under the same group name. When you use this button, Annex Manager asks you to verify your changes.
uses the parameters in the Work Area to dene a new group. When you use this button, the Name Entry window displays.
Create Help
Parameter Groups
displays a window explaining the User-dened command.
Close removes the User-dened Parameter Groups window from your display.
Creating or Modifying a User Dened Group

You can create your own groups or modify existing ones with the User-dened Parameter Groups command.
Creating a Group
To create a new group:

1. Move the pointer to the Options menu and select User-dened
Parameter Groups.
The User-dened Parameter Groups window displays (see Figure 12-1).

2. Select the parameters you want in the new group from the Add >> Parameters box and choose .
The parameters you choose appear in the Work Area. If you add a parameter and then decide you do not need it in the group, select it in the Work Area and press
<< Remove
12-7
Chapter 12
Part 3
Customize Mode
3.
Choose
Create
The Name Entry window appears.
Figure 12-2. User-dened Parameter Groups Name Entry Window
You must enter a new name without using spaces in the eld OK labelled Enter parameter group name. You can choose Cancel to create a new group or to return to the User-dened
Parameter Groups window.
Modifying a Group
To modify an existing group:

1. Move the pointer to the Options menu and select User-dened
Parameter Groups.
The User-dened Parameter Groups window displays (see Figure 12-1).

2. Select an existing group from the Parameter Groups box and press View or double click on the group name.
The groups parameters appear in the Work Area.

3. Select the parameters you want to add from the Parameters box Add >> and press , or select those you want to remove from the Work Area and press << Remove .
Annex Manager adds or deletes the parameters you choose in the Work Area.
12-8
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 12
4.
Choose
Modify
All parameters in the Work Area become part of the modied group. Close If you change a group in the work area and press Modify without pressing , a Conrmation window appears. You OK Cancel can then press to continue or to return to the work area. You can modify only those groups that you created.
12-9
Chapter 12
Part 3
Customize Mode
12-10
Chapter 13 Viewing and Changing Parameters

he Show and Set commands allow you to view and change Annex parameters. These commands appear as push buttons in the main window and as entries in the Congure menu. Show and Set display values for the parameters that comprise parameter groups and lists. Show lets you view information; Set lets you view and change parameter values. This chapter describes Show and Set in the following sections:

Before You Use Show and Set Commands
Viewing Parameter Values Changing Parameter Values Identifying Errors
The Show and Set commands are based on information you enter in the main window. Before you use Show or Set, you need to:
1. Create an Annex list and select one or more Annexes from the list.
Show and Set display information only for connected Annexes that
you select.
2. Choose a Parameter Option.
The appropriate group or list appears in the box.

3. Select a single parameter group or one or more individual parameters.
Once you enter required information in the main window, you can use the Show and Set commands. For detailed information about the main window,
refer to Chapter 4.
13-1
Chapter 13
Viewing and Changing Parameters
Part 3
Customize Mode
Viewing Parameter Values

lets you see parameter values. You can use this command for the parameter groups and for the individual parameters you choose from the main windows parameter list. This section includes:
Show
Displaying the Show Window Understanding the Show Window Format Viewing Parameter Values
Displaying the Show Window

The Show command originates in the main window or in the Congure menu. To use this command:
For details about creating lists, refer to Chapter 4.

2. 3. Select the Annexes and parameter groups or individual parameters you want to include.
Show Choose and click Show.
or move the pointer to the Congure menu
The Show window appears (see Figure 13-1). To use Show again without closing the window, repeat step 2. Annex Manager saves all output in the Show window until you use
Clear
or
Close
13-2
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 13
The example below is the Show window for the Basic_Annex group.
Figure 13-1. Show Window
In this example, the Show window displays information for each Annex you selected. This window includes all parameters that you selected and a value for each parameter.
13-3
Chapter 13
Part 3
Customize Mode
Understanding the Show Window Format

The Show window consists of a check button, port type button, port number eld, output box, and push buttons for clearing the window, saving output, and closing the window. Controlling Output The Show windows Verbose Output button allows you to determine the level of detail that appears in the output box. When you select Verbose Output, the output box includes parameter names, MIB denitions, default values, and current values. If you do not select it, Show includes only parameter names and current values. Entering Port Information The parameters you choose in the main window determine whether you need to enter port or channel information for Show. If you select parameters that require this information, you can select a port type and enter port or channel numbers in elds located below the Output box.
Entering Port Types and Port Numbers
To select a port type and enter port numbers:

1. Hold the mouse on the option button that displays Async Ports.
The menu displays Async Port(s), Printer Port(s), Enet Port(s) DS0 Channel(s) and DS1 Line(s).
2. Highlight the port type you want and release the button.
You must enter a port type that matches your Parameter Options selection. For example, if you choose the Async Port List option, you should not select Enet Port(s) here.
13-4
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 13
3.
For Async Port(s), Printer Port(s), and DS0 Channel(s), enter one or more port numbers or All in the eld.
To enter specic ports, separate port numbers with commas or indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you might enter 1, 3, 8 to specify three ports, or 1-3, 8 to specify ports 1 through 3 and port 8. For Enet Port(s), you must enter 1. For T1 ports, 2 displays automatically. You cannot change this value.
Reading the Output Box The windows output box lists parameter names and values. The output box always includes:
A message informing you that you may need to enter port or channel information when you rst use Show. A separate section for each Annex you selected. In Figure 13-1, a line of asterisks separates information about two Annexes. All parameters included in a group or all parameters you selected. Parameters in groups display in the order in which they appear in the group. If you choose a parameter that requires port or channel information and you enter more than one port number, the output box displays a separate line for each port or channel. Parameters you select from the parameter lists appear in alphabetical order.
If Annex Manager cannot process the Show command based on your selections in the main window, or if your choices are not valid for all the Annexes you selected, a warning window displays. For example, a warning window
appears if you entered a port type that does not match the group you select or a port number that does not exist on the Annex you select. For more information about warning and error messages, see Identifying Errors on page 13-16.
13-5
Chapter 13
Part 3
Customize Mode
Using Push Buttons

Show
provides push buttons at the bottom of the window:

Apply activates the Show command based on your selections in the main window and on the Verbose Output button. Clear
removes current output from the window.
Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of the Cancel Show windows output box, or press to return to the Show window. Help Close
displays a window that explains the Show command. removes the Show window from your display.
Viewing Parameter Values

Displaying Values
To check parameter values with the Show command:

1. Select the level of detail you need using the Verbose Output button.
When you select Verbose Output, the output box includes parameter names, MIB denitions, default values, and current values. If you do not select it, the output box includes only parameter names and current values.
2. Select a port type and port number.
If you selected parameter groups that require port numbers, you must use these elds. If your selections do not require this information, you can skip this step.
3. Choose
Apply
Values appear in the output box for the parameters you selected. The level of detail in the box depends on your use of the Verbose Output button.
13-6
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 13
Changing Parameter Values

The Set command, like the Show command, displays parameter names and values. In addition, Set allows you to change parameter values. This section discusses the Set windows display options, explains the windows format, and gives instructions for changing parameter values. It includes:
Displaying the Set Window Understanding the Set Window Format Changing Parameter Values
Displaying the Set Window

The Set command originates in the main window. To display the Set window:
For details about creating lists, refer to Chapter 4.

2. 3. Select the Annexes and parameter options you want to include.
Set Choose and click Set.
or move the pointer to the Congure menu
The Set window appears (see Figure 13-2).
13-7
Chapter 13
Part 3
Customize Mode
The following example is a Set window that shows the Basic_Annex groups values for more than one Annex.
Figure 13-2. Set Window
13-8
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 13
Understanding the Set Window Format

The Set window consists of a work area, a message box, a port type button and port number eld, and push buttons. Its format allows you to see and change current parameter values and to review your work. Entering Port Information The parameters you choose in the main window determine whether you need to enter port, interface, or channel information for the Set command. If you select parameters that require this information, you can select a port type and enter port or channel numbers in elds located below the Work Area.
Entering Port Types and Port Numbers
To select a port type and enter port numbers:

The menu displays Async Port(s), Printer Port(s), Enet Port(s), DS0 Channel(s), and DS1 Line(s).
2. Highlight the port type you want and release the button.
You must enter a port type that matches your Parameter Options selection in the main window. For example, if you choose the Async Port List option, you should not select Enet Port(s) here.
3. For Async Port(s), Printer Port(s), and DS0 Channel(s), enter one or more port numbers or All in the eld next to the port type button.
To enter specic ports, separate port numbers with commas or indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you might enter 1, 3, 8 to specify three ports, or 1-3, 8 to specify ports 1 through 3 and port 8. For Enet Port(s), you must enter 1. For T1 ports, 2 displays automatically. You cannot change this value.
13-9
Chapter 13
Part 3
Customize Mode
Using the Work Area When you use Show Values , the Set windows work area can list values for the parameters you selected in the main window. You can verify current values, mark the parameters you want to change, and enter new values or options here. For each parameter, several components appear:
A check button ( ) precedes each parameter name. You need to select this button in order to mark a parameter and select or enter the values you want to change. Parameter names provide access to additional information. You can highlight any parameter name or the corresponding value eld and press F1 or Help to display a message about the parameter. Text elds or option buttons follow each parameter name. If the Annexes or ports you selected have the same value, these elds and buttons display that value. Once you select the check button, you can enter new values or select new options here. The Dsp Diffs (Display Differences) button follows a text eld or an option button if the combination of Annexes and ports you selected or ports you selected from one Annex do not have the same parameter value (see Figure 13-2). When the button appears, text elds or option buttons remain blank. You can click Dsp Diffs to display parameter values. For more information, refer to Changing Parameter Values on page 13-7.
13-10
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 13
Reading the Message Box The message box monitors Set operations. It includes:
The operations name surrounded by asterisks. In Figure 13-2, *****Set Operation***** displays. A status message conrming the current operation. Setting the following parameters is the status message in Figure 13-2. All parameters included in the group or all parameters you selected. The Set values complete message indicating that processing is complete. Current values when the Set operation ends. Annex Manager performs a Show operation automatically on the marked parameters to conrm your changes. Messages related to this operation appear in the box.
Message boxes contain error messages if you enter incorrect values, if Annex Manager cannot nd values for parameters, if the process times out and Annex Manager cannot set values for all marked parameters, or if you enter an incorrect format for elds that require an integer or an IP address. For more information, see Identifying Errors on page 13-16. Using Push Buttons
Set
provides the following push buttons:

changes values for marked parameters. The message box reects this operation and provides error messages if necessary. The Conrmation window allows you to verify the Set command. If you selected the Conrm Auto Reset option and parameters that require an Annex reset, the Reset Parameters window follows.
Apply
13-11
Chapter 13
Part 3
Customize Mode
Show Values displays parameter values in the work area and lists parameters in the message box. When you use this button to verify current values, it erases new values you entered but does not deselect marked parameters.
An asterisk appears in the button if you use Show Values and then change the main windows Annex list or port information, or this windows port numbers. The asterisk indicates that the message box values may not be current. It disappears when you press Show Values again.
Clear Display deletes current information from the message box and deselects marked parameters. It does not change values displayed in the work area. Save Msgs displays the standard File Selection window. You can OK enter a le name in the Selection eld and press to store the contents of the Set windows output box, or press Cancel to return to the Set window. Help Close
displays a window explaining the Set command. removes the Set window from your display.
You can leave the window displayed and use Set again to select a parameter option that differs from your original selection. In this case, Set you must choose again in the main window to display
these new parameters.
Changing Parameter Values

Set allows you to change parameter values.
You can select new Annexes, ports, parameter groups, individual parameters, or check original values during this process.
13-12
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 13
Changing Values
To change values:
1. 2. Complete the main window and choose
Set
Enter port information in the elds below the Work Area.
If your selections in the main window require port or channel information you must enter a port type and a port or channel number.
3. Choose
Show Values
The Work Area displays values for the parameters you selected. The Message Box lists each parameter name. You can skip this step if you do not want to see current values. The Dsp Diffs button indicates that the Annexes, ports, or channels you selected do not have the same parameter value. You can press this button to display a window showing the parameters value for each Annex and port.
Figure 13-3. Differing Values Window
13-13
Chapter 13
Part 3
Customize Mode
This window, which contains values for all parameters that have the Dsp Diffs button, scrolls automatically to the parameter you selected. You can use scroll bars to view other parameter values.
4. Click the check button ( ) or drag the cursor through a range of check buttons for each parameter you want to change.
The check button appears lled. This marks each parameter that will change.
5. 6. Enter new values or select new options for any marked parameter. Choose
Apply
This step triggers several operations. A Conrmation window displays, allowing you to check your work before values change. You can choose Cancel OK to to return to the Set window, or continue the Set process and change parameter values.
Figure 13-4. Set Command Conrmation Window
13-14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 13
A Reset Parameters window appears if you selected the Conrm Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and changed parameters that require an Annex to be reset. You Reset can choose to continue the process, or Cancel to return to the Set window. If you did not select Conrm Auto Reset, Annex Manager resets Annexes without notifying you.
Figure 13-5. Set Command Reset Parameters Window
Set changes marked parameters that have valid values.
For parameters that did not change, the message box lists error conditions. For more information about errors, see Identifying Errors in this chapter.
The work area displays current values. If you entered incorrect values, original values appear in the work area and error messages appear in the message box.
13-15
Chapter 13
Part 3
Customize Mode
Identifying Errors
The Show and Set commands notify you about error conditions by displaying warning windows and by listing errors in output and message boxes. You can encounter errors based on main window selections or on parameter value limitations. This section includes:
Understanding Warning Windows Understanding Output and Message Boxes
Understanding Warning Windows

Warning windows appear based on your selections in the main window and in the Set window. They appear if you:
Do not enter complete information. Select an unreachable Annex. Do not enter port information and then select a parameter group or list that requires this information. Select a port type that does not match one or more parameter port types. For example, a warning window displays if you choose Printer port type and the Basic_Async_Port group, or if you enter a port number that does not exist in a selected Annex. When information does not match, the warning window informs you that Annex Manager will not use certain parameters. While the Show or Set windows will appear and the operation will continue, message boxes reect error conditions:
Show
does not list these parameters.
Set lists all parameters in the work area, but does not change
or show values for parameters with errors.
13-16
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 13
Understanding Output and Message Box Errors

The Show commands output box and the Set commands message box include error messages about specic parameters. They display errors when:
Annex Manager cannot read one or more parameters. You do not mark at least one parameter when you use Set. Communication with the Annex times out.
Apply You choose and the Set operation cannot change one or more marked parameters. The message box lists all marked parameters, with error messages for those that could not change. In addition, the Set complete with errors message appears. This message indicates that Annex Manager has completed Set processing and has changed some, but not all parameters due to error conditions.
If your selections result in the Set complete with errors message, the automatic Show process displays the original values for parameters that did not change.
13-17
Chapter 13
Part 3
Customize Mode
13-18
Chapter 14 Viewing, Creating, and Executing Scripts

cript commands allow you to create a set of parameter values, to store them as a script, and to apply a scripts parameter values to one or more Annexes. A script is a text le. Each line in the le denes an Annex parameter value. You can use Annex Manager to create a script by capturing an Annexs parameter values, or you can create a script using any standard text editor. After you store a script in a le, you can use it to congure a new Annex, to save an Annexs parameter values for backup, or to apply a special conguration. This chapter describes the Script commands. It includes:
Viewing Script Contents Creating New Scripts Changing Annex Values Using Scripts
Annex Manager provides predened scripts that you can use to reset Annex parameters to their factory default values. View Script displays the contents of predened or site-specic scripts. Execute Script allows you to reset Annex parameters to their factory default values when you use one of the predened scripts.
If you want to use site-specic default values for any script, you should copy the script le and then edit it. Some scripts contain lines that begin with the comment symbol (#). If you remove this symbol when you edit the le, the script will use these parameters.
14-1
Chapter 14
Viewing, Creating, and Executing Scripts
Part 3
Customize Mode
View Script
and Execute Script provide the following pre-dened scripts:

contains Annex port and AppleTalk parameters.
AppleTalk
Basic_Annex
contains basic Annex parameters. If you want to use parameters marked with the comment symbol (#), you should copy the script le, remove the symbol, and enter your own site-specic defaults, since factory default values may not be appropriate. contains basic asynchronous port parameters.
Basic_Async_Port Cmd_Line_Editing
contains the terminal port editing parameters. If you use framed protocols (PPP, IPX, etc.), you may want to leave these parameters at their default settings. contains port parameters for dedicated port mode.
Dedicated_Port
Modem
contains port modem conguration parameters.
Modem_Internal contains port modem conguration parameters for the CSMIM-MODMIM product and other products with internal modems. Nameserver PPP
contains nameserver parameters.
contains port parameters for PPP.
Printer_Port contains port parameters for a parallel printer. Some Annexes do not have parallel printer ports. Routing SLIP
contains Annex and port parameters for routing.
contains Annex and port parameters for SLIP. contains Annex and port security parameters. contains Annex syslog parameters.
Security SysLog TMux
contains TMux protocol parameters.
14-2
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
TN3270
contains port parameters for tn3270. contains Annex timeserver parameters.
Time_of_Day
VCIInterface contains
a ports DecServer user interface parameters. If you do not use the DecServer interface, you should leave these parameters at their default settings. contains virtual CLI parameters.
Virtual_CLI
Viewing Script Contents

The View Script command displays the contents of any existing script. You can use this command to determine whether you need to create a new script, to check the contents of scripts delivered with Annex Manager, or to verify the contents of scripts you created. This section includes:
Displaying the View Script Window Understanding the View Script Window Format Displaying Script Contents
Displaying the View Script Window

originates in the File menu. It displays all parameters and values included in a single script. To display the View Script window:
View Script
1.
Move the pointer to the File menu and click on View Script.
The View Script window appears (see Figure 14-1).
14-3
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
The following example shows the View Script window with a scripts contents displayed.
Figure 14-1. View Script Window
Understanding the View Script Window Format

The View Script window allows you to select or enter a path to display details about a single existing script.
14-4
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
Using Boxes and the Text Field This window uses list and message boxes and a text eld.
The Script List box displays all les in Annex Managers default script directory, which stores the scripts delivered with Annex Manager. You can select any script displayed here. This directory is the default for the scripts you create, but you can store new scripts in any directory. Although View Script lets you display scripts stored in another directory, the Script List box does not change when you enter another directorys path. The Selection eld below the Script List box displays the default script directory. When you choose a script from the list box, this eld changes to display your selection. If you need to display a script stored in another directory, you can enter a path here. The Script Contents box displays the script listed in the text eld, with the scripts name in parentheses above the box. This box displays one script at a time: if you display one script and then select a second script, this box will contain only the most recent selection.
Every script le includes the:

Parameter name. Port type or none if the parameter does not use port information. Port or channel number, zero (0) if the port type is none, or an asterisk (*) if the value is a wildcard indicator. Parameter value.
14-5
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Using Push Buttons

View Script
provides the following buttons at the bottom of the window:
View activates the View Script command and displays a scripts contents. Help
displays a window that explains the View Script removes the View Script window from your display.
command.
Close
To verify a scripts contents when you use the Create Script or Execute Script commands, do not close the View Script window. You can return to this window to verify your work.
Viewing a Script
Using the View Script Command
The View Script command displays all parameter values in the script you select. To view a script:
1. Select View Script from the Commands menu.
The View Script window appears (see Figure 14-1).

2. Select a single script from the Script List box.
The eld below this box displays your selection. You can enter a path in the eld to see a script stored in another directory. In this case, the Script List box does not change.
3. Choose
View
The script listed in the text eld appears in the Script Contents box.
If you need to display more than one script, repeat steps 2 and 3. The Script Contents box does not save previous selections.
14-6
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
Creating New Scripts

The Create Script command lets you create new scripts based on an Annexs current values. Once you create a script you can edit it using any standard text editor.
For security reasons, you can create a script for any Annex parameters except the Internet address (inet_addr), the administrative password (password), the port password (port_password), the access control protocol key (acp_key), the Local Area Transport key (lat_key), the option key (option_key), and the virtual CLI password (vcli_password) parameters.
This section includes:

Displaying the Create Script Window Understanding the Create Script Window Format Creating a Script Editing Script Files
If you leave the View Script window open as you create a script, you can check your work easily.
14-7
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Displaying the Create Script Window

The Create Script window originates in the File menu. To display the window:
1. 2. Select a single Annex from the main window. Hold the mouse button on the File menu and choose Create
Script.
The Create Script window appears (see Figure 14-2). You can select Create Script from the menu rst, and then return to the main window to select an Annex. The order in which you perform these steps does not affect processing.
The following example shows the Create Script window.
Figure 14-2. Create Script Window
14-8
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
Understanding the Create Script Window Format

The Create Script window lets you select parameters for a new script. It includes an option box containing check buttons, a message box, and push buttons. Choosing Create Script Options The Create Script Option box includes check buttons that categorize the new scripts parameters:
Main Window Parameters
creates a script using the Annex and parameters you chose in the main window. For example, if you chose the Basic_Annex group, each parameter in the group and the values for the Annex you selected become the new script.
All Parameters creates a script from all parameters of the Annex you selected, including port parameters. All Annex Only Parameters
creates a script from the Annexs parameters, excluding port parameters.
All Async Port Parameters
creates a script from the Annexs asynchronous port parameters. creates a script from the Annexs printer port parameters.
All Printer Port Parameters
All Enet Port Parameters
creates a script from the Annexs creates a script from the Annexs T1
Ethernet parameters.
All DS0 Channel Parameters
DS0 Channel parameters.
14-9
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
All DS1 Line Parameters
creates a script from the Annexs DS1
parameters.
You can select any combination of All Annex Only Parameters, All Async Port Parameters, All Printer Port Parameters, All Enet Parameters, All DS0 Channel Parameters, and All DS1 Port Parameters. If you select Main Window Parameters or All Parameters, you cannot use other check buttons.
After you select options, Create Script may display a second window. If you selected parameters that require port or channel information, the Script Port Entry window appears rst, followed by the Script File Selection window. For detailed information about these windows, see Creating a Script in this chapter. Reading the Message Box The Create Script windows message box includes the status and error messages that result from the script creation process. After you complete the port entry window and/or the le selection window, this message box monitors Annex Managers script creation process. The box displays:
The Creating script... status message, indicating that processing is active. The Script creation complete message, indicating that the process has taken place. Error messages. If your selections contain parameters that are not eligible for scripts, or that do not exist, the message box informs you about error conditions. For more information, see Identifying Errors in this chapter.
14-10
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
Using Push Buttons

Create Script
Apply displays the Script File Selection window and may display the Script Port Entry window. When you complete these windows, Annex Manager displays status and error messages in the message box and creates a new script. Save Msgs displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of the Cancel Create Script windows message box, or press to return to the Create Script window. Help
displays a window that explains the Create Script removes the Create Script window from your display.
command.
Close
Creating a Script
You can use Create Script to select the parameters and values you want to save in a script.
Using the Create Script Command
To create a script:
1. 2. Select a reachable Annex in the main window. Select Create Script from the File menu.
The Create Script window appears (see Figure 14-2).

3. Select the Create Script Options you need.
For more information, see Choosing Create Script Options on page 14-9.
14-11
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
4.
Choose
Apply
The Annex you selected and the options you chose determine the next windows that appear:
The Script Port Entry window appears if you select: Any combination of the All Async Port Parameters, All Printer Port Parameters, All DS0 Channel Parameters, All DS1 Port Parameters, and All Enet Parameters, options. The Main Windows Parameters option and a main window parameter option that includes one or more port parameters. The All Parameters option. If you select All Annex Only Parameters, or non-port parameters from the main window, the Script File Selection window displays. The Script Port Entry window does not display in this case.
5.
When the Script Port Entry window appears, enter port information Apply and choose .
Figure 14-3. Create Script Port Entry Window
14-12
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
This window allows you to specify one or more port or channel numbers that Annex Manager will use to create a script. The Script Port Entry window includes:
All port types and a port number eld for each type. Annex Manager highlights one or more port types based on the Annex and options you selected. You can enter one or more port or channel numbers or a range of numbers for any highlighted type. In the example above, the conguration has no printer ports, so Printer Port(s) will not accept port numbers. Buttons that allow you to dene wildcard characters. If you entered a single port or channel number in all elds above, you can create a script with wildcard indicators.
Use the specied port number uses only the port numbers
you entered as part of the new script. This button is the default.
Create wildcard port entries enters an asterisk (*) as the scripts port or channel number and allows you to use the script for any port number you enter in the Execute Script command.
Cancel Apply
You can choose When you choose
to return to the Create Script window.
, the le selection window displays.
14-13
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
6.
When the Script File Selection window displays, enter a script le OK name for the new script and choose .
Figure 14-4. Script File Selection Window
The Script File Selection window displays the default script directory. It allows you to:
Overwrite an existing script that you created previously by selecting its name. When you select an existing script name, a window appears that allows you to verify your choice. You cannot overwrite a script that someone else created. Enter a new script name.
OK When you choose the name you specied.
, Annex Manager creates a new script with
14-14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
Editing Script Files

You can use an ascii editor to change saved script les. Annex Manager veries each le according to its rst four lines. When you edit these les, you must use Annex Manager conventions. Script les always begin with:
# # DB_VERSION: V1.0 # FORMAT: Parameter Name | Port Type | Port Number | Value #
For example, you might enter lock_enable| none | 0 | enabled. Script les accept:

0
in the Port Number eld when you select non-port parameters.
A port or channel number or an asterisk (to specify a wildcard port) in the Port Number eld.
Asy, ptr, eth, 2
(for DS1 ports) or none (for All Annex Only parameters) in the Port Type eld. Comment lines as long as each line begins with #. Annex Manager processing ignores these lines.
For detailed information about each parameters values, see Chapter 19.
14-15
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Changing Parameter Values Using Scripts

You can use any existing script to recongure one or more Annexes. The Execute Script command applies a scripts values to the Annexes you select. This section includes:
Displaying the Execute Script Window Understanding the Execute Script Window Format Executing a Script
Displaying the Execute Script Window

The Execute Script window originates in the Congure menu. You can execute an existing script for one or more Annexes.
To display the window:

1. 2. Select one or more reachable Annexes from the main window. Hold the mouse button on the Congure menu and choose Execute Script.
The Execute Script window appears (see Figure 14-5). You can select Execute Script from the menu and then return to the main window to select an Annex. The order in which you perform these steps does not affect processing.
14-16
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
The following example shows the Execute Script window.
Figure 14-5. Execute Script Window
Understanding the Execute Script Window Format

The Execute Script window allows you to choose an existing script and to apply its parameter values to Annexes you selected in the main window. Using the List Box and Text Field This window uses a list box, text eld, and a message box:
The Script List box displays all les in Annex Managers default script directory. You can select any script displayed here. The text eld below the Script List box initially displays the default script directory. When you choose a script from the list box, this eld changes to display your selection. If you need to execute a script stored in another directory, you can enter a path and le name here.
14-17
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Reading the Message Box The Execute Script windows message box includes status and error messages. It displays:
The Executing script... status message, indicating that processing is taking place. The Script execution complete message, indicating that the process has taken place without errors. Error messages. If the script you are executing contains port parameters that are not applicable for the Annex you selected, if you enter integers or an IP address in an incorrect format, or if processing times out, the message box informs you about error conditions. For more information, see Identifying Errors on page 14-22.
Using Push Buttons

Execute Script
activates the execution process. When you use this button, the message box displays status and error messages and Annex Manager applies the eligible values in your script to the Annexes you selected.
Apply
If the script you selected contains wildcard indicators, the Script window appears. The Conrmation window follows. You need to complete this window before you can execute the script.
Port Entry
The Reset Parameters window appears if the parameters changed by the script require Annex Manager to reset Annexes, and if you selected the Conrm Auto Reset option in the pulldown menu.
14-18
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
Save Msgs displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of the Cancel Execute Script windows message box, or press to return to the Execute Script window. Help
displays a window that explains the Execute Script removes the Execute Script window from your
command.
Close
display.
Executing a Script
You can use Execute Script to apply a scripts parameter values to one or more Annexes.
Using the Execute Script Command
To execute a script:
1. 2. Select one or more reachable Annexes in the main window. Select Execute Script from the Congure menu.
The Execute Script window appears (see Figure 14-5).

3. Select the script name you need.
You can select a script from the Script List box or enter a le name or a path and le name in the text eld below this box.
4. Choose
Apply
If you selected a script with one or more wildcard indicators, the Script Port Entry window appears.
14-19
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Figure 14-6. Script Port Entry Window for Execute Script
This window allows you to enter one or more port numbers that Annex Manager will use in place of the scripts wildcard indicator. The window highlights only the port types that need numbers. You can:
Enter one or more port numbers, a range of numbers or all for any highlighted type. Choose Choose
Cancel Apply
to return to the Execute Script window. to execute the script.
If you select a script with wildcard indicators and do not enter a port number here, Annex Manager will execute the script but will not use wildcard parameters. Error messages will identify these parameters.
14-20
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
A window displays to conrm script execution for the Annexes you selected.
Figure 14-7. Execute Script Conrmation Window

OK You can choose to execute the script or to return to the Execute Script window. Cancel
The Reset Parameters window appears if you selected the Conrm Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and if the parameters changed by the script require Annex Manager to reset Annexes. If you did not select Conrm Auto Reset, Annex Manager resets Annexes without notifying you.
Figure 14-8. Execute Script Reset Parameters Window
14-21
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Identifying Errors
Script commands notify you about error conditions by displaying warning windows and by listing errors in message boxes. You can encounter errors based on main window selections or on parameter value limitations. This section includes:
Create Script Command Errors Execute Script Command Errors
Create Script Command Errors

Create Script
displays warning windows if you:
Use the Main Window Parameters option for a list with more than one Annex, and do not select an Annex and a main window parameter option. Select an option that does not match the Annex or parameters you select in the main window. For example, a warning appears if you select the All Sync Port Parameters option and an Annex that does not have synchronous port parameters. Use the Main Window Parameters option and do not enter port or channel information for parameters that require this information.
14-22
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 14
Attempt to replace an existing script created by someone else with a new script you created. Select a port type that does not match one or more parameter port types. For example, a warning window appears if you choose Printer ports and the Basic_Async_Port group, or if you enter a port number that does not exist in a selected Annex.
The message box includes error information when:

Annex Manager cannot read or nd values for one or more parameters. Communication with the Annexes you selected times out. The Create Script operation does not use one or more parameters, or nds specied parameters that are not eligible for scripts. In this case, the Script creation complete with errors message appears.
Execute Script Command Errors

The Execute Script command displays warning windows when you:
Do not select a script from the list. Do not select an Annex when the list contains more than one Annex.
14-23
Chapter 14
Part 3
Customize Mode

Annex Manager cannot nd the value of one or more parameters. The Execute Script operation does not use one or more parameters, or nds specied parameters that are not eligible for scripts. In this case, the Script execution complete with errors message appears.
Annex Manager will not execute a script if you enter an incorrect format for an IP address or for an integer.
14-24
Chapter 15 Comparing and Copying Parameters and Values
nnex Managers Compare command veries parameters and values in existing Annexes and scripts; the Copy command lets you apply one Annexs parameter values to other Annexes. You can use these commands to review and change Annex congurations. This section includes:
Comparing Parameters and Values Copying Parameter Values Identifying Errors
Comparing Parameters and Values

The Compare command lets you match parameters and values for two Annexes, an Annex and a script, or two scripts. You can use this command to check existing values before you change an Annex conguration. This section includes:
Displaying the Compare Window Understanding the Compare Window Format Comparing Parameter Values
Displaying the Compare Window

The Compare command appears in the Congure menu. It lets you select the Annexes and scripts Annex Manager uses to match parameters and values.
15-1
Chapter 15
Comparing and Copying Parameters and Values
Part 3
Customize Mode
To display the Compare window:

1. Create an Annex List.
You must create an Annex list if you want to compare two Annexes or an Annex and a script. You can create a list before you display the Compare window, or you can display the Compare window rst, return to the main window to create the list, and choose Compare again. If you want to compare two scripts, you can skip this step.
2. Move the pointer to the Congure menu and choose Compare.
The Compare window appears.
Figure 15-1 shows the Compare window for two Annexes.
Figure 15-1. Compare Window
15-2
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
Understanding the Compare Window Format

The Compare window allows you to choose the Annexes and/or scripts you want to match. Once you select an option for comparison, the remaining boxes and elds in the window change to correspond to your choice. This section describes the options you can select, and explains the boxes, elds and remaining buttons in the window.
You can compare and copy parameters as long as they exist in both Annexes and scripts you select. For example, you cannot copy parameters from a Annex Primary Rate Annex to an Annex that has asynchronous ports, because the parameters sets in each Annex are not the same.
Choosing Compare Options

Compare
uses option buttons at the top of the window to control the contents of list boxes and the elds. The left-hand button lets you choose a comparison type. You can select the:

Annex vs. Annex
option to compare two Annexes, and/or ports, or two ports from a single Annex.
Annex vs. Script option to compare one Annex and an existing script based on the scripts parameters and values. Script vs. Script option to compare the parameters in two existing
scripts.
15-3
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
The right-hand button appears only when you select the Annex vs. Annex option. This button lets you narrow comparison criteria. You can select the:

Main Window Params
option to compare values based on the parameter options you selected in the main window. option to compare all parameters, excluding port parameters.
Annex Only Params
Async Port Params
option to compare asynchronous port
parameter values. The Printer Port Params option to compare printer port parameter values. The Enet Port Params option to compare Ethernet port parameter values. The DS1 Line Params option to compare T1 DS1 port parameter values.
The message below these buttons summarizes your selections. If you chose Annex vs. Annex and the Main Window Params options, the message includes information from the main window. If you change your selections, this message reects your changes. After you select an option, you can choose the Annex and/or scripts you want to compare.
15-4
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
Selecting Annexes and Scripts for Comparison

The Compare command uses two list boxes and corresponding elds to dene the Annexes or scripts whose parameters will be matched. A Comparison Output box monitors the results of the process.
Compare displays reachable Annexes only. If your Annex list includes an unreachable Annex, its name will not appear in the Compare
windows list box. Using List Boxes, the Port Type Button, and Fields
The comparison option you select determines the kind of boxes and elds that display. When you compare:
Two Annexes, each box displays your Annex lists, a port type button, and a port number eld for each Annex list. A message appears below the Compare Options reminding you that the comparison will be based on your selections in the main window. You can select one Annex from each box, and a port type and number for each Annex. Annex Manager compares two Annexes based on the parameter options you selected. If you select Main Window Params and a parameter option that includes port parameters, the port type you enter must match your main window selections. Figure 15-2 shows the window that compares two Annexes.
Figure 15-2. Compare Window for two Annexes
15-5
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
An Annex and a script, the left-hand box displays the Annex list and the right-hand box displays the default script directory. A message can appear below the Compare Options reminding you that the port you enter will substitute for the scripts wildcard ports. The port type button and port number eld display below the Annex list box. You can select a single Annex from the list. If the script you select contains wildcard ports, you must enter a port type and number. The script selection eld displays below the Script List box. If you select an existing script, its directory and le name appear in the eld. If you want to compare a script stored in another directory, you can enter its directory and name in the selection eld. The example below shows the window for the Annex vs. Script option.
Figure 15-3. Compare Window for Annex and Script
15-6
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
Two scripts, both boxes display the default script directory followed by script selection elds. When you select an existing script from each list, the script's path and le name appear in the selection box. If you want to use a script that is not stored in the default directory, you can enter its directory and name in either selection box. The following example shows the Compare window for two scripts.
Figure 15-4. Compare Window for Two Scripts
Reading the Comparison Output box
The Comparison Output box reports the differences in parameter values between the Annexes and/or scripts you select. If parameter values differ, or if a parameter name does not exist, the box displays the parameter information. The Comparison Output box format depends on the option you choose. Table 15-1 describes these formats.
15-7
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
Table 15-1. Comparison Output Box Information
If values differ and you select:

Annex vs. Annex
The Output Box includes: Parameter name followed by each Annex name, port number (if necessary) and the parameter value. Parameter name followed by the Annex name and value, and the script name and value. Parameter name followed by each script name. Parameter values appear if a parameter exists in both scripts but values are different. If a parameter exists in one script but not in the other, the box lists the parameter name and explains which script stores the parameter.
Annex vs. Script
Script vs. Script
The Compare process considers the wildcard indicator (an asterisk (*)) as a special port number. If you select Script vs. Script and the two scripts have the same parameter but one uses a wildcard, the parameter appears in the output box.
When Annex Manager completes Compare processing, the box lists the number of differences found. If you repeat the Compare command for another combination of Annexes and scripts, new information replaces the original display.
15-8
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
Using Compare Window Buttons

Compare provides the following push buttons:

Apply activates the Compare command based on the Annexes, scripts, and parameters you selected. Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of the Cancel output box or press to return to the Compare window. Help Close
displays a window explaining Compare. removes Compare from your display.
Comparing Parameters and Values

Using the Compare Command
To use the Compare command:

1. Select Compare from the Congure menu.
The Compare window displays (see Figure 15-1).

2. Select the Compare Option you need.
The list boxes and elds change depending on the option you choose (see Using List Boxes, the Port Type Button, and Fields earlier in this chapter). If you select Annex vs. Annex, you must choose a Parameter Option from the main window. If you select Annex vs. Annex or Annex vs. Script, go to step 3. If you select Script vs. Script, skip steps 3 and 4 and go to step 5.
15-9
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
3.
Choose an Annex from each Annex List box that displays.
If your list has one Annex, you do not need to select it. If you want to compare two ports on the same Annex, select the same Annex in both list boxes.
4. Select one port type and a port number for each Annex List.
If you selected the Annex vs. Annex option, you must select a port type that matches the parameters you selected. For all other Compare Options, you can select only the appropriate port type. If you selected the same Annex in both list boxes, you must select different port numbers here. If you select DS1 Line, 2 displays automatically; you cannot change this number.
If you selected Annex vs. Annex, go to step 6.

5. Choose an existing script from each Script List box that displays, or enter a script stored in another directory in the script selection eld.
If you selected the Annex vs. Script option and the script you use has wildcard indicators, the comparison will be based on the port number you enter here. If you selected Script vs. Script and parameters match, but one script has wildcard indicators, Compare considers this a difference in port numbers.
6. Choose
Apply
The Comparison Output box lists the parameters and values that differ, displays the number of differences in the Compare process, and if necessary, lists error conditions. For more information about errors, see Identifying Errors in this chapter.
15-10
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
Copying Parameter Values

The Copy command lets you copy a single Annexs parameter values to one or more Annexes. This command provides options that categorize the parameters you can copy.
For security reasons, you can copy any parameter except the Internet address (inet_addr), the administrative password (password), the port password (port_password), the access control protocol key (acp_key), the Local Area Transport key (lat_key), the option key (option_key) and the virtual password (vcli_password) parameters.

Displaying the Copy Window Understanding the Copy Window Format Copying Parameter Values
Displaying the Copy Window

The Copy command appears in the Congure menu. To display the window:
1. 2. Create an Annex List. Move the pointer to the Congure menu and choose Copy.
The Copy window appears.
Figure 15-5 shows the Copy window.
15-11
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
Figure 15-5. Copy Window
Understanding the Copy Window Format

The Copy window uses an option button, Annex list boxes, port information, and a message box. This section explains each Copy window element.
15-12
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
Choosing Copy Options The Copy Option button denes the parameters whose values will be copied. You can select one of the following buttons:
Main Window Params
copies values for the parameters you selected in the main window. If you use this option with a parameter group or list that includes port parameters or with individual port parameters, you can copy values from one port only. copies the parameters, excluding port parameters, from the Annex you select.
Annex Only Params
Async Port Params
copies asynchronous port parameter values from one Annex and port.
Printer Port Params copies printer port parameter values from one
Annex and port.

Enet Port Params copies Ethernet port parameter values from one
Annex and port. The DS1 Line Params copies DS1 line parameter values from one Annex and port.
The message below these buttons summarizes your selections. If you chose Main Window Params, the message includes information from the main window. After you select an option, you can choose the Annexes and ports you want for the copying process.
Copy does not provide an option for copying all parameters. If you
want to copy all parameters from one Annex to another, you should use the Create Script and Execute Script commands explained in Chapter 14.
15-13
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
Selecting Annexes and Ports for Copying The Copy window provides two Annex list boxes, a port type button and two port number elds that allow you to specify the origin and destination of parameter values.
Using Annex List Boxes
Copy
includes two Annex list boxes.

The Copy From box displays the Annex list you created in the main window. You can select a single Annex from this list. If you need to add an Annex to the list, you can return to the main window and reissue the Copy command. The Copy To box displays the same list as does the Copy From box, and allows you to return to the main window to add an Annex as well. In this window, however, you can select more than one Annex. If you intend to copy port parameter values from one port to another on the same Annex, you need to select the same Annex in both boxes.
Selecting Port Types
The port type button denes the kind of port parameters that will be copied. All Annexes involved in the copy process must use the same port type. This button displays based on the Copy Option you select at the top of the screen. If you select:
Main Window Params, you can select the appropriate port type for
the parameter group or list you chose. For example, if you use a group that includes asynchronous ports and you select printer ports here, the copy command displays a warning and will not use all asynchronous parameters. For more information, refer to Identifying Errors in this chapter.
Annex Only Params, you cannot use the port button or elds. You
cannot change port parameters.
15-14
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
DS1 Line Params, the corresponding option displays automatically, as does port 2. You cannot change this information. Async Port Params, Printer Port Params, or Enet Params, the corresponding option displays automatically. You cannot change the port type button.
Entering Port Numbers
The two port number elds list the ports involved in the copy process. You can enter one port number in the left-hand eld for the Annex from which you are copying values, and one or more numbers (or a range of numbers) in the right-hand eld for the Annex to which you are copying values. Reading the Message Box The Copy window's message box monitors copy operations. It includes:
A status message indicating that Annex Manager is obtaining parameter values from one Annex. For example, if you select an Annex called Emma, the box displays ***Getting copy values from Emma***. The Copying... status message indicating that the process is taking place, followed by a message for each Annex to which you are copying values. For example, if you copy values to an Annex called Alvin, the Performing copy for Alvin message displays. All parameters that were copied successfully. A message indicating that the process is complete. If there are no errors, the box displays Copy completed. If error conditions exist, Copy completed with errors displays. For more information, see Identifying Errors on page 15-19.
15-15
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
Using Push Buttons

Copy

Apply activates the Copy command based on the Annexes Apply and/or scripts you selected. When you press , the Conrmation window appears, allowing you to verify the Copy command. The Reset Parameters window follows if you selected Conrm Auto Reset from the pull-down menu and if the parameter values you are copying require an Annex to be reset. Save Msgs displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the Output box Cancel contents or press to return to the Copy window. Help Close
displays a window that explains the Copy command. removes the Copy window from your display.
Copying Parameter Values

Using the Copy Command
You can use the Copy command to copy parameter values from one Annex or port to one or more Annexes or ports. To use this command:
1. Create an Annex List in the main window.
Copy works only for reachable Annexes. For more information
about Annex lists, see Chapter 4.

2. Move the pointer to the Congure menu and select Copy.
The Copy window displays (see Figure 15-5).
15-16
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
3.
Select one option from the Copy Options button.
If you select Main Window Params, you must choose a parameter group or one or more parameters in the main window.
4. Choose one Annex from the Copy From window.
This list displays reachable Annexes only. If you need to add an Annex to the list, you can return to the main window and reissue the Copy command. If your list contains one Annex, you do not need to select it.
5. Choose a port type.
You can choose a port type only if you chose the Main Window Params option. The port type you choose must correspond to the port type in the parameters you selected in the main window. If you selected an option other than Main Window Params, skip this step and go to step 6.
6. Enter a port number in the eld next to the port type button if you selected Main Window Params that require port information, Async Port Params, Printer Port Params, DS1 Line Params, or Enet Port Params.
If you chose Main Window, this port type must match those in the parameters you selected. If you chose Annex Only Params, or T1 DS1 Params, you do not need to complete this eld: skip this step and go to step 7.
7. Select one or more Annexes from the Copy To window.
If you need to add an Annex to the list, you can return to the main window and reissue the Copy command. If your list contains only one Annex, you do not need to select it.
8. Enter one or more port numbers, or a range of port numbers in the eld below the Copy To box.
15-17
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
9.
Choose
Apply
This step triggers several operations:
A Conrmation window appears, listing the Annexes whose parameter values will change.
Figure 15-6. Copy Command Conrmation Window
The message box displays status messages, and, if necessary, it lists error messages. For more information about errors, see Identifying Errors in this chapter.
The Reset Parameters window appears if you selected the Conrm Auto Reset option from the pull-down menu and if the parameters you are copying require Annex Manager to reset Annexes. If you did not select Conrm Auto Reset, Annex Manager resets Annexes without notifying you.
Figure 15-7. Copy Command Reset Parameters Window
15-18
Part 3
Customize Mode
Chapter 15
Identifying Errors
The Compare and Copy commands notify you about error conditions by displaying warning windows and by listing errors in output and message boxes. You can encounter errors based on main window selections or on parameter value limitations. This section includes:
Compare Command Errors Copy Command Errors
Compare Command Errors

Warning Windows
Compare
displays warning windows if you:

Do not select an Annex or a script from list boxes that contain more than one Annex or script. Use the Annex vs. Annex option for a list with more than one Annex and do not select an Annex and parameters. Use Annex vs. Annex, do not enter port information and then select parameters that require this information. Use Script vs. Script and select the same script in each window. Select a port type that does not match one or more parameter port types. For example, a warning window appears if you choose Enet Port type and the Basic_Async_Port group, or if you enter a port number that does not exist in a selected Annex. The output box displays errors when Compare cannot nd values for selected parameters or when communication with the Annexes you selected times out.
Output Box
15-19
Chapter 15
Part 3
Customize Mode
Copy Command Errors

Warning Windows
The Copy command displays warning windows when you:

Do not create an Annex list. Do not select an Annex from a list that contains more than one Annex. Use the Main Window Params option and do not select parameters. Use the Main Window Params option and do not enter port information for parameter groups that require this information.
Message Box

Annex Manager cannot read or copy one or more parameters.
Apply You choose and the Copy operation cannot change one or more parameters. The message box includes error messages for those parameters that could not change. In addition, the Copy complete with errors message appears.
Communication with the Annexes you selected times out.
15-20
Chapter 16 Booting and Resetting Annexes

hen you use a command that changes parameter values, you can use the Boot or Reset commands to apply new Annex congurations. You can use Broadcast to notify Annex users about a boot or reset, or send any message to all devices connected to the Annexes you select. This chapter explains these commands in the following sections:
Booting Annexes Resetting an Annex Conguration Broadcasting Messages Conguring PRI Internal Modems
For detailed information about Annex congurations, refer to your Annex hardware guide.
Booting Annexes
The Boot command allows you to boot one or more active Annexes. You can choose to boot Annexes immediately, set a time in the future for the boot to take place, and send an explanatory message to all users. This section gives you directions for using the Boot command. It includes:
Displaying the Boot Window Understanding the Boot Window Format Booting an Annex
The Boot command terminates all active connections to an Annex. You cannot return to the main window once you display the Boot window.
16-1
Chapter 16
Booting and Resetting Annexes
Part 4
Control and Status Commands
Displaying the Boot Window

The Boot command originates in the Congure menu. To display the window:
1. Create an Annex list in the main window.
For more information about Annex lists, see Chapter 4.

2. 3. Select one or more Annexes from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Congure menu, choose Boot and release the mouse button.
The Boot window appears (see Figure 16-1).
The example below shows the Boot window for a single Annex.
Figure 16-1. Boot Window
16-2
Part 4
Chapter 16
In this example, the Pref Load Addr, Pref Dump Addr, and Boot Image elds display values automatically. If you select multiple Annexes whose values differ, these elds do not contain values. For example, if you select two Annexes with the same Pref Load Addr and different values for Pref Dump Addr, a warning window will appear and the Pref Dump Addr eld will not display a value.
Understanding the Boot Window Format

The Boot windows radio buttons dene the type of boot operation. Text elds control the boot image, load and dump addresses, time, and message to users. Annex Managers standard push buttons activate the command. This section describes each window element. Dening Boot Options You can choose one of the following Boot Option buttons:

Immediate
boots selected Annexes as soon as you activate the command. accepts a Boot Time at which the boot will occur. You can enter more than one delayed request. However, if you enter a second request for a time earlier than an existing request, the selected Annexes will boot at the earlier time and all other existing boot requests will be deleted. image to the address you enter in the
Delayed
Dump saves the current Pref Dump Addr eld. Diagnostic
places an Annex in test mode and begins diagnostic tests. When these tests end, the Annex is in ROM Monitor mode and cannot respond to Annex Manager requests until you boot it.
16-3
Chapter 16
Part 4
Abort Quiet
cancels all delayed boot requests.
boots the Annexes you selected without sending a warning message to users. When you reboot, you can use the image in the ash memory rather than an image from a server on the network.
For Boot Options other than Quiet, Annex Manager sends a status message to all terminals connected to the Annexes you are booting. Each message contains Annex names and an indication of shutdown. For Delayed, the message includes the boot time. For Abort, the message indicates cancellation.
Save In Flash loads the boot image and saves it in ash memory.
Using Text Fields The windows text elds control the Boot commands addresses, source, time, image, and message to users:

Pref Load Addr stores the address from which the boot command will load the image. Pref Dump Addr accepts the address to which Boot will dump the current image. You can use this eld only when you select the Dump option. Load Dump Gateway
accepts the address of a gateway that an Annex uses when it loads or dumps an image to a host located on a different network or subnetwork.
Boot Time lets you enter the time at which the boot operation will occur. You can use this eld only when you select the Delayed option. You can enter a time in HH:MM format, or you can enter a plus sign (+) followed by a time in HH:MM format to indicate an amount of time in the future.
16-4
Part 4
Chapter 16
Boot Image accepts the path and le name for the operational code that will be loaded. If you change the Boot Image, be sure that the new image is appropriate for the Annex types you select. If you do not specify an image name, each Annex you selected will boot using the current default image for that Annex. Boot Message
allows you to add your own text to the standard boot message. The text you enter displays on every terminal connected to the Annexes you select for booting. You cannot use this eld if you selected the Quiet option.
The Preferred Load Address, Preferred Dump Address, and Boot Image elds use the default addresses and image. If you select:
A single Annex, Boot displays the default addresses and image. Two or more Annexes with the same preferred load and dump address and default image, Boot displays these addresses and image. Two or more Annexes with different default values for load or dump addresses and images, Boot displays a warning message informing you about this condition and leaves the elds blank. If you leave these elds blank, Boot uses the default value for Preferred Load Address, Preferred Dump Address and Boot Image for each Annex you selected.
Using Boot Window Buttons

Boot

Apply
activates the Boot command for the Annexes you displays a window that explains the Boot command. removes the Boot window from your display.
selected.
Help Close
16-5
Chapter 16
Part 4
Understanding Boot Command Messages The Boot command sends a standard message to all terminals connected to the Annexes you are booting. Message text depends on the options you select. If you select:
Immediate, Dump, Diagnostic, or Save in Flash, the message text includes the Annex names and an indication of shutdown. For example, booting an Annex named Emma sends the following message: ***Annex (emma) shutdown message from NA by SNMP@network manager***. Delayed, the message contains the boot time and amount of time until the boot will take place. For example, if you schedule a boot for 11:50 a.m. on Thursday, the message would say ***Annex (emma) shutdown message from NA by SNMP@network manager*** Annex (emma) going down in 57 minutes (11:50 Thu). Abort to stop a scheduled boot, the message indicates that the boot has been cancelled. For example, if you cancel the boot scheduled for 11:50 a.m. on Thursday, the message reads Annex (emma) boot at 11:50 is canceled. Quiet,
no boot messages are sent.
For all options except Quiet, you add your own message by using the Boot
Message eld. If you create your own message, its text follows the standard
boot message.
Booting Annexes
You can use the Boot command for one or more Annexes. Annex Manager changes values for the Pref Load Addr and Pref Dump Addr parameters before the boot takes place.
16-6
Part 4
Chapter 16
Using the Boot Command
To boot an Annex:
1. Create an Annex List and select one or more Annexes.
For more information about creating lists, refer to Chapter 4.

2. Select Boot from the Congure menu.
The Boot window appears (see Figure 16-1). You cannot return to the main window unless you close the Boot window.
3. Choose the Boot Option you need.
Refer to Dening Boot Operations earlier in this chapter for detailed information about each option.
4. Enter information in the windows text elds.
Text elds may be required or may not be available, depending on the Boot Option you choose. If you selected:
Immediate, Diagnostic, or Save in Flash, you can enter text in
the Pref Load Addr, Boot Image, and Boot Message elds.
Delayed,
you must complete the Boot Time eld. You can enter a time in HH:MM format, or you can enter a plus sign (+) followed by a time in HH:MM format to indicate an amount of time in the future. You can enter text in the Pref Load Addr, Boot Image, and Boot Message elds.
You can enter more than one delayed request. However, if you enter a second request for a time earlier than an existing request, the selected Annexes will boot at the earlier time and all other existing boot requests will be deleted.
16-7
Chapter 16
Part 4
Dump, you can enter text in the Pref Load Addr, Pref Dump Addr, Boot Image, and Boot Message elds. Abort,
you can enter text in the Boot Message eld. You cannot complete other elds.
Quiet, you
can enter values in the Pref Load Addr and Boot Image elds, but you cannot enter text in the Boot Message eld. If you select a single Annex, Pref Load Addr, Pref Dump and Boot Image display the Annexs current addresses and image.
Addr,
If you select multiple Annexes whose values differ for Pref Load Addr, Pref Dump Addr, or Boot Image, values do not appear. If you leave these elds blank, Boot will use the current load and dump addresses for each selected Annex, and will use the value in the default_image_name parameter for Boot Image. You can enter new values in any available eld.
5. Choose
Apply
A Conrmation window appears.
WARNING
Figure 16-2. Boot Command Conrmation Window
16-8
Part 4
Chapter 16
OK Cancel You can choose to activate the boot or to OK return to the Boot window. When you choose , Annex Manager noties the console and all terminals connected to the Annexes you selected about the boot.
Once the boot takes place, a warning window appears. This window lists the Annexes where the boot transmission was successful and, if necessary, lists Annexes where the boot transmission was unsuccessful.
If you boot an active Annex, its status in the main windows list changes to NOT REACHABLE. In fact, although the Annex is not available while boot processing takes place, a successful boot does restore the Annex on your network. You can use Verify Annex State to restore the display.
Resetting Annex Congurations

You can use the Reset command to change a specic Annex or port conguration without booting. This command lets you reset port and interface settings, several conguration le options, and name servers. This section explains the Reset command in the following sections:
Displaying the Reset Window Choosing a Reset Option Resetting an Annex
16-9
Chapter 16
Part 4
Displaying the Reset Window

The Reset command originates in the Congure menu. To display this window:

2. 3. Select one or more Annexes from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Congure menu, choose Reset and release the mouse button.
The Reset window appears (see Figure 16-3).
The following example shows the Reset window.
Figure 16-3. Reset Window
16-10
Part 4
Chapter 16
Understanding the Reset Window Format

The Reset window uses radio buttons, port type and port number elds, and push buttons to apply parameter value changes to the Annexes you select. Choosing a Reset Option The Reset windows radio buttons dene the options that Annex Manager will change.
Reset terminates active connections to an Annex when you use the All, All Async Ports, All Printer Ports, All Virtual Ports, All T1 DS1 Ports (Hard), All T1 DS1 Ports (Soft), All Internal Modems, Individual Ports, All Internal Modems, Individual Internal Modems, Individual Internal Modems, and PRI Line options.
You can choose one of the following buttons:

All
resets all items listed in the remaining buttons.
Annex All resets all items included in the LAT, Macros, Message of the Day, Name Server, and Security buttons. All Async Ports All Printer Ports All Virtual Ports
resets the asynchronous ports. resets the parallel printer ports. resets the virtual connections.
All T1 DS1 Ports (Hard) resets All T1DS1 Ports (Soft) resets
the T1 engine and terminates the T1 Drop/Insert interface and modem sessions.
parameters and will disrupt service only on DS0 channels that have been changed. all T1 engine statistics.
All T1 DS1 ESF Counters resets
16-11
Chapter 16
Part 4
All Interfaces
resets the interface parameters. resets entries for internal modems only.
All Internal Modems
Individual Ports resets only the port type you enter in the option button below the Reset Option box and the port numbers you enter in the adjacent eld. Individual Internal Modems
resets one or more internal modems you enter in the option button below the Reset Option box and the modem numbers you enter in the adjacent eld.
Dialout
resets entries used for dialing out from a Unix host to a remote node over a port in slave mode.
LAT resets LAT (Local Area Transport) parameters. When you use this option, existing connections keep their current values: new parameter values apply only to LAT connections established after you use Reset. Macros
resets macros after you customize them in the Annex conguration le.
Message of the Day resets External Modems
the le for the message that appears when you establish a connection to an Annex. resets modem entries for external modems only.
PRI Line
resets a PRI line for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex.
PRI Sessions
reloads session parameter blocks in the conguration le for an ISDN Primary Rate Annexs session
Name Server resets the parameters and host table that control an Annexs ability to translate addresses to names. Security
resets security parameters.
16-12
Part 4
Chapter 16
Entering Port and Modem Information If you choose the Individual Port or Individual Internal Modem option, you must complete the eld located below the Reset Options box.
Entering Port or Modem Numbers
To choose a port type and port numbers or an internal modem name:

If you chose Individual Ports, the menu displays Async Port(s), and Printer Port(s). If you chose Individual Internal Modems, the menu displays Internal Modem(s). If you chose PRI Line, the menu displays DS1 Line(s).
2. Highlight the selection you want and release the button.
If you chose Individual Internal Modems, you do not have to select an option here. If you chose PRI Line, 2 displays automatically.
3. Enter one or more port, line, or modem numbers in the eld.
To enter specic ports or modems, separate numbers with commas or indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you might enter 1, 3, 8 to specify three ports, or 1-3, 8 to specify ports 1 through 3 and port 8.
Using Push Buttons

Reset

Apply
activates the Reset command for the Annex you displays a window that explains the Reset removes the Reset window from your display.
selected.
Help
command.
Close
16-13
Chapter 16
Part 4
Resetting an Annex
Using the Reset Command
To reset an Annex:
1. 2. Create an Annex List and select one or more Annexes. Select Reset from the Congure menu.
The Reset window displays (see Figure 16-3).

3. Choose the Reset Option you need.
You can select one option. For detailed information about these options, refer to Choosing a Reset Option earlier in this chapter and to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX.
Reset terminates active connections to an Annex when you use the All, All Async Ports, All Printer Ports, All Virtual Ports, All T1 DS1 Ports (Hard), All T1 DS1 Ports (Soft), All Internal Modems, Individual Ports and Individual Internal Modems options.
If you selected the Individual Ports orthe Individual Internal Modem option, continue to step 4. For all other options, skip step 4 and go to step 5.
4. Enter a port type and port or modem number information in the elds below the Reset Options box.
You can use these elds only if you selected the Individual Ports or the Individual Internal Modems option.
5. Choose
Apply
A Conrmation window appears.
16-14
Part 4
Chapter 16
WARNING
Figure 16-4. Reset Command Conrmation Window

OK You can choose to reset an Annex or return to the Reset window. Cancel
to
Once you reset an Annex, a warning window appears. This window lists the Annexes that were reset and, if necessary, lists Annexes where Reset was unsuccessful.
Broadcasting Messages
The Broadcast command lets you send messages to all ports on one or more Annexes. You can use this command to communicate quickly with all terminals connected to the Annexes you select. This section includes:
Displaying the Broadcast Window Understanding the Broadcast Window Format Sending a Broadcast Message
16-15
Chapter 16
Part 4
Displaying the Broadcast Window

The Broadcast command appears in the Congure menu. To display the window:

2. 3. Select one or more Annexes from the list. Move the pointer to the Congure menu and choose Broadcast.
The Broadcast window appears (see Figure 16-5).
The following example shows the Broadcast window.
Figure 16-5. Broadcast Window
Understanding the Broadcast Window Format

The Broadcast window uses radio buttons, a message box, and push buttons to transmit a message to the Annexes you selected. This section explains these window elements.
16-16
Part 4
Chapter 16
Choosing a Broadcast Destination Before you broadcast a message, you need to choose the type of port to which you will send it. The windows Broadcast Destination buttons specify port types. You can select one of the following buttons:

All
sends your message to all asynchronous ports and to those that have virtual connections to the Annexes you select.
Async sends your message to all asynchronous ports on the Annexes you select. Virtual sends your message to all virtual connections on selected Annexes.
When you choose a destination, you can enter message text. Writing a Message This windows Broadcast Message box lets you enter the text of your message. Your message can:
Use 1 to 128 characters. Contain any number of lines. You can change the Broadcast windows size to display a message that exceeds the standard message box, or you can use and to display any part of your message.
The Broadcast command uses the standard message followed by the date and time information and by the text you entered. For example, a broadcast message sent to warn users that you want to boot an Annex might read ***Broadcast from SNMP net manager
[Thu Aug 18 11:16:34 1994]*** Please log off Emma immediately for reboot.
16-17
Chapter 16
Part 4
Using Push Buttons

Broadcast
Apply activates the Broadcast command for the Annexes you selected. Help
displays a window that explains the Broadcast removes the Broadcast window from your display.
command.
Close
Sending a Broadcast Message

Using the Broadcast Command
You can use Broadcast when you need to communicate quickly with all terminals connected to an Annex. To send a message:

2. Select Broadcast from the Congure menu.
The Broadcast window displays (see Figure 16-5).

3. Choose the Broadcast Destination you need.
You can select All, Async or Virtual. For detailed information, refer to Choosing a Broadcast Destination earlier in this chapter.
4. Enter message text in the Broadcast Message box.
Your message can use up to 128 characters in any number of lines.

5. Choose
Apply
Annex Manager sends your message to all users connected to the Annexes you selected.
16-18
Part 4
Chapter 16
Conguring PRI Internal Modems

The PRI Internal Modems command allows you to select and change the status of one or more internal modems for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. This section includes:
Displaying the Set PRI Internal Modems Window Understanding the Set PRI Internal Modems Window Changing Internal Modem Status
Displaying the Set PRI Internal Modems Window

The Set PRI Internal Modems command appears in the Congure menu. To display the window:

2. 3. Select one or more Annexes from the list. Move the pointer to the Congure menu and choose PRI Internal
Modems.
The window appears (see Figure 16-6).
16-19
Chapter 16
Part 4
The following example shows the Set PRI Internal Modems window.
WARNING
Figure 16-6. Set PRI Internal Modems Window
Understanding the Set PRI Internal Modems Window

You can use the Set PRI Internal Modems window to view the current status of individual internal modems or to change the status of one or more modems. This window uses a list box and radio buttons.
16-20
Part 4
Chapter 16
Using the Modems List Box The Modems List box includes all internal modems for the ISDN Primary Rate Annexes you selected. You can select one or more Annexes here. This box includes:
The Annex name. The Modem # number for each internal modem. The current Status for each modem:
Available indicates that the modem is in working order and
is not being used.

Busy indicates that the modem has been set to this status to
make it unavailable.
Used
indicates that the modem is handling a call. indicates that the modem is not working.
Failed
Using the Modem Status Button The Modem Status button allows you change an internal modems status. You can select:
Available to make a modem available when its current status is Busy or Failed. You cannot choose Available for modems that are
in use. prevent an ISDN Primary Rate Annex from selecting a modem that may not be operating properly. If you select Busy for a modem with a Used status, the Busy status will not take effect until the current call terminates.
Busy to
When you change a modem status, the Modem List box reects your changes immediately.
16-21
Chapter 16
Part 4
Using Push Buttons

Set PRI Internal Modems
Apply activates the PRI Internal Modems command for the modems you selected. Update Help
gives you the current status of each internal modem.
displays a window that explains the PRI Internal Modems command.

Close removes the Set PRI Internal Modems window from your display.
Changing Internal Modem Status

Using the Broadcast Command
You can use when you need to communicate quickly with all terminals connected to an Annex. To send a message:

2. Select PRI Internal Modems from the Congure menu.
The Set PRI Internal Modems window displays.

3. Select one or more modems from the Modems List box.
The system highlights your choices

4. Choose the Modem Status you need.
If you are setting modems to Available, you can skip this step.
5. Press
Apply
Annex Manager changes status for the modems you selected.
16-22
Chapter 17 Displaying Status Information

nnex Manager retrieves information about the status of an Annex, its ports, and its interfaces. Status commands display hardware and software information as well as basic performance statistics. In addition, Annex Manager provides the Discover Annexes command. This command identies all Annexes known to a search device by retrieving its routing table. This chapter describes these commands in the following sections:
Displaying Annex Status Information Displaying Asynchronous Port Status Information Displaying Interface Status Information Displaying PRI CSU Internal Status Information Displaying PRI Internal CSU Status Information Displaying T1 Internal CSU Status Information Displaying T1 Modem Calls Status Information Displaying Dial VPN Services (DVS) Status Information Identifying Annexes
All status windows are snapshots of current values: status commands do not provide active polling of data. These commands and the Discover Annexes command provide information for display only and do not change Annex congurations.
Displaying Annex Status Information

You can display basic information about a single Annex using the Annex Status command. This section includes:
Displaying the Annex Status Window Understanding the Annex Status Window
17-1
Chapter 17
Displaying Status Information
Part 4
Displaying the Annex Status Window

The Annex Status command originates in the Status menu. Figure 17-1. To display the window:

2. 3. Select a single Annex from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, choose Annex Status, and release the mouse button.
The Annex Status window appears (see Figure 17-1). The name of the Annex you selected appears in the windows title bar.
The example below shows the window.
WARNING
Figure 17-1. Annex Status Window
17-2
Part 4
Chapter 17
Understanding the Annex Status Window

The Annex Status window uses text elds to display information about a single Annex. This command does not allow you to change information in the window. displays information in Loading, Mbufs, and Memory boxes. Each box groups information in text elds.
Annex Status
Understanding the Loading Box The Loading box provides information about activity on the Annex using the following elds:

System Up Time provides the time since the Annex was booted in days, hours, minutes, and seconds. Rescheds (min/tot) displays the number of processes whose time
slice expired in the last minute followed by the number of processes whose time slice expired since the Annex was booted.
CPU % Utilization displays the percentage of CPU resources currently being used. Switches (min/tot) lists the number of context switches in the last minute (min) followed by the number of context switches since the Annex was booted (tot). Procs (act/most/max) displays the number of currently active processes (act), the largest number of active processes since the Annex was booted (most), and the total number of process structures allocated (max). Activates (min/tot)
supplies the number of processes activated during the last minute (min), followed by the number of processes activated since the Annex last booted (tot).
17-3
Chapter 17
Part 4
Understanding the Mbufs Box The Mbufs (memory buffer) box provides information about the number and use of memory buffers in the Annex.

Total indicates the number of memory buffers allocated by the Annex kernel. Free provides the number of currently available memory buffers. Min Free shows the smallest number of memory buffers that has been available since the Annex was booted. Denied indicates the number of times a process was denied a memory buffer because the buffer was not available.
Understanding the Memory Box The Memory box gives you statistics about an Annexs memory:

Total Free
shows the Annexs total memory measured in bytes. indicates the amount of currently available memory.
Min Free provides the lowest amount of free memory that has been available since the Annex was booted. Avail indicates the amount of memory that was available immediately after the Annex was booted.
There may be a problem with Annex software if:
Denied
shows a number other than zero. displays zero or its value slowly decreases over
Min Free
time. If you encounter these circumstances, please contact Bay Networks technical support.
17-4
Part 4
Chapter 17
Using Push Buttons

Annex Status
Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of Cancel the Annex Status windows output box, or press to return to the Annex Status window. Close
removes the Annex Status window from your display.
Displaying Asynchronous Port Status Information

The Annex Async Port Status command provides information about one or more asynchronous ports for an Annex. This section includes:
Displaying the Annex Async Port Status Window Understanding the Annex Async Port Status Window Viewing Asynchronous Port Status Information
Displaying the Annex Async Port Status Window

The Async Port command originates in the Status menu. To display the window:
For more information about creating Annex lists, see Chapter 4.

2. 3. Select a single Annex from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, choose Async Port Status and release the mouse button.
The Annex Async Port Status window appears (see Figure 17-2). The name of the Annex you selected appears in the windows title bar.
17-5
Chapter 17
Part 4
The following example shows the window for two asynchronous ports.
Figure 17-2. Annex Async Port Status Window
Understanding the Annex Async Port Status Window

The Annex Async Port Status window displays information in the Port Totals and Port Information boxes. In addition, it includes a port number eld. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex conguration from this window.
17-6
Part 4
Chapter 17
Entering Port Information Before you can display port statistics, you must complete the Async Port(s) eld located below the Port Information box.
Entering Port Numbers
To enter port numbers:

Enter one or more port numbers in the Async Port(s) eld.
To enter specic ports, separate port numbers with commas or indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you might enter 1, 3, 8 to specify three ports, or 1-3, 8 to specify ports 1 through 3 and port 8. In addition, you can enter all. When you use
Apply
, port statistics appear.
Understanding the Port Totals Box

Annex Async Port Status
displays information in the Port Totals and Port
Information boxes. The Port Totals box gives you statistics for all asynchronous ports from the time the Annex was last booted or reset. This box includes the following elds:
Num Ports
displays the total number of asynchronous ports on the Annex you selected. shows the total number of characters received. lists the total number of characters transmitted.
Input Chars
Output Chars Parity Errors
indicates the total number of parity errors detected. displays the total number of overrun errors. displays the total number of framing errors
Overrun Errors Framing Errors
detected.
17-7
Chapter 17
Part 4
Understanding the Port Information Box The Port Information box displays statistics for each port you entered in the Async Port(s) eld. This box includes the following categories:

Port Number shows the port numbers you entered. Each number appears on a separate line. In Flow State
shows the current status of input ow control. If the eld displays:

Go,
ow control is allowed. ow control is not allowed. ow control is not applicable for this port. the ow control status cannot be identied.
Stop,
None,
Unknown,
Out Flow State indicates the current status of output ow control. If the eld displays:
Go,
ow control is allowed. ow control is not allowed. ow control is not applicable for this port. the ow control status cannot be determined.
Stop,
None,
Unknown,
In Chars
displays the number of characters received by each
port.
Out Chars indicates the number of characters transmitted from each port. Session Number provides the number of open sessions on the port that are connected, connecting, or disconnecting.
17-8
Part 4
Chapter 17
Oper Status shows a ports operational state independent of ow control. If this eld displays:
Up,
the port is functioning normally. the port is not functioning. the port is up and has a user logged in. identies the user logged in to the ports you
Down, Active,
Current User
selected.
Login Time displays the day and time that the port was opened according to the Annex clock. Port Proto denes the protocol that is active on a port. This eld
can display the following codes.

Cli indicates that this is a CLI port opened by a device connected to the port or by a connection from a host as a virtual CLI. psvr vcli dp lpd
indicates that this is a slave port.
indicates that this is a virtual port.
denes a dedicated port.
indicates that the port is using the Annex line printer daemon. indicates that the PPP protocol is active. indicates that the SLIP protocol is active. indicates that the ARAP protocol is active.
ppp slip
arap ftp
indicates that the port is an FTP interface. indicates that the port is a Novell dedicated port.
ndp
ipx indicates that the port is a dedicated IPX port used only
for dial-in access.

dyndial
denes a dynamic dial port.
17-9
Chapter 17
Part 4
Using Push Buttons

The Annex Async Port Status command uses the following push buttons:

Apply displays status information about the asynchronous ports you selected. Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of both boxes, or press Cancel to return to the Annex Async Port Status window. Help
Status
displays a window explaining the Annex Async Port command.
Close removes the Annex Async Port Status window from your display.
Viewing Asynchronous Port Status Information

Using the Command
To display information about the asynchronous ports you entered:

1. Create an Annex List in the main window and select a single Annex.

2. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, choose Async Port Status and release the mouse button.
The Annex Async Port Status window appears.

3. Enter the port numbers you need in the Async Port(s) eld.
You can enter one or more numbers, a range of numbers separated by commas or dashes, or all.
4. Press
Apply
Port status information appears in the Port Totals and Port Information boxes.
17-10
Part 4
Chapter 17
Displaying Interface Information

The Annex Interface Status command provides information about an Annexs interfaces. This section includes:
Displaying the Annex Interface Status Window Understanding the Annex Interface Status Window
Displaying the Annex Interface Status Window

The Interface command appears in the Status menu. To display the window:

2. 3. Select a single Annex from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, choose Interface and release the mouse button.
The Annex Interface Status window appears (see Figure 17-3). The name of the Annex you selected appears in the windows title bar.
17-11
Chapter 17
Part 4
The following example shows an Annex Interface Status window.
Figure 17-3. Annex Interface Status Window
Understanding the Annex Interface Status Window

The Annex Interface Status window displays information in General Information and Statistics boxes. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex conguration from this window. Reading the General Information Box
The General Information box gives you basic interface information for the Annex you selected. This box includes the following categories:
Intf Name provides a text description of the interface. This can include the interface name, manufacturer, and version identier.
17-12
Part 4
Chapter 17
Type categorizes the interface according to the physical/link protocols immediately below the network layer. MTU
(Maximum Transmission Unit) shows the size of the largest packet (in octets) that the interface can send or receive.
Speed displays an estimate of the interfaces current bandwidth
in bits per second.

Oper Status
shows the interfaces current operational state. This eld can display Up or Down.
Last Change indicates the time at which the interface entered its current operational state.
Reading the Statistics Box The Statistics box displays statistics related to trafc on each interface. This box uses a separate line for information about incoming and outgoing trafc. It includes the following categories:

Intf Name Octets
provides a text description of the interface.
shows the total number of octets received or transmitted on the interface, including framing characters.
Ucast Pkts lists the number of subnetwork-unicast packets received from or delivered to a higher-layer protocol. NUcast Pkts
lists the number of subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast packets received from or sent to a higherlayer protocol.
17-13
Chapter 17
Part 4
Discards displays the number of inbound or outbound packets that could not be delivered to a higher-layer protocol. Packets may have been discarded due to lack of buffer space, and may not have had errors. Errors provides the number of packets that could not be received or transmitted due to errors. Unknown Protocols lists the number of inbound packets discarded
because of unknown or unsupported protocols.

Queue Length
displays the number of outbound packets in the packet queue.
Using Push Buttons

Annex Interface Status
Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of the Cancel Annex Interface Status windows output box, or press to return to the Annex Interface Status window. Close
removes the Annex Interface Status window from your
display.
17-14
Part 4
Chapter 17
Displaying PRI Channels Status Information

The Annex PRI Channels Status command provides information about B channels with established calls on a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex. This section includes:
Displaying the Annex PRI Channels Status Window Understanding the Annex PRI Channels Status Window Viewing PRI Channels Status Information
Displaying the Annex PRI Channels Status Window

The PRI Channels command originates in the Status menu. To display the window:

2. 3. 4. Select a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select PRI.
Choose Channels, and release the mouse button.
The Annex PRI Channels Status window appears (see Figure 17-4).
17-15
Chapter 17
Part 4
The following example shows the Annex PRI Channels Status window.
Figure 17-4. Annex PRI Channels Status Window
Understanding the Annex PRI Channels Status Window

The Annex PRI Channels Status window displays information in the Async Information and Sync Information boxes. In addition, it includes the Channel(s) eld and Sort Options buttons. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex conguration from this window.
17-16
Part 4
Chapter 17
Entering Channel Information and Sorting Options Before you can display PRI channels statistics, you must complete the Channel(s) eld located below the Sync Information box. If you want to change the sorting order for statistics, you can use the Sort Options buttons.
Entering Channel Information
To enter specic channels: The Channel(s) eld accepts one or more

B-channel numbers.
1. Enter one or more B-channel numbers.
You can separate numbers with commas or indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you might enter 1, 20 to specify two channels, or 1-10, 20 to specify channels 1 through 10 and channel 20. In addition, you can enter all.
2. Press
Apply
ISDN Primary Rate Annex statistics appear (see Figure 17-4). Choosing Sort Options
The Sort Options buttons control how the Async Information and Sync Information boxes list information.
Select an option.
You can choose Channel to sort information according to channel number or User to sort information by user name.
17-17
Chapter 17
Part 4
Understanding the Information Boxes window displays information in the Async Information, and Sync Information boxes. Since the ISDN Primary Rate Annex assigns calls to channels based on a calls characteristics, a single channel can appear in the Async Information or Sync Information box.
Annex PRI Channels Status
The Async Information box lists information about asynchronous or V.120 calls. The Sync Information box includes information about synchronous calls.
Each box lists information in the following categories:

Channel lists the Channel(s) eld.
B-channel number you entered in the
Call Type categorizes a call using a code and a number representing the modem or the logical connection assigned to a call.
The Async Information box lists asynchronous calls as asy and V.120 calls as ta. The Sync Information box lists calls as syn.
Called # identies the telephone number the user entered to dial into the Annex. Calling # identies the telephone number from which the call originated. User
lists the user name.
17-18
Part 4
Chapter 17
Using Push Buttons

The Annex PRI Channels Status window uses the following push buttons:

Apply displays status information about the ISDN Primary Rate Annex you selected. Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of Cancel all boxes, or press to return to the Annex PRI Channels Status window. Help
Channels Status
displays a window explaining the Annex PRI command.
Close removes the Annex PRI Channels Status window from your display and returns you to the main window.
Viewing PRI Channels Status Information

Using the Command
To display Information about the PRI channels you entered:

1. Create an Annex List in the main window and select a single ISDN Primary Rate Annex.

2. 3. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select PRI. Choose Channels and release the mouse button.
The Annex PRI Channels Status window appears.

4. Enter one or more channel numbers.
You can enter one number, a range of numbers separated by commas or dashes, or all.
17-19
Chapter 17
Part 4
5.
Select a Sort Option.
You can enter Channel or User.

6. Press
Apply
ISDN Primary Rate Annex status information appears in the Async

Information and Sync Information boxes.
Displaying PRI Internal CSU Status Information

The Annex PRI Internal CSU Status command provides T1 line information about the Annex T1 network interface. This section includes:
Displaying the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window Understanding the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window Viewing PRI Internal CSU Status Information
Displaying the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window

The PRI Internal CSU command originates in the Status menu. To display the window:

2. 3. 4. Select a single Annex that contains a CSU interface from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select PRI.
Choose Internal CSU and release the mouse button.
The Annex PRI Internal CSU Status window appears (see Figure 17-5).
17-20
Part 4
Chapter 17
The following example shows the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status window.
Figure 17-5. Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window
Understanding the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status Window

The Annex PRI Internal CSU Status window displays information in the PRI CSU Alarms, PRI CSU Status and Interval Information boxes. In addition, it includes the Interval(s) eld. You can enter information in this eld. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex conguration from this window.
17-21
Chapter 17
Part 4
Entering Interval Information Before you can display PRI Internal CSU statistics, you must complete the Interval(s) eld located below the Interval Errored Seconds box.
Entering Intervals
The T1 engine records 96 15-minute intervals.

1. Select an option from the menu next to Interval(s).
You can select:
Specied to view PRI Internal CSU statistics for one or more intervals. Current to see PRI Internal CSU statistics for the current
interval.
Total to display cumulative statistics for each of the 96
intervals.
If you select Specied, you must complete the text eld described in step 2. If you chose Current or Total, you can skip to step 3.
2. Enter one or more interval numbers in the text eld.
To enter specic intervals, separate interval numbers with commas or indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you might enter 1, 3, 8 to specify three intervals, or 1-3, 8 to specify intervals 1 through 3 and interval 8. In addition, you can enter all.
3. Press
Apply
PRI Internal CSU statistics appear (see Figure 17-5).
17-22
Part 4
Chapter 17
Understanding the Alarms Box

The PRI CSU Alarms box gives you historical and current information about PRI CSU alarms. This box includes the following elds:
Blue History indicates whether a Blue alarm has occurred since the T1 engine has been online. This eld displays True or False.
gives you the current status of the Blue alarm. If this eld displays On, the T1 line is receiving AIS (all ones, unframed) from the network.
Blue Red History
indicates whether a Red alarm has occurred since the T1 engine has been online. This eld displays True or False.
Red reports the current status of the Red alarm. If this eld displays On, the CSU is detecting loss of frame synchronization and is sending a Yellow alarm to the network. Yellow History indicates whether a Yellow alarm has occurred since the T1 engine has been online. This eld displays True or False. Yellow
indicates the current status of the Yellow alarm. If this eld displays On, the T1 line is receiving a yellow alarm from the network.
17-23
Chapter 17
Part 4
Understanding the Status Box The PRI CSU Status box displays statistics for the T1 network interface. This box includes the following categories:
Sync
indicates whether the T1 engine is detecting frame synchronization. If this eld displays False, the T1 engine has lost frame synchronization and has entered the red alarm state.
Signal Loss indicates whether the CSU is detecting pulses on the
T1 network interface receivers. If the engine is not detecting pulses, the T1 line transmits AIS (all ones, unframed) on the T1 network interface. This eld displays True when the engine is not detecting pulses and False when it is detecting pulses.
Loopback Mode
indicates loopback status. This eld can display:
NoLoop to show that the signal is not looped through the T1
engine.
LocalLoop to indicate that the T1 engines outoing signal is
looped back to the incoming side.

LineLoop
to show that the incoming signal is looped to the network without passing through the T1 engine.
PayloadLoop to show that the incoming signal is lopped through the T1 engine after it passes through the framing function.
Unit ID
identies the T1 engine, using its rmware number, rmware revision number, rmware release date, and EPROM check sum.
17-24
Part 4
Chapter 17
Understanding the Interval Errors Box The Interval Errors box provides T1 line statistics in the following categories:
Interval Number lists each 15 minute interval for which statistics appear in this box. This column displays a number from 1 to 96, Current, or Total. Out of Frame Errors
lists the number of Out of Frame (OOF) events that have occurred. An OOF event begins when the network interface sends two of four incorrect consecutive frame synchronizing bits, and ends when reframe occurs.
BiPolar Violations lists the number of BiPolar Violation (BPV) errors. For AMI-coded signals, a BPV event occurs when there are two consecutive pulses of the same polarity. For B8ZScoded signals, a BPV event occurs when there are two consecutive pulses of the same polarity that are not part of the zero substitution code. CRC Errors
lists the number of CRC errors.
Controlled Slip lists the number of times the T1 engine replicates
or deletes a DS1 frame.

Path Code Violations lists
the number of coding violations that occur on the remote side of a Layer 1 connection.
Line Code Violations lists the number of coding violations that occur on the local side. A Layer 1 connection does not need to be established.
17-25
Chapter 17
Part 4
Understanding the Interval Errored Seconds Box The Interval Errored Seconds box provides T1 line statistics in the following categories:
Interval Number lists each 15 minute interval for which statistics appear in this box. This column displays a number from 1 to 96, Current, or Total.
(Receive Network Alarms) lists the number of seconds with alarm events.
Rec. Net. Alarms
Error Seconds lists the number of seconds with one or more CRC
or OOF errors.
Sev. Err. Seconds
(Severe Error Seconds) lists the number of seconds with 320 or more CRC or OOF errors. lists the number of one-second intervals during which service was unavailable. seconds with one or more controlled slips.
Unavailable Seconds
Cntrl. Slip Seconds (Controlled Slip Seconds) lists the number of
Bursty Err. Seconds
(Bursty Error Seconds) lists the number of seconds with more than one, but less than 320 CRC errors.
Sev. Err. Framing Sec. (Severe Errored Framing Seconds) lists the number of seconds with 320 or more CRC or OOF errors with a fatal framing error. Line Err. Seconds (Line
Errored Seconds) lists the number of seconds with line code violations. This is independent of a Layer 1 connection having been established. the number of minutes (60 consecutive one minute intervals) with more than four total errors.
Degraded Minutes lists
17-26
Part 4
Chapter 17
Using Push Buttons

The Annex PRI Internal CSU Status window uses the following push buttons:

Apply
displays status information about the Annex you
selected.
Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of Cancel all boxes, or press to return to the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status window. Help
Status command.
displays a window explaining the PRI Internal CSU You can save information here.
Close removes the Annex PRI Internal CSU Status window from your display an returns you to the main window.
Viewing PRI Internal CSU Status Information

Using the Command
To display information about the PRI channels you entered:


2. 3. Hold the mouse button on the status menu, select PRI. Choose Internal CSU and release the mouse button.
The Annex PRI Internal CSU Status window appears.

4. Select an Interval(s) option.
You can select Specied, Current, or Total. If you select Current or Total, go to step 5.
17-27
Chapter 17
Part 4
5.
Enter the interval numbers you need in the Interval(s) eld.
6. Press
Apply
T1 engine status information appears in the PRI CSU Alarms, PRI CSU Status, and Interval Information boxes.
Displaying T1 Internal CSU Status Information

The Annex T1 Internal CSU command provides information about the Annex T1 network interface. This section includes:
Displaying the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window Understanding the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window Viewing T1 Internal CSU Status Information
Displaying the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window

The T1 Internal CSU command originates in the Status menu. To display the window:

2. 3. Select a single Annex that contains a T1 DS1 interface from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select T1.
17-28
Part 4
Chapter 17
4.
Choose Internal CSU and release the mouse button.
The Annex T1 Internal CSU Status window appears (see Figure 17-6).
The following example shows the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status window.
Figure 17-6. Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window
Understanding the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status Window

The Annex T1 Internal CSU Status window displays information in the T1 Alarms, T1 Status and Interval Information boxes. In addition, it includes the Interval(s) eld. You can enter information in this eld. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex conguration from this window.
17-29
Chapter 17
Part 4
Entering Interval Information Before you can display T1 Internal CSU statistics, you must complete the Interval(s) eld located below the Interval Information box.
Entering Intervals
The T1 engine records 96 15-minute intervals.

1. Select an option from the menu next to Interval(s).
You can select:
Specied Current
to view T1 statistics for one or more intervals.
to see T1 statistics for the current interval.
Total to display cumulative statistics for each of the 96 intervals.
If you select Specied, you must complete the text eld described in step 2. If you chose Current or Total, you can skip to step 3.
2. Enter one or more interval numbers in the text eld.
To enter specic intervals, separate interval numbers with commas or indicate a range of numbers using dashes. For example, you might enter 1, 3, 8 to specify three intervals, or 1-3, 8 to specify intervals 1 through 3 and interval 8. In addition, you can enter all.
3. Press
Apply
T1 Internal CSU statistics appear (see Figure 17-6).
17-30
Part 4
Chapter 17
Understanding the Alarms Box

The T1 Alarms box gives you historical and current information about T1 alarms. This box includes the following elds:
Blue History indicates whether a Blue alarm has occurred since the T1 Engine has been online. This eld displays True or False.
gives you the current status of the Blue alarm. If this eld displays On, the T1 engine is receiving AIS (all ones, unframed) from the network.
Blue Red History
indicates whether a Red alarm has occurred since the T1 Engine has been online. This eld displays True or False.
Red reports the current status of the Red alarm. If this eld displays On, the T1 engine is detecting loss of frame synchronization and is sending a Yellow alarm to the network. Yellow History indicates whether a Yellow alarm has occurred since the T1 Engine has been online. This eld displays True or False. Yellow
indicates the current status of the Yellow alarm. If this eld displays On, the T1 engine is receiving a yellow alarm from the network.
17-31
Chapter 17
Part 4
Understanding the T1 Status Box The T1 Status box displays statistics for the T1 network interface. This box includes the following categories:
Engine Bypass indicates whether the engine is connected to the Network Interface This eld displays enabled or disabled. If it displays disabled, the engine is connected to the Network Interface. Sync
indicates whether the T1 engine is detecting frame synchronization. If this eld displays False, the T1 engine has lost frame synchronization and has entered the red alarm state.
indicates whether the Drop and Insert Interface is receiving ones pulses and is in frame sync. This eld displays True or False to indicate the interface status.
DII Sync Signal Loss indicates whether the T1 engine is detecting pulses on the T1 network interface receivers. If the engine is not detecting pulses, the T1 engine transmits AIS (all ones, unframed) on the T1 network interface. This eld displays True when the engine is not detecting pulses and False when it is detecting pulses. Loopback Mode
indicates loopback status. This eld can display:
Noloop to show that the signal is not looped through the T1
engine. to indicate that the T1 engines outoing signal is looped back to the incoming side.
Localloop
to show that the incoming signal is looped to the network without passing through the T1 engine.
Lineloop Payloadloop
to show that the incoming signal is lopped through the T1 engine after it passes through the framing function.
17-32
Part 4
Chapter 17
Uptime indicates the amount of time in minutes that the T1 engine has been up. Unit ID
identies the T1 engine, using its rmware number, rmware revision number, rmware release date, and EPROM check sum. displays the engines number.
Serial Number Circuit ID
displays the engines circuit identication number.
Understanding the Interval Information Box The Interval Information box provides T1 engine statistics in the following categories:
Interval Number lists each 15 minute interval for which statistics appear in this box. This column displays a number from 1 to 96, Current, or Total. Out of Frame Errors
lists the number of Out of Frame (OOF) events that have occurred. An OOF event begins when the network interface sends two of four incorrect consecutive frame synchronizing bits, and ends when reframe occurs.
BiPolar Violations lists the number of BiPolar Violation (BPV) errors. For AMI-coded signals, a BPV event occurs when there are two consecutive pulses of the same polarity. For B8ZScoded signals, a BPV event occurs when there are two consecutive pulses of the same polarity that are not part of the zero substitution code. CRC Errors
lists the number of CRC errors.
Controlled Slip lists the number of times the T1 engine replicates
or deletes a DS1 frame.

Rec. Net. Alarms
(Receive Network Alarms) lists the number of seconds with alarm events.
17-33
Chapter 17
Part 4
Error Seconds list the number of seconds with one or more CRC or OOF errors. Sev. Err. Seconds
(Severe Error Seconds) lists the number of seconds with 320 or more CRC or OOF errors. lists the number of one-second intervals during which service was unavailable. seconds with one or more controlled slips.
Unavailable Seconds
Cntrl. Slip Seconds (Controlled Slip Seconds) lists the number of
Bursty Err. Seconds
(Bursty Error Seconds) lists the number of seconds with more than one, but less than 320 CRC errors.
Using Push Buttons

The Annex T1 Internal CSU Status window uses the following push buttons:

Apply
displays status information about the Annex you
selected.
Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of Cancel all boxes, or press to return to the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status window. Help
CSU
displays a window explaining the Annex T1 Internal command. You can save information here.
Close removes the Annex T1 Internal CSU Status window from your display and returns you to the main window.
17-34
Part 4
Chapter 17
Viewing T1 Internal CSU Status Information

Using the Command
To display information about the T1 interface you entered:


2. 3. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select T1. Choose Internal CSU and release the mouse button.
The Annex T1 Internal CSU Status window appears.

4. Select an Interval(s) option.
You can select Specied, Current, or Total. If you select Current or Total, go to step 5.
5. Enter the interval numbers you need in the Interval(s) eld.
6. Press
Apply
T1 engine status information appears in the T1 Alarms, T1 Status and Interval Information boxes.
Displaying T1 Modem Calls Status Information

The Annex T1 Modem Calls Status command provides information about all internal modems. This section includes:
Displaying the Annex Modem Calls Status Window Understanding the Annex Modem Calls Status Window Viewing T1 Internal Modem Calls Status Information
17-35
Chapter 17
Part 4
Displaying the Annex Modem Calls Status Window

The T1 Modem Calls command originates in the Status menu. To display the window:

2. 3. 4. Select a single Annex that contains a T1 DS1 interface from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select T1.
Choose Modem Calls and release the mouse button.
The Annex Modem Calls Status window appears (see Figure 17-7). The name of the Annex you selected appears in the windows title bar.
The following example shows the Annex Modem Calls Status window.
Figure 17-7. Annex Modem Calls Status Window
17-36
Part 4
Chapter 17
Understanding the Annex Modem Calls Status Window

The Annex Modem Calls Status window displays information in the Internal Modem Calls box. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex conguration from this window. Understanding the Internal Modem Calls Box The Internal Modem Calls box displays statistics for all internal modems. This box includes the following categories:

Modem # lists
each modem in the Annex.
Total Calls provides a count of the number of times the line is
seized on the modem.

Total Failures provides a count of the number of call failures for the modem. Ring Count provides a count of the number of times the
modem asserted rings on a call.

Offhook Count provides a count of the number of times the
modem went offhook on a call.

DCD Assert Count provides a count of the number of times the modem asserted DDC on a call. Consecutive Failures provides a count of the number of times the
modem failed to accept a call consecutively.
17-37
Chapter 17
Part 4
Using Push Buttons

The Annex Modem Calls Status window uses the following push buttons:
Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of Cancel all boxes, or press to return to the Annex T1 Modem Calls Status window. Help
Status command.
displays a window explaining the Annex Modem Calls You can save information here.
Close removes the Annex Modem Calls Status window from your display and returns you to the main window.
Viewing T1 Modem Calls Status Information

Using the Command
To display information about the T1 interface you entered:


2. Select T1 and Modem Calls.
The Annex Modem Calls Status window appears. The T1 Modem Calls information for the Annex you selected appears in the Internal Modem Calls box.
17-38
Part 4
Chapter 17
Displaying Dial VPN Services (DVS) Status Information

The Annex Dial VPN (Virtual Private Network) Services (DVS) Status command provides information for all active tunnel interfaces. This section includes:
Displaying the Annex DVS Status Window Understanding the Annex DVS Status Window Viewing Annex Dial VPN Services (DVS) Status Information
Displaying the Annex DVS Status Window

The DVS command originates in the Status menu. To display the window:

2. 3. Select a single Annex that contains a tunnel from the list. Hold the mouse button on the Status menu, select DVS.
The Annex DVS Status window appears (see Figure 17-8).
17-39
Chapter 17
Part 4
The following example shows the Annex DVS Status window.
Figure 17-8. Annex DVS Status Window
Understanding the Annex DVS Status Window

The Annex DVS Status window displays information in the GRE Information and the Tunnel Information boxes. Like all Annex status commands, you cannot change an Annex conguration from this window.
Understanding the GRE Information Box

The GRE Information box provides statistics for GRE packets. This box displays information in the Received and Transmitted elds and the Dropped Packets Info box. The Received and Transmitted elds provide the following information:
17-40
Part 4
Chapter 17
Bytes Received indicates provides a count of the number of bytes
received on the interface.

Bytes Transmitted provides
a count of the number of bytes sent a count of the number of GRE a count of the number of GRE
on the interface.
Packets Received provides
packets received.
Packets Transmitted provides
packets sent.
Packets Dropped Received provides a count of the number of GRE packets dropped on transmit. Packets Dropped Transmitted provides a count of the number of GRE packets dropped on transmit.
The Dropped Packets Info box provides information in the Bad Checksum eld.
Bad Checksum
provides a count of the number of GRE packets received with bad checksums.
Understanding the Tunnel Information Box

The Tunnel Information box displays data about all active tunnels. This box includes the following categories:

Device Type lists
the interface device to which the tunnel the protocol used on the connection. Values are registered,
terminates.
Interface Protocol list
State lists the state of the tunnel. established, or deregistered. Login Time lists Home Addr lists
the time the user logged in.
the address assigned to the remote node. This Home Addr category is protocol specic. the IP address of the Home Agent (HA).
Home Agent Addr lists
17-41
Chapter 17
Part 4
WAN Type lists the type of WAN interface from the HA to the home network.
.WAN Addr lists the address of the home network from the HA (displayed ad hex).
Using Push Buttons

The Annex DVS Status window uses the following push buttons:
Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of Cancel all boxes, or press to return to the Annex DVS Status window.
displays a window explaining the Annex DVS command. You can save information here.
Help Close removes the Annex DVS Status window from your display and returns you to the main window.
Viewing Dial VPN Services (DVS) Status Information

Using the Command
To display information about the tunnels you entered:


2. Hold the mouse button on the status menu, select DVS.
The Annex DVS Status window appears. The Dial VPN Services information appears in the GRE Information and Tunnel Information boxes. If the Annex you selected contains no tunnels, a warning message displays: No Tunnels have been found.
17-42
Part 4
Chapter 17
Identifying Annexes
Two Discover Annexes commands automatically identify Annexes and other network devices.
The Discover Annexes/Network command uses a specic internet address and subnet mask to nd available Annexes on any network. The Discover Annexes/Search Device identies Annexes on your network that are visible to a specic search device.

Using the Discover Annexes/Network Window Using the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window Updating and Saving Discover Annexes Lists
The Discover Annexes/Network command can nd Annexes running Annex software Release 13.2 and subsequent releases. To nd Annexes running software releases prior to 13.2, use the Discover Annexes/Search Device command.
Using the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window

Discover Annexes/Search Device identies Annexes on your network that are
visible to a specic search device. A search device is any network device (such as a router) that knows about the existence of other network devices via their IP addresses. Discover Annexes/Search Device lists basic information about Annexes and allows you to update an Annex list or save a list to a le.
17-43
Chapter 17
Part 4
Displaying the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window

The Discover Annexes/Search Device window appears in the Congure menu. To display the window:
Move the pointer to the Congure menu and choose Discover
Annexes, followed by Search Device.
The Discover Annexes/Search Device window appears (see Figure 17-9).
The following example shows the Discover Annexes/Search Device window.
Figure 17-9. Discover Annexes/Search Device Window
17-44
Part 4
Chapter 17
Understanding the Discover Annexes/Search Device Window

Discover Annexes/Search Device
uses text elds to control the discovery process, and an output box to display information about Annexes and other devices. The windows push buttons allow you to update your current Annex list or save the contents of the output box to a le.
Discover Annexes/Search Device may not nd every Annex on a
network because the discovery process can identify only those network devices that are visible to a specic search device at the current time. Using Text Fields
This commands text elds control the identication process. You can complete the following elds:
Search Device
accepts the name or IP address of any network device that stores information about nodes, devices and addresses on your network. You can use a device name or IP address here. Discover Annexes/Search Device uses Annex Managers default community string to communicate with the search device and with each device it queries.
SNMP Timeout species the length of time in seconds that Annex Manager waits for a response. You can enter a number of seconds here. If you do not enter a value here, Discover Annexes/ Search Device uses the SNMP default. SNMP Retries controls the number of times that Annex Manager
tries to reach an Annex or other device on the network. You can enter a number here. If you do not enter a value here, the discovery process uses the SNMP default.
When you complete these elds, you can choose discovery process.
Apply
to initiate the
17-45
Chapter 17
Part 4
Controlling Output
The windows Verbose Output button allows you to determine the level of detail that appears in the output box. If you click on the Verbose Output button,
Discover Annexes/Search Device prints a device name and displays basic information about the device type or identies it as NOT REACHABLE. If you do not select the Verbose Output button, the @ sign identies all devices that are not Annexes or are unreachable Annexes.
Understanding the Discovery Output Box The Discovery Output box contains detailed information about the Annexes identied by the search device. Annex Manager goes to a search device, requests a list of addresses in its Address Translation table, and attempts to communicate with each address via SNMP. If communication is successful, Annex Manager compares the devices object identier to the value of an Annex object identier. If there is a match, the device is an Annex. If there is no match, the output box displays information about the device based on your use of the Verbose Output command. The output box displays:
The Discovering Annexes, please wait ... message, informing you that the process has begun. The Number of devices to query: message, followed by a dynamically updated number. This number can help you determine how long the discovery process will take. Basic information about each Annex, including the Annexs name or IP address, and system descriptor information, which can contain the Annex type and software release, the number of ports for each port type, and the Annexs current image name.
17-46
Part 4
Chapter 17
Information about devices that are not Annexes. If you use the Verbose Output option from the Utilities menu, Discover Annexes/ Search Device lists the names of all devices that are not Annexes, and prints a brief description or identies devices as NOT REACHABLE. If you enter a short SNMP Timeout, Discover Annexes/ Search Device may identify a device as NOT REACHABLE because of network load.
The *** End of discovery *** message, informing you that the process is complete.
Using Push Buttons

Discover Annexes/Search Device
Apply Update List
activates the Discover Annexes/Search Device command.
replaces the Annex list displayed in the main window with the Annexes displayed in the Discovery Output box. When you use this button, Annex Manager connects each Annex again, in case there has been a change in status. saves the Annexes displayed in the Discovery Output box to a le. When you use this button, the standard File selection window displays, allowing you to enter a path and le name.
Save List
stores the values you entered in SNMP Timeout and SNMP Retries with each Annex name. In addition, it stores Annex Managers default community string. If you want to save a list and then change these values, use the SNMP Information command (see Chapter 4).
Save List
Save Output displays the standard File Selection window, which includes the default text directory. You can enter a le name in OK the Selection eld and press to store the contents of Cancel both boxes, or press to return to the Discover Annexes/Search Device window.
17-47
Chapter 17
Part 4
Help
Annexes/Search Device
displays a separate window that explains the Discover command.
Close removes the Discover Annexes/Search Device window from your display.
Discovering Annexes using a Search Device

Using the Discover Annexes/Search Device Command
you replace the main windows Annex list with the discovery list and allows you to save the discovery list in a le. To update and save a list:
1. Move the pointer to the Congure menu, choose Discover Annexes, and then choose Search Device.
Discover Annexes/Search Device lets
The Discover Annexes/Search Device window appears.

2. 3. Enter a search device name or its IP address in the Search Device eld. Enter a number of seconds in the SNMP Timeout eld.
If you do not complete this eld, the process uses the current SNMP default.
4. Enter a number in the SNMP Retries eld.
If you do not complete this eld, the process uses the current SNMP default.
5. Select the level of detail you need using the Verbose Output button.
If you select Verbose Output, information about all devices appears. If you do not select this button, the window includes information about Annexes and the @ symbol for other devices.
6. Choose
Apply
Annexes and other devices appear in the Discovery Output box.
17-48
Part 4
Chapter 17
Updating and Saving Discover Annexes Lists

The Discover Annexes/Search Device commands lets you replace the main windows Annex list with the discovery list and allows you to save the discovery list in a le.
Updating and Saving Lists
To update and save list:

1. 2. Use Discover Annexes/Search Device. Choose
Update List
Annex Manager replaces the main windows list with the discovery list and connects each Annex again, in case there has been a change in status.
3. Choose
Save List
The Annex List Selection window displays.
Figure 17-10. Annex LIst File Selection Window
17-49
Chapter 17
Part 4
The Annex List Selection window displays the default list directory. It allows you to:
Select a list that will overwrite an existing list. You cannot overwrite a list that someone else created. Create a new list by entering a new path and list name and OK choosing .
When you complete this window, Annex manager saves the list. For more detailed information about Annex Managers standard File Selection window, see Chapter 3.
Using the Discover Annexes/Network Command

The Discover Annexes/Network command nds available Annexes on a any network and adds them to the main windows Annex List box. Displaying the Window To display the Discover Annexes/Network window, move the pointer to the Congure menu and choose Discover Annexes and Network.
Move the pointer to the Congure menu and choose Discover
Annexes, followed by Network.
The Discover Annexes/Network window appears (see Figure 17-11).
17-50
Part 4
Chapter 17
WARNING
Figure 17-11. Discover Annexes/Network Window
Understanding the Window

Discover Annexes/Network
uses three elds to nd Annexes on a network:
accepts an IP address for the network on which Annex Manager will nd available Annexes.
Internet Address Subnet Mask
denes the network portion of the IP address.
Timeout denes the length of time in seconds that Annex Manager waits for a response.
This window includes three push buttons:

OK Cancel Help
activates the discovery process. removes this window from your display. displays a separate window that explains the Discover command and its elds.
Annexes/Network
17-51
Chapter 17
Part 4
Finding Annexes on a Network To nd available Annexes on a network:

1. Select Discover Annexes from the Congure menu and then choose Network.
The commands window appears (see Figure 17-11).

2. Enter an Internet Address and a Subnet Mask for the network you want to search.
You must complete both the Internet Address and the Subnet Mask elds.
3. Enter a number of seconds in the Timeout eld.
This eld automatically displays 10 seconds. It uses a 10 second default if you leave the eld blank.
4. Press
OK
Annex Manager displays the window informing you that the discovery process is taking place.
Figure 17-12. Discover Annexes/Network Process Window
17-52
Part 4
Chapter 17
As Figure 17-12 shows, this window lists the Internet Address, Subnet Mask and Timeout value you entered, as well as the broadcast address. When Annex Manager completes this process it displays a window informing you about the number of Annexes that have been found.
Figure 17-13. Creating Annex List Window
Annex Manager adds the Annexes it nds to the main windows Annex List box. If this process found Annexes that exist in the main windows list, a warning window lists duplicate Annexes and does not add them to the list. You can use the Save Annex List command to retain this list.
17-53
Chapter 17
Part 4
17-54
Chapter 18 Annex Manager and SNMP
his chapter contains a description of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) protocol and Annex Manager. It includes:
SNMP Protocol Overview Setting up the Annex for SNMP Standard MIB Support
SNMP Protocol Overview

SNMP is a heavily used management protocol. It operates over the User Datagram Protocol (UDP), which is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite.
Annex Manager provides the user interface that enables Network Managers to access Annexes and their information. Annex Manager uses:
The SNMP protocol to send queries to the agents located in each Annex. Agents located on the Annexes. Each agent collects information about its Annex and provides that information to the Network Management Station running Annex Manager. Management Information Bases (MIBs) located on the SNMP Network Management Station. MIBs describe the information that comes from the agents.
18-1
Chapter 18
Annex Manager and SNMP
Part 4
Figure 18-1 shows how Annex Manager and SNMP can be used on a network.
Annexes with Agents
Ethernet
SNMP Network Management Station running Annex Manager
Figure 18-1. Network Conguration
SNMP Management Stations

Annex Manager runs on an SNMP Network Management Station, a dedicated or shared network device that is the client in the client-server model. The management station can run an application specically written for the Annex and its MIBs (e.g., Annex Manager), or a generic application that communicates with other non-Bay Networks devices (e.g. SunNet Manager, HP/OpenView, NetView for AIX). The generic application must include the denitions of the MIBs supported by the Annex. Through Annex Manager, the management station sends the get, get-next, and set commands to the Annexs SNMP agent to retrieve or modify information.
18-2
Part 4
Chapter 18
SNMP Agents
Annex software includes a process known as the SNMP agent. The agent process acts as a server in a typical client-server model:
Annex Manager directs get, set, and get-next commands to the agent. The agent processes the command and returns a response indicating the commands success or failure and returning the requested data for the get and get-next commands.
Message Delivery
SNMP messages are encapsulated in UDP datagrams. The UDP layer does not guarantee delivery. When Annex Manager transmits a get, set, or get-next command, the agent is expected to respond with an error message or with the requested data. Annex Manager uses a timeout and retry mechanism to guarantee the SNMP commands delivery. If a timeout occurs, Annex Manager does not know whether the command was not received by the agent, or whether the response from the agent was lost. The agent can also generate an unsolicited trap command and send it to one or more network addresses. Receivers of traps do not respond to the SNMP agent. For detailed information, please refer to Trap Hosts and Traps later in this chapter.
The Annex supports only the cold-start, link-up, and link-down traps dened in MIB-II.
18-3
Chapter 18
Part 4
Setting up the Annex for SNMP

Before Annex Manager (or any other SNMP network management application) can monitor or manage the Annex, you must dene certain conguration data, including the SNMP Community String and the disabled_modules and allow_snmp_sets parameters.
Dening the Community String

Each SNMP message contains a Community String in its header. The receiving SNMP agent attempts to match the messages string with an existing Community String list. If there is no match, the SNMP agent discards the message without responding to the sender. Annex Manager uses one of the Community Strings dened in the Annex conguration le. This le, which is downloaded during Annex initialization, denes up to four Community Strings. If the le does not contain community strings, public is used as a default. There is no notion of read-only or read-write communities. For detailed information about the SNMP Community String syntax, please refer to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX.
Dening Parameters
You must dene the disabled_modules and allow_snmp_sets parameters on the Annex before you can use Annex Manager.
18-4
Part 4
Chapter 18
Dening the disabled_modules Parameter The Annexs disabled_modules parameter allows you to turn off certain features during Annex software initialization (e.g., you can enter LAT, PPP, SLIP to turn these features off. You can use the na or admin tools to verify and change disabled_modules. If you disabled SNMP, the Annex will discard all SNMP messages sent to it and Annex Manager will not be able to retrieve any information using SNMP. By default, the SNMP agent on the Annex is enabled. Dening the allow_snmp_sets Parameter The Annexs default setting for the allow_snmp_sets parameter does not permit parameter value changes because the set commands header transmits the community string in clear text, which may be a security risk. To allow Annex Manager to modify parameters through SNMP, you must use the na or admin tools to change allow_snmp_sets to yes. You cannot set this parameter using SNMP.
Standard MIB Support

The Annex supports the following standard MIBs:
MIB-II (dened in RFC1213). Character MIBs (dened in RFCs 1316, (Character MIB), 1317 (RS232-like MIB), and 1318 (Parallel Printer MIB)). Ethernet MIB (dened in RFC 1398). RIPv2 MIB (dened in RFC 1389). AppleTalk MIB (dened in RFC 1243).
Some standard MIB objects are not valid or meaningful for the Annex. For detailed information, see Annex Restrictions on Standard MIBs on page 18-8.
18-5
Chapter 18
Part 4
Most Annex parameters do not map to standard MIB objects. Instead, they map to MIB objects in a proprietary (or private enterprise) MIB specic to the Annex. The private MIB also contains objects that provide status and statistics information to the network manager. This section explains the relationship between Annex Manager and standard MIBs, listing the exceptions and restrictions placed on standard MIBs by the Annex SNMP agent. This section includes:
MIB Object Hierarchy Describing and Naming Objects Trap Hosts and Traps Annex Restrictions on Standard MIBs
MIB Object Hierarchy

MIBs dene the hierarchy of managed objects. MIB objects represent data that the Annex can retrieve or conguration information that it can modify. Annex Manager manages Annexes by retrieving or changing the value of MIB objects. Some MIB objects represent actions that the Annex will perform when Annex Manager sets certain values in those objects (e.g., when an Annex boots or resets).
Describing and Naming Objects

RFC 1155 (Structure and Identication of Management Information for TCP/IP-based internets) describes the layout and encoding of exchanged data objects.
18-6
Part 4
Chapter 18
The SMI (Structure of Management Information) uses the ISO standard ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One) to dene a method for describing a hierarchical name space for managed information. Each object has:
A name (also referred to as an Object Identier (OID)). A syntax and an encoding. In addition to the basic integer and octet string data types, several special types are dened (e.g, IP Address, Network Address, Counter, Gauge, TimeTicks). RFC 1212 (Concise MIB Denitions) is an easier-to-read form used in most standard MIBs today. It is used to dene the Annex private enterprise MIB.
Trap Hosts and Traps

The Annex employs two methods to dene the host addresses it uses when generating SNMP trap messages.
The rst method denes up to ten static trap receivers in the conguration le using the snmp trap host syntax. For detailed information about the SNMP trap host syntax, please see the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX. The second method loads the trap hosts (if any) from the conguration le into the Trap Host Table (i.e., the anxTrapHostTable object in the proprietary MIB). You can then modify this table by adding or deleting trap hosts. However, the changes you make directly through the table will be lost when the Annex reboots. If you need to make permanent changes, you must use the Annex conguration le.
Annex Manager Release 2.3 does not support access to the Trap Host Table. You cannot display or change this table through Annex Manager.
18-7
Chapter 18
Part 4
Annex Restrictions on Standard MIBs

The Annex SNMP Agent does not use all objects in the supported standard MIBs.
This section lists the supported standard MIBs and outlines the differences between the Annex parameters and specic standard MIB objects.
Table 18-1. Supported Standard MIBs
MIB Name MIB-II Character MIB RS-232 MIB Parallel Printer MIB AppleTalk MIB RIP version 2 MIB Ethernet MIB DS1 MIB
RFC Number RFC 1213 RFC 1316 RFC 1317 RFC 1318 RFC 1243 RFC 1389 RFC 1398 RFC 1406
18-8
Part 4
Chapter 18
RFC 1213 MIB-II Restrictions The Annex supports RFC1213s system, interfaces, at, ip, icmp, tcp, udp, and snmp groups. It does not support the egp group. In addition, some individual objects have the restrictions outlined in Table 18-2.
Table 18-2. RFC 1213 MIB-II Objects
Object Name ifAdminStatus ifOperStatus atEntry ipRouteEntry ipRouteProto ipRouteType
Get/Set Restrictions read only none Cannot create new rows Cannot create new rows none none
Read Object Limitations Returns only up (1) and

down (2)
Returns only up (1) and

down (2)
none none Returns only local (2), icmp (4), and rip (8) Returns only invalid (2), direct (3), indirect (4) none Returns only dynamic(3) and static(4)
ipNetToMediaEntry ipNetToMediaType
Cannot create new rows Writes only invalid (2), dynamic (3), and static (4)
18-9
Chapter 18
Part 4
RFC 1398 Ethernet MIB Restrictions The Annex supports RFC 1398s dot3StatsTable and dot3CollTable with the restrictions outlined in Table 18-3.
Table 18-3. RFC 1398 Ethernet MIB Objects
Object Name dot3StatsSQETestErrors dot3StatsInternalMac ReceiveErrors
Restrictions Not supported Not supported
Read Object Limitations None None
RFC 1316 Character MIB Restrictions The Annex supports the char group with the restrictions outlined in Table 18-4.
Table 18-4. RFC 1316 Character MIB Objects
Object Name charPortAdminStatus
Restrictions Read only
Read Object Limitations Returns only enabled (1), disabled (2), and off (3) Returns only up (1), down (2), active (5) None
charPortOperStatus charPortInFlowType
None Supports only none (1), xonXoff (2), and hardware (3)
(continued on next page)
18-10
Part 4
Chapter 18
Table 18-4. RFC 1316 Character MIB Objects (continued)
Object Name charPortOutFlowType
Restrictions Supports only none (1), xonXoff (2), and

hardware (3)
Read Object Limitations None
charPortAdminOrigin charPortName charPortSessionMaximum charSessKill charSessState charSessConnectionId charPort objects for virtual ports
Read only Read only Maximum value is

16
None None None None Returns only

connected (2)
Read only None None Read only, readwrite objects apply only to physical ports
Returns only null None
18-11
Chapter 18
Part 4
RFC 1317 RS-232 MIB Restrictions The Annex supports this MIB with the restrictions described in Table 18-5.
Table 18-5. RFC 1317 RS-232 MIB Objects
Object Name rs232PortInSpeed rs232PortOutSpeed
Restrictions Setting one sets both. Can set only to a supported value. See Setting Port Speed below.
none (1), mark (4), or space (5) all map to none (1) dynamic (4) maps to one (1)
Read Object Limitations None
rs232AsyncPortParity
Returns only none (1), odd (2), or

even (3)
rs232AsyncPortStopBits
Returns only one (1), two (2), or one-and-half (3) Returns internal (1) or external (2) None None
rs232SyncPortClockSource rs232SyncPortInterrupted Frames rs232SyncPortAborted Frames
Accepts external (2) only Not supported Not supported.
18-12
Part 4
Chapter 18
Setting Port Speed The rs232PortInSpeed, rs232PortOutSpeed, and rs232AsyncPortAutobaud are related for the Annexs asynchronous ports.
To set the port to autobaud, you must rst set rs232AsyncPortAutobaud to enabled (1) and then set either rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed to zero. Setting the port speed to zero when rs232AsyncPortAutobaud is disabled results in a bad value error. To disable autobaud, you must rst set the port speed to a nonzero value, and then set rs232AsyncPortAutobaud to disabled(2). This ensures that the port is not left in a state without a declared speed.
For example, you can set a port to 9600/autobaud by setting 9600 in rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed and then setting rs232AsyncPortAutobaud to enabled(1). RFC 1318 Parallel Printer MIB Restrictions The Annex supports paraNumber, paraPortTable and paraInSigTable. It does not support paraOutSigTable.
18-13
Chapter 18
Part 4
RFC 1389 RIPv2 MIB Restrictions The Annex supports rip2GlobalGroup, rip2IfStatTable, and rip2IfConfTable. It does not support rip2PeerTable. Table 18-6 describes additional restrictions.
Table 18-6. RFC 1389 RIPv2 MIB Objects
Object Name rip2IfStatStatus rip2IfConfDomain RipIfConfAuthKey ripIfConfStatus
Restrictions Read only Not supported Not supported Read only
Read Object Limitations None None None None
18-14
Part 4
Chapter 18
RFC 1243 AppleTalk MIB Restrictions The Annex does not support the llap, rtmp, kip, zip, and nbp groups. It supports the aarp, atport, ddp, and atecho groups with the following restrictions.
Table 18-7. RFC 1243 AppleTalk
Object Name atportType atportNetStart atportNetEnd atportNetAddress atportStatus atportZone atportIfIndex ddpOutRequests ddpInLocalDatagrams ddpNoProtocolHandlers ddpBroadcastErrors ddpShortDDPErrors ddpHopCountErrors
Restrictions Read only Not supported Not supported Not supported Read only Read only Read only Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
Read Object Limitations None None None None None None None None None None None None None
18-15
Chapter 18
Part 4
RFC 1406 DS1 MIB Restrictions The Annex supports this MIB with the following restrictions.
Table 18-8. RFC 1406 DS1 MIB Objects
Object Name dsx1LineType dsx1Line Coding
Restrictions Supports only dsx1esf (2) and dsx1D4 (3) Supports only dsx1B8zs (2) and
dsx1AMI (5)
Read Object Limitations Returns esf or d4 Returns b8zs or ami
dsx1SendCode dsx1Circuit Identier dsx1SignalMode dsx1Fdl
Not supported 128 character limit Read only Supports only

dsx1Ansi-T1-403 (2) and dsx1Att-54016 (4)
None None RobbedBit only Returns ansi or att
dsx1CurrentSEFSs dsx1Current PCVs dsx1CurrentLESs dsx1CurrentDMs dsx1CurrentLCVs dsx1IntervalSEFSs

(continued on next page)
Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
None None None None None None
18-16
Part 4
Chapter 18
Table 18-8. RFC 1406 DS1 MIB Objects (continued)
Object Name dsx1IntervalPCVs dsx1IntervalLESs dsx1IntervalDMs dsx1IntervalLCVs dsx1TotalSEFs dsx1TotalPCVs dsx1TotalLESs dsx1TotalDMs dsx1TotalLCVs dsx1FarEndCurrentTable dsx1FarEndIntervalTable dsx1FarEndTotalTable dsx1FracTable
Restrictions Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
Read Object Limitations None None None None None None None None None None None None None
18-17
Chapter 18
Part 4
18-18
Chapter 19 Annex Parameters
his section lists all Annex parameters eligible for conguration using Annex Manager. Parameters appear in alphabetical order. For each parameter, you can nd:
A brief description of the parameters function. An explanation of dependencies, if they occur, among parameters. References to additional information in other Annex documentation. A list containing the parameters type, allowable values, default value, and the Annex Manager lists in which the parameter appears. Each parameter description includes an Annex Manager default value. If you use the Site Parameters command to change default values in help messages, the values listed in this section will not agree with your help messages. Remember that Site Parameters changes help text only: if you do not enter a parameter value, the Annex continues to use the default values listed here.
19-1
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
Reference Information
a_router
denes the Ethernet address that the Annex attempts to use as the AppleTalk router address. If the router does not respond, the Annex listens for an RTMP packet and uses the address in the packet as the new router address. You can enter 0 to direct the Annex to nd the router.
Type Values Default Lists
Annex 0 to 253 00-00-00-00-00-00 Annex Only, AppleTalk
acp_key
denes the encryption key used to exchange messages between the Annex and the security server. You can use this parameter only when the enable_security parameter is set to enabled and a security server is dened. The security server maintains the encryption key for each Annex in the acp_keys le. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays only set or unset for this parameters values. The Annex and the security server can communicate only when this parameters value is the same as the Annexs value in the security servers acp_keys le.
Annex 16 characters unset Annex Only, Security
alarmsyslog
allows the Annex to generate a syslog at the warning level when it detects any alarm event. To use this feature you must enable syslogging on an Annex using the syslog_facility, syslog_host, and syslog_mask parameters.
T1 DS1 enabled or disabled enabled T1_DS1
allow_broadcast
permits an asynchronous port to receive administrative broadcast messages generated by the Boot and Broadcast commands.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Basic Async Port
19-2
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
allow_compression
allows an Annex to use TCP/IP header compression for SLIP or PPP modes. Header compression occurs only when the other side of the serial link initiates compression.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, PPP, SLIP
arap_v42bis
allows V.42bis compression during an AppleTalk session.

Async enabled or disabled enabled Async Port, AppleTalk
at_guest
allows guests to log into an AppleTalk session. If you choose enabled and a client requests guest access, the Annex asks ACP for username guest privileges.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, AppleTalk
at_nodeid
species the Appletalk hint used by the Annex on a specic port. You can enter an ID in decimal or hexadecimal notation. Each ID has two parts separated by a dot:
For example, 191.253, 0x00BF.253 and 191.0xFD designate the same address.
Async, AppleTalk 0 to 65534.255 0.0 Async Port
19-3
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
at_security
turns on ACP service for an AppleTalk session. When you choose enabled for this parameter and for enable_security, the Annex uses ACP to get security information about the client, including authentication, logging, and zone access information. If you choose disabled, the Annex uses only local security.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, AppleTalk
attn_string
denes a control character sequence that returns users to the CLI prompt. Users can dene a temporary control character sequence using the CLI stty attn command.
Type Value Default Lists
Async Ctrl + any character, up to 16 characters (null string) or Ctrl + A (for vcli connections) Async Port, Command LIne Editing, Modem, Modem Internal
authoritative_agent
allows an Annex to send an ICMP Address Mask reply to a host that broadcasts a subnet mask request.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Basic Annex
authorized_groups
specifies the LAT protocol remote group codes that are accessible to users on an Annex port. You can enter all, none, a series of numbers separated by commas (e.g., 1, 5, 7) or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g., 1, 5, 200-255).
Async all, none, numbers between 0 and 255 none Async Port, LAT
19-4
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
autobaud
controls whether line speed is determined automatically when a connection is opened. If you choose enabled, the modem or terminal connecting to an Annex determines speed automatically. In this case the Annex sets the speed by
analyzing the data pattern generated when you press Return . If it cannot determine the speed within two minutes, the connection attempt fails.
If you want to disable the autobaud feature, you must enter a value in the speed parameter before you choose disabled here.
backward_key
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Basic Async
denes the character sequence that opens the next lower-numbered session established at a port. We recommend that you use a sequence with Ctrl + a character. The key displays as ^. If you use more than one letter or number, Annex Manager separates characters with a slash (/). For example, Ctrl + a + b, displays as â/b.
Async 0 to 16 characters (null string) Async Port, vci interface
banner
controls whether the Annex banner and message-of-the-day are displayed on CLI ports.
Async enabled or disabled enabled Async Port, Basic Async Port
19-5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
bidirectional_modem
allows you to transmit and receive data after connecting to an asynchronous port. When you choose disabled, you can connect to the port, but communication cannot occur until the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) modem signal is active. This parameter is obsolete in Release 10.1.A and in subsequent releases.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Flow Control, Modem
broadcast_addr
species the IP address for Annex broadcasts (network.255 or network.0).

Annex IP Address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Basic Annex
broadcast_direction
controls the direction in which an Annex sends an administrative broadcast message. When you choose network, the Annex sends a message from the connections network side. If you choose port, it sends a message from the port side. You can use this parameter only when the mode parameter is set to slave.
Async port or network port Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem
bypass
removes the T1 engine from the network. You should enter enabled when you rst install an Annex or when the T1 engine is not functioning properly.
T1 DS1 enabled or disabled disabled T1_DS1
19-6
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_allow_ broadcast
permits an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to send administrative broadcast messages generated by the Boot and Broadcast commands.
Annex
enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults
CallDef_allow_ compression
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to use TCP/IP header compression for SLIP or PPP modes. Header compression occurs only when the other side of the serial link initiates compression.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Basic Async Port, PPP, SLIP, Call Defaults
CallDef_arap_v42bis
allows V.42bis compression during an AppleTalk session that was initiated through a call to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Basic Async Port, AppleTalk, Call Defaults
CallDef_at_guest
allows guests to log into an AppleTalk session through a call to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. If you choose enabled and a client requests guest access, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex asks ACP for username guest privileges.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, AppleTalk,Call Defaults
19-7
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_at_nodeid
species the Appletalk hint used by an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. You can enter an ID in decimal or hexadecimal notation. Each ID has two parts separated by a dot:
For example, 191.253, 0x00BF.253 and 191.0xFD designate the same address.
CallDef_at_security
Annex 0 to 65534.255 0.0 Annex Only, AppleTalk, Call Defaults
turns on ACP service for an AppleTalk session. When you choose enabled for this parameter and for enable_security, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex uses ACP to get security information about the client, including authentication, logging, and zone access information. If you choose disabled, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex uses only local security.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, AppleTalk, Call Defaults
CallDef_attn_string
denes a control character sequence that returns users to the CLI prompt. Users can dene a temporary control character sequence using the CLI stty attn command.
Annex Ctrl + any character, up to 16 characters (null string) or Ctrl + A (for vcli connections) Annex Only, Cmd LIne Editing, Modem, Modem Internal, Call Defaults
19-8
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_authorized_ groups
specifies the LAT protocol remote group codes that are accessible to users on an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. You can enter all, none, a series of numbers separated by commas (e.g., 1, 5, 7) or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g., 1, 5, 200-255).
Annex all, none, numbers between 0 and 255 none Annex Only, LAT, Call Defaults
CallDef_backward_key
denes the character sequence that opens the next lower-numbered session established through a call to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. Xylogics recommends that you use a sequence with Ctrl + a character. The key displays as ^. If you use more than one letter or number, Annex Manager separates characters with a slash (/). For example, Ctrl + a + b, displays as â/b.
Annex 0 to 16 characters (null string) Annex Only, VCI Interface, Call Defaults
CallDef_banner
controls whether the ISDN Primary Rate Annex banner and message-of-theday are displayed on CLI connections.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults
CallDef_broadcast_ direction
controls the direction in which an ISDN Primary Rate Annex sends an administrative broadcast message. When you choose network, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex sends a message from the connections network side. If you choose port, it sends a message from the port side. You can use this parameter only when the CallDef_mode parameter is set to slave.
Annex port or network port Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem, Call Defaults
19-9
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_char_erase
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex using CLI to display the character erase for a video terminal. When you choose enabled, a deleted character looks as if it has been erased. If you choose disabled, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex echoes the erase characters for a hard-copy terminal. It displays a backslash (\), one or more deleted characters, and a slash (/). For example, typing asdf Delete Delete g displays as asdf\fd/g.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults
CallDef_cli_imask7
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to mask CLI input to seven bits. If you choose disabled, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex expects eight-bit ASCII input. You should not choose enabled unless the terminal can transmit only seven-bit characters.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults, Modem, Modem Internal
CallDef_cli_inactivity
species the number of minutes the ISDN Primary Rate Annex will remain idle before disconnecting a CLI session. Entering 0 disables the timer; entering 255 causes the ISDN Primary Rate Annex to disconnect as soon as it exits from its last job. Unlike CallDef_inactivity_timer, this timer does not disconnect a CLI session with active jobs.
Annex 0 to 255 minutes 0 minutes Annex Only, Call Defaults, Idle Time, Modem, Modem Internal
19-10
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_cli_interface
allows you to control the prompt that appears for VMS or UNIX environments. If you enter uci, this parameter provides a standard UNIX interface, with prompts dened by the CallDef_prompt parameter. If you enter vci, the standard VMS interface includes the Local> prompt followed by the Username> prompt.
Annex vci or uci uci Annex Only, Call Defaults
CallDef_cli_security
enables user authentication by the host-based ACP server for all CLI connections. If you choose disabled, you cannot use any ISDN Primary Rate Annex security mechanism other than the administrative password for CLI connections.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Security
CallDef_connect_ security
activates the host-based security policy for access from CLI to the network. If you choose enabled, the user must be authorized via the host-based ACP security server to connect to a network host. The security policy in the security server scans the /etc/acp_restrict le to authorize a connection to a host from the ISDN Primary Rate Annex.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Modem, Modem Internal, Security
CallDef_dedicated_ arguments
denes the command line arguments used for dedicated connections. This parameter works when CallDef_mode is set to connect, rlogin, telnet, or tn3270.
Annex 1 to 100 characters (null string) Annex Only, Call Defaults,Dedicated Port
19-11
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_def_session_ mode
denes the default session mode when the DECServer command interface is congured (i.e., when CallDef_cli_interface is set to vci). For more information, please refer to the Annex Interface for VMS Environments Administrators Guide.
Annex interactive, passthru, passall, transparent interactive Annex Only, Call Defaults
CallDef_dialup_ addresses_origin
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to search the acp_dialup le for the remote clients user name and to set local and remote addresses. This parameter applies only when the CallDef_mode parameter is set to slip or ppp.
acp_dialup:
If the le contains a matching user name and: The local and remote addresses exist in the acp_dialup le, the Annex uses those values. The the acp_dialup le contains a remote address but not a local address, the Annex uses the remote address from the le and the Annexs IP address for the local address.
If the le does not contain a matching user name, the Annex uses values from the local_address and remote_address parameters: If both parameters contain addresses, the Annex uses these values. If both parameters are set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex negotiates for both addresses with the remote PPP client. The connection is denied for a remote SLIP client. If local_address contains a value and remote_address is set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex uses the local address and negotiates with the remote PPP client for the remote address. The connection is denied for a remote SLIP client.
19-12
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters

CallDef_do_ compression
dhcp contacts a DHCP server to request a remote address on behalf of the user.
reads the users remote address from the remote_address parameter.

Local
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Sync Call Defaults
starts TCP/IP header compression on a SLIP link. When you choose enabled, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex negotiates for TCP/IP compression for both sides of the connection.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, PPP, SLIP
CallDef_echo
directs an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to echo all characters as a user types. This parameter applies only to the CLI level.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing
CallDef_erase_char
uses a control character sequence to dene the CLI erase character.

Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + Delete (displays as ^?) Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing
CallDef_erase_line
uses a control character sequence to dene the CLI line erase character.
Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + U (displays as Û) Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing
19-13
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_erase_word
uses a control character sequence to dene the CLI word erase character.
Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + W (displays as ^W) Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing
CallDef_forward_key
denes the character sequence that opens the next higher-numbered session established through a call. Xylogics recommends that you use a sequence with Ctrl + a character. The key displays as ^. If you use more than one letter or number, Annex Manager separates characters with a slash (/). For example, Ctrl + a + b, displays as â/b.
Annex 0 to 16 characters (null string) Annex Only, Call Defaults, vci_interface
CallDef_forwarding_ count
controls ISDN Primary Rate Annex behavior for received characters. If you enter a number other than 0, the Annex does not forward characters until it receives the number of characters you entered. If you enter 0, the Annex uses values in CallDef_forwarding_timer. If you use CallDef_forwarding_count and CallDef_forwarding_timer parameters, the Annex uses the value that occurs rst. Setting CallDef_forwarding_count to 1 or CallDef_forwarding_timer to 0 may have a severe effect on the network when heavy serial input occurs.
Annex 0 to 255 0 Annex Only, Call Defaults, Idle Timer
19-14
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_forwarding_ timer
sets the amount of time in ten millisecond intervals that can elapse before an ISDN Primary Rate Annex forwards received data. If new data arrives before the timer expires, the Annex resets the timer. If you enter 0, the Annex uses 5, which is Annex Managers default value. Setting CallDef_forwarding_count to 1 or CallDef_forwarding_timer to 0 may have a severe effect on the network when heavy serial input occurs.
Annex 0 to 255 tens of milliseconds 5 (50 milliseconds) Annex Only, Call Defaults, Idle Timer
CallDef_hardware_tabs
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to convert ASCII tab characters to the correct number of spaces when a terminal does not support hardware tabs. This parameter works only for CLI sessions.
CallDef_Imask_7bits
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to mask input to seven bits. If you choose disabled, the Annex expects eight-bit ASCII input.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults
19-15
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_inactivity_timer
species the number of minutes that an ISDN Primary Rate Annex call can remain inactive. If the timer expires, the Annex terminates the call. You can use CallDef_input_is_activity and CallDef_output_is_activity to dene incoming call activity. If you set these parameters to disabled, the timer runs independent of activity. To reset a call regardless of any activity, enter a number of minutes here, set CallDef_input_is_activity and CallDef_output_is_activity to disabled.
Annex 0 to 255 minutes 0 (timer disabled) Annex Only, Call Defaults, Idle Timer, Modem, Modem Internal
CallDef_input_is_ activity
denes activity as input. If you choose enabled, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex resets the inactivity timer to 0 when it receives input through an established call.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Dedicated Port, Idle Timer, Modem
CallDef_input_start_ char
denes the control character sequence that restarts input if CallDef_port_input_ow_control is set to xonXoff.
Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + Q (displays as ^Q) Annex Only, Call Defaults, Flow Control
19-16
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_input_stop_ char
denes the control character sequence that stops input if CallDef_port_input_ow_control is set to xonXoff.
Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + S (displays as ^S) Annex Only, Call Defaults, Flow Control
CallDef_ipso_class
species the U.S. Department of Defense basic IP Security Option (IPSO) classication level included in TCP packets generated on Annex CLI, dedicated, or adaptive asynchronous connections. The option is not added to locally generated ICMP messages, RIP updates, or other system packets. The Annex does not check incoming packets for the presence of the IPSO.
Annex none, secret, topsecret, condential, unclassied none Annex Only, Call Defaults, Security
CallDef_ipx_security
controls whether IPX security is enabled for incoming calls.

Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Security
CallDef_ixany_ow_ control
treats any input character as a start (XON) character if output has been suspended by a stop (XOFF) character.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Flow Control
19-17
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_latb_enable
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to decode a LAT hosts data-b packets, which change asynchronous call parameters. Refer to your LAT hosts documentation for details. If you enter enabled and the LAT host sends a data-b slot message requesting that ow control (XON/XOFF) be turned off, the Annex turns off ow control and passes XON/XOFF characters to the host. This scenario can adversely affect XON/XOFF and the terminals cursor keys.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, LAT
CallDef_line_erase
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex using CLI to echo line erase for a video terminal. If you choose enabled, the Annex erases all characters on the line and moves the cursor back to the beginning of the line. If you choose disabled, it echoes the line erase character for hard-copy terminals, making the deleted line visible and positioning the print head at the beginning of the next line.
CallDef_local_address
denes the IP address for the connection on the ISDN Primary Rate Annex side of the link. This IP address is used only when CallDef_mode is set to slip, ppp, or autodetect.
Annex IP address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Sync Call Defaults
19-18
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_location
denes a location or description that displays at the CLI who command.

Annex 0 to 16 characters (null string) Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Sync Call Defaults
lCallDef_long_break
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to return a user to the CLI prompt after receiving a break signal of more than two seconds. If you enter disabled, the Annex passes the break to the local application.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Defaults, Idle Timer
CallDef_map_to_lower
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to convert uppercase characters received from a terminal using CLI into lowercase characters. This parameter is used for older terminals that do not support lower case characters.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing
CallDef_map_to_lower
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to convert lowercase characters sent to a terminal using CLI into uppercase characters. This parameter is used for older terminals that do not support lower case characters.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing
19-19
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_max_sessions
species the maximum number of concurrent ISDN Primary Rate Annex connections. You can enter -1 to indicate that there is no maximum set.
Annex -1 to 16 3 Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults
CallDef_metric
denes the hop count to the remote end of the connection when CallDef_mode is set to slip or ppp. You should modify this parameter only if you want the ISDN Primary Rate Annex to use a route other than the SLIP or PPP interfaces to the remote end.
Annex 1 to 15 1 Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Call Defaults
CallDef_mode
sets the mode for access to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. For more information about modes, see the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX and the Annex Administrators Guide for DOS. You can enter:
cli to allow a dialed terminal or incoming modem access to CLI.
CLI provides access to the network and connections to other hosts via the telnet, connect, rlogin and tn3270 commands. The tn3270 command is available only when option_key is set to an appropriate value.
slip
to specify that a connection can perform as a network interface using SLIP. IP packets are encapsulated by SLIP. to specify that a connection can perform as a network interface using PPP. IP packets are encapsulated by PPP.
ppp
arap
to specify that a connection can perform as a network interface using ARAP.
19-20
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
auto-detect to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to identify an
incoming packets protocol as IPX, PPP, ARAP or CLI.

ipx
to allow dial-in Novell access.
connect to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to communicate with a LAT host via the connect command. This option works with the CallDef_dedicated_arguments parameter. rlogin to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to communicate via the rlogin command. This option works with the CallDef_dedicated_arguments parameter. telnet to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to communicate via the telnet command. This option works with the
CallDef_dedicated_arguments parameter.
to allow an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to communicate via the tn3270 command. This option works with the CallDef_dedicated_arguments parameter.
tn3270
Annex cli, slip, ppp, arap, auto-detect, ipx, connect, rlogin, telnet, tn3270 cli Annex Only, AppleTalk, Basic Async Port, Modem, PPP, SLIP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
CallDef_net_inactivity
denes the amount of time an ISDN Primary Rate Annex call can remain inactive before it is terminated. The CallDef_net_inactivity_units parameter determines whether the number you enter here is in minutes or seconds.
Annex 0 to 255 0 Annex Only, Idle Timer, PPP, SLIP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
19-21
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_net_inactivity_ units
determines the unit of time used for an ISDN Primary Rate Annexs inactivity timer.
Annex minutes or seconds minutes Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Idle Timer, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
CallDef_newline_ terminal
interprets carriage returns and line feeds for CLI. When you enter disabled, a carriage return or a line feed terminates the input line and a carriage return followed by a line feed terminates output lines. When you enter enabled, a line feed terminates both the input and the output lines.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, Cmd Line Editing
CallDef_output_flow_ control
denes the method that a device uses to start or stop output from an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. You can choose:

none
to disable ow control.
start/stop to designate ow control by recognizing xon and xoff characters. eia
to indicate that ow control is delegated to a lower level.
Annex none, XonXoff, hardware hardware Annex Only, Flow Control, Modem, Call Defaults
19-22
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_output_is_ activity
denes activity as output. If you enter enabled, the Annex resets the inactivity timer to 0 when it sends output.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Idle Timer, Modem, Modem Internal, Call Defaults
CallDef_output_start_ char
denes the control character sequence that restarts output if CallDef_output_ow_control is set to start/stop.
Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + Q (displays as ^Q) Annex Only, Flow Control, Call Defaults
CallDef_output_stop_ char
denes the control character sequence that stops output if CallDef_output_ow_control is set to start/stop.
Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + S (displays as ^S) Annex Only, Flow Control, Call Defaults
19-23
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_port
denes the CLI prompt for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. This parameter uses formatting codes consisting of the percent character and a single lowercase letter. You can combine these codes (e.g. %a%c) using up to 16 codes. In addition, you can enter text that will appear in the prompt as long as your entire entry does not exceed 32 characters. You can enter:

%a to display Annex. %c to display a colon and a space. %d to display the date and time (e.g., Mon Mar 14 13:59:42 1996) %i to display an Annexs IP address. %j to display a new line. %l to display the ports location. If no location is dened, the port number (e.g., port 10) appears. %n to display an Annexs name or its IP address. %p to display the port number of a virtual CLI connection number preceded by v. %r to display port. %s to display a space. %t to display the current time in 24 hour format. %u to display the user name.
Annex %a, %c, %d, %i, %j. %l, %n, %p, %r, %s, %t, %u %a%c Annex Only, Basic Annex, Virtual CLI, Call Defaults
19-24
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_port_input_ ow_control
species the method of ow control for input received through a connection. You can enter:

CallDef_port_ multisession
none
xonXoff to designate ow control by recognizing xon and xoff characters. hardware
to indicate that ow control is delegated to a lower
level.
Annex none, xonXoff, hardware none Annex Only, Flow Control, Modem, Call Defaults
enables two active windows on DECs TD/SMP-supported(VT420 or VT330) terminals that are dialed in to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. The feature is available to all calls on which the VCI interface is congured.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Call Defaults
CallDef_port_password
denes a password for an ISDN Primary Rate Annex call. You can use this password as a back-up for host-based security if the security servers do not respond, or as an additional line of security after you enter a user name and password. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this value as set or unset. If you use SecurID, set CallDef_port_password to a null string (" "). Please refer to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX for more information about SecureID.
Annex 0 to 15 characters unset Annex Only, Modem, Modem Internal, Call Defaults, Synch Call Defaults
19-25
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_port_server_ security
enables a host-based security policy for access to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. If you enter enabled, only authorized users can access the Annex.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Modem, Modem Internal, Security, Call Defaults
CallDef_port_user_ name
denes a default user name for this ISDN Primary Rate Annex.
Annex 0 to 16 characters (null string) Annex Only, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
CallDef_ppp_acm
species which of the rst 32 bytes (0x0 to 0x1F) of the ASCII character set can be sent as clear text and which should be protocol-escaped.
Annex 8 character hexadecimal 00000000 Annex Only, PPP, Call Defaults
CallDef_ppp_mru
denes the maximum receive unit (MRU) that an ISDN Primary Rate Annex requests as its local MRU.
Annex 64 to 1500 1500 Annex Only, PPP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
19-26
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_ppp_ncp
species the protocols that run on the interface. The ISDN Primary Rate Annex negotiates only for those protocols that are specied here. You can select a single protocol, all protocols, or a combination of two protocols from the following list:
all ipcp atcp ipxcp ipcp-atcp ipcp-ipxcp atcp-ipxcp ipcp-atcp-ipxcp

CallDef_ppp_ password_remote
Annex all, ipcp, atcp, ipxcp, ipcp-atcp, ipcp-ipxcp, atcp-ipxcp, ipcp-atcp-ipxcp all Annex Only, PPP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
contains the password that an ISDN Primary Rate Annex provides when the remote PPP peer asks for authentication. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this parameters value as set or unset.
Annex 0 to 16 characters unset Annex Only, PPP, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
19-27
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_ppp_security_p rotocol
denes the security check for the peer that the ISDN Primary Rate Annex requires before it starts the network control protocol. If the Annex wants to use security and the peer refuses, the Annex closes the link. You can enter:

chap pap
to use challenge-handshake protocol.
to use password authentication protocol.
chap/pap
to use both challenge-handshake protocol and password authentication protocol.
none.
Annex chap, pap, chap/pap, none none Annex Only, PPP, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
CallDef_ppp_ username_remote
contains the username by which the ISDN Primary Rate Annex identies itself when the remote PPP peer asks for authentication.
Annex 0 to 15 characters (null string) Annex Only, PPP, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
CallDef_printer_host
species the IP address or fully qualied domain name of a machine running a Berkeley-style lpd server. The tn3270 command uses this server for the printscreen function.
Annex IP address or domain name 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Call Defaults
19-28
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_printer_name
species the printer used by the tn3270 commands print-screen function. You must enter a name listed in the /etc/printcap le on the remote host by the CallDef_printer_host parameter. Please refer to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX for more information.
Annex Printer name from /etc/printcap le (null string) Annex Only, Call Defaults
CallDef_redisplay_line
denes the reprint line character for CLI users.

Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + R (displays as ^R) Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults
CallDef_reset_idle_ time_on
denes whether input or output resets the idle timer. The idle time is the time lapse between activity and inactivity at the device. This parameter works with the who command.
Annex input or output input Annex Only, Idle Timer, Call Defaults
CallDef_resolve_ protocol
denes the default host protocol that establishes a connection when the command does not specify a protocol. If you enter any, the system attempts a LAT (connect) rst; if that fails, it attempts to establish a telnet connection.
Annex connect, telnet, any connect Annex Only, Call Defaults
19-29
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_rs232_async_ data_bits
denes the number of data bits in a character. This value does not include the start, stop, or parity bits.
Annex 5, 6, 7, or 8 8 Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal, Call Defaults
CallDef_rs232_async_ parity
denes the parity type for asynchronous connections.

Annex none, odd, even none Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal, Call Defaults
CallDef_rs232_async_ stop_bits
species the number of stop bits for an asynchronous connection.

Annex one, two, one-and-half one Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal, Call Defaults
CallDef_rs232_sync_ clock_source
denes the source of the connections bit rate clock. Split indicates that the transmit clock is internal and the receive clock is external.
Annex clk56, clk64, clk112, clk128, external, split clk56 Annex Only, Call Defaults
CallDef_short_break
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to return a user to the CLI prompt after receiving a break of less than two seconds.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Idle Timer, Call Defaults
19-30
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_slip_mtu_size
sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for a PPP SLIP/CSLIP connection to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. This parameter forces the SLIP interface to use large (1006) or small (256) MTUs.
Annex large or small small Annex Only, SLIP, Call Defaults
CallDef_slip_no_icmp
discards ICMP packets directed to the SLIP link. This parameter allows the ISDN Primary Rate Annex to reduce unnecessary trafc and messages over the SLIP link.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, SLIP, Call Defaults
CallDef_slip_ppp_ security
controls dial-up SLIP/PPP access to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. When enable_security and CallDef_slip_ppp_security are set to enabled, SLIP and PPP calls will use the ACP security server. The Annex determines whether CLI users are authorized to execute SLIP or PPP commands.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, PPP, SLIP, Security, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
CallDef_slip_subnet_ mask
contains the ISDN Primary Rate Annexs IP subnet mask for a SLIP interface. The parameters default is based on the network portion of the Annexs IP address. Setting this parameter incorrectly can cause routing problems.
Annex IP address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, SLIP, Call Defaults, Sync Call Defaults
19-31
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_slip_tos
allows an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to send interactive trafc (such as telnet, rlogin, and ftp control sessions) before it sends other trafc. This parameter provides a type-of-service based SLIP queuing.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, SLIP, Call Defaults
CallDef_tcp_keepalive
species the length of time an ISDN Primary Rate Annex connection must be idle before sending keep-alive messages. A keep-alive message contains no data, but solicits an acknowledgment from the other end of a connection to determine whether the connection is still active. If the recipient does not acknowledge the message after eight retries, the Annex drops the connection. You can use 0 (Annex Managers default value) to set the keep-alive time to 120 minutes, or you can enter 255 to disable the keep-alive mechanism.
Annex 0 to 255 minutes 0 minutes Annex Only, Basic Annex, Call Defaults
CallDef_telnet_crlf
converts a carriage return in a Telnet session to a carriage return followed by a line feed. If you enter disabled, a carriage return translates to a carriage return followed by a null string.
Type Values Default LIsts
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults
CallDef_telnet_escape
denes the character that returns a CLI user to the telnet prompt. You can press Ctrl and enter U to disable the telnet escape character.
Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + ] (displays as ^]) Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults
19-32
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
CallDef_term_var
identies the type of terminal dialed in to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex via a CLI connection. You must enter a valid terminal type for the host. The Annex passes the terminal type setting to the host.
Annex 0 to 16 characters (null string) Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Call Defaults
CallDef_toggle_output
denes the character that ushes the output buffer for CLI users calling an ISDN Primary Rate Annex.
Annex Ctrl + any character Ctrl + O (displays as Ô) Annex Only, Cmd Line Editing, Call Defaults
CallDef_v120_mru
denes the maximum receive unit (MRU) that the ISDN Primary Rate Annex requests as its local MRU.
Annex 30 to 260 256 Annex Only, Call Defaults
CallDef_vci_login_port_ password
enables the ISDN Primary Rate Annex password when the DECServer command interface is congured (i.e., when CallDef_cli_interface is set to vci). For more information, please refer to the Annex Interface for VMS Environments Administrators Guide.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, VCI Interface
19-33
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
CallDef_vci_login_ timeout
enables a login timer when the DECServer command interface is congured (i.e., when CallDef_cli_interface is set to vci). For more information, please refer to the Annex Interface for VMS Environments Administrators Guide.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Call Defaults, VCI Interface
chap_auth_name
contains the character string that appears in the Name eld when an Annex issues a CHAP challenge over a PPP link.
Annex 1 to 16 characters chap Annex Only, Security
char_erase
allows an Annex using CLI to display the character erase for a video terminal. When you choose enabled, a deleted character looks as if it has been erased. If you choose disabled, the Annex echoes the erase characters for a hard-copy terminal. It displays a backslash (\), one or more deleted characters, and a slash (/). For example, typing asdf Delete Delete g displays as asdf\fd/g.
Async enabled or disabled enabled Async Port. Command Line Editing
circuit_timer
indicates the time interval in tens of milliseconds between the transmission of LAT packets. For example, if you enter 9, the time interval will be 90 milliseconds.
Annex 1 to 100 tens of milliseconds 8 (80 milliseconds) Annex Only, LAT
19-34
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
cli_imask7
allows an Annex to mask CLI input to seven bits. If you choose disabled, the Annex expects eight-bit ASCII input. You should not choose enabled unless the terminal attached to the port can transmit only seven-bit characters.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal
cli_inactivity
species the amount of time in minutes that the Annex remains idle before disconnecting a CLI session from a port. Entering 0 disables the timer; entering 255 causes the Annex to disconnect as soon as it exits from its last job. Unlike inactivity_timer, this timer does not disconnect a CLI session with active jobs.
Async 0 to 255 minutes 0 minutes Async Port, Idle Time, Modem, Modem Internal
cli_interface
allows you to control the prompt that appears for VMS or UNIX environments. If you enter uci, this parameter provides a standard UNIX interface, with prompts dened by the cli_prompt and prompt parameters. If you enter vci, the standard VMS interface includes the Local> prompt followed by the Username> prompt.
Async vci or uci uci Async Port
19-35
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
cli_prompt
denes the Annex prompt for all CLI users. This parameter uses formatting codes consisting of the percent character and a single lowercase letter. You can combine these codes (e.g. %a%c) using up to 16 codes. In addition, you can enter text that will appear in the prompt as long as your entire entry does not exceed 32 characters. You can enter:

%a to display Annex. %c to display a colon and a space. %d to display the date and time (e.g., Mon Mar 14
13:59:42 1996)
%i to display an Annexs IP address. %j to display a new line. %l to display the ports location. If no location is dened, the port number (e.g., port 10) appears. %n to display an Annexs name or its IP address. %p to display the port number of a virtual CLI connection number preceded by v. %r to display port. %s to display a space. %t to display the current time in 24 hour format. %u to display the ports user name.
Annex %a, %c, %d, %i, %j. %l, %n, %p, %r, %s, %t, %u %a%c Annex Only, Basic Annex, Virtual CLI
19-36
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
cli_security
enables user authentication by the host-based ACP server for all CLI connections. If you choose disabled, you cannot use any Annex security mechanism other than the administrative password for CLI ports.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Security
cong_le
denes a name for the conguration le maintained on the load host. The le contains information about gateways, rotaries, macros, and services. It must reside in the /usr/spool/erpcd/bfs directory.
Annex 0 to 16 characters cong.annex Annex Only, Basic Annex
connect_security
activates the host-based security policy for access from CLI to the network. If you choose enabled, the user must be authorized via the host-based ACP security server to connect to a network host. The security policy in the security server scans the /etc/acp_restrict le to authorize a connection to a host from the Annex.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal, Security
19-37
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
control_lines
denes the type of hardware control lines used on this port. You can enter:

data_bits
both
to allow ow and modem control. to allow ow control (RTS/CTS) only.
ow_control
modem_control
to allow modem control using only DTR/DCD/ DSR handshaking. to disable ow and modem control.
none
Async both, ow_control, modem_control, none none Async Port, Flow_Ctrl, Modem, Modem Internal
denes the number of data bits in a character. This value does not include the start, stop, or parity bits.
Annex 5, 6, 7, or 8 8 Annex Only, Basic Async Port, Modem
daylight_savings
allows the Annex to adjust for daylight savings time in your geographic location.
Annex us, australian, british, canadian, east_european, mid_european, west_european, none us Annex only
19-38
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
dedicated_arguments
denes the command line arguments used for dedicated ports. This parameter works when mode is set to connect, rlogin, telnet, or tn3270.
Async 1 to 100 characters (null string) Async Port, Dedicated Port
dedicated_port
selects the application name or TCP port number to which an Annex port can connect. You can enter:
telnet, rlogin,
or call.
One of the following numbers:

0
or 23 for telnet. for rlogin. for call.
513
1027
A number between 0 and 65535.
This parameter is obsolete in Annex software Release 10.1 and in subsequent releases. Please use the dedicated_arguments parameter.
def_session_mode
Async telnet, rlogin, call or a TCP/IP port number. telnet Dedicated Port
denes the default session mode when the DECServer command interface is congured (i.e., when cli_interface is set to vci). For more information, please refer to the Annex Interface for VMS Environments Administrators Guide.
Async interactive, passthru, passall, transparent interactive Async Port
19-39
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
default_image_name
contains the name of the image le that is loaded by default when the Annex is booted.
Annex 0 to 100 characters (null string) Annex Only, Basic Annex
default_zone_list
contains the zone list that is sent to AppleTalk clients in case of an ACP failure. You must use spaces to separate zone names (e.g., general engineering lab). To escape embedded spaces within a zone name, use the backslash (\). If you do not set this parameter, the Annex provides the network zone list.
Annex 1 to 100 characters (null string) Annex Only, AppleTalk
demand_dial
allows a port to use demand dialing. You cannot use this parameter unless the option_key parameter enables demand dialing.
DHCP_broadcast
determines whether or not an Annex broadcasts for DHCP services if the preferred DHCP servers are not available.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only
19-40
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
dialup_addresses_ origin
allows an Annex to search the acp_dialup le for the remote clients user name and to set local and remote addresses. This parameter applies only when the mode parameter is set to slip, ppp, or autodetect.
acp_dialup:
If the le contains a matching user name and: The local and remote addresses exist in the acp_dialup le, the Annex uses those values. The the acp_dialup le contains a remote address but not a local address, the Annex uses the remote address from the le and the Annexs IP address for the local address.
If the le does not contain a matching user name, the Annex uses values from the local_address and remote_address parameters: If both parameters contain addresses, the Annex uses these values. If both parameters are set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex negotiates for both addresses with the remote PPP client. The connection is denied for a remote SLIP client. If local_address contains a value and remote_address is set to 0.0.0.0, the Annex uses the local address and negotiates with the remote PPP client for the remote address. The connection is denied for a remote SLIP client.
dhcp contacts a DHCP server to request a remote address on behalf of the user.
reads the users remote address from the remote_address parameter.

Local
19-41
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5

disabled_modules
allows you to disable individual modules to free memory space. If you enter more than one module, separate module names using commas. For detailed information about disabling modules, refer to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX. You can enter admin, edit, ngerd, ftpd, lat, nameserver, ppp, slip. snmp, vci, all, or none. Disabling snmp prevents access to the Annex from Annex Manager. Disabling admin and snmp can cause problems if host-based na is not available. To change parameters in this case, you must return to monitor mode, erase the parameters in non-volatile memory, and recongure the Annex.
Annex admin, edit, ngerd, ftpd, lat, nameserver, ppp, slip, snmp, vci, all, none vci Annex Only, Basic Annex
do_compression
starts TCP/IP header compression on a SLIP link. When you choose enabled, the Annex negotiates for TCP/IP compression for both sides of the connection.
19-42
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
dtr_signal
controls the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal for the port. Entering a value for an idle port causes an error condition.
If you change this value and then reset a port or reboot an Annex, this parameter will return to its original default values. Therefore, you must press Cancel in the Reset Parameters window to prevent the reset process and to use the parameter value you entered.
echo
Async unknown, high, low unknown Async Port
directs an Annex to echo all characters as a user types. This parameter applies only to the CLI level.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Command Line Editing
enable_security
allows you to activate the security system.

Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, AppleTalk, IPX, PPP, SLIP, Security, Virtual CLI
19-43
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
erase_char
uses a control character sequence to dene the CLI erase character.

Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + Delete (displays as ^?) Async Port, Command Line Editing
erase_line
uses a control character sequence to dene the CLI line erase character.
Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + U (displays as Û) Async Port, Command Line Editing
erase_word
uses a control character sequence to dene the CLI word erase character.
Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + W (displays as ^W) Async Port, Command Line Editing
facility_num
identies a LAT host using a number.

Annex 0 through 32767 0 Annex Only, LAT
forward_key
denes the character sequence that opens the next higher-numbered session established at a port. Xylogics recommends that you use a sequence with Ctrl + a character. The key displays as ^. If you use more than one letter or number, Annex Manager separates characters with a slash (/). For example, Ctrl + a + b, displays as â/b.
Async 0 to 16 characters (null string) Async Port, vci_interface
19-44
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
forwarding_count
controls Annex port behavior for received characters. If you enter a number other than 0, the port does not forward characters until it receives the number of characters you entered. If you enter 0, the port uses values in forwarding_timer. If you use forwarding_count and forwarding_timer parameters, the Annex uses the value that occurs rst. Setting forwarding_count to 1 or forwarding_timer to 0 may have a severe effect on the network when heavy serial input occurs.
Async 0 to 255 0 Async Port, Idle Timer
forwarding_timer
sets the amount of time in ten millisecond intervals that can elapse before an Annex forwards received data. If new data arrives before the timer expires, the Annex resets the timer. If you enter 0, the Annex uses 5, which is Annex Managers default value. Setting forwarding_count to 1 or forwarding_timer to 0 may have a severe effect on the network when heavy serial input occurs.
Async 0 to 255 tens of milliseconds 5 (50 milliseconds) Async Port, Idle Timer
group_value
specifies the LAT protocol remote group codes that can access local services offered by an Annex. To access these services, the Annex must have at least one enabled group code that matches the services group codes. You can enter all, none, a series of numbers separated by commas, (e.g., 1, 5, 7) or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g. 1, 5, 200-255).
Annex all, none, or numbers from 0 to 255 none Annex Only, LAT
19-45
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
hardware_tabs
allows the Annex to convert ASCII tab characters to the correct number of spaces when a terminal does not support hardware tabs. This parameter works only for CLI sessions.
Async enabled or disabled enabled Async Port, Command Line Editing
host_table_size
denes the number of entries allowed in the host table. Entering 255 allows an unlimited number of entries. Entering 254 indicates that there is no host table. In this case, the Annex requires a name server to resolve every host name.
Annex 0 to 255 64 Annex Only, Modem
image_name
provides the le name for the operational code that loads by default when you boot an Annex. You can enter a name using up to 100 characters.
Annex 1 to 100 characters (null string) Annex only
imask_7bits
allows an Annex to mask input to seven bits. If you choose disabled, the Annex expects eight-bit ASCII input.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Basic Async Port
19-46
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
inactivity_timer
species the number of minutes that a port can remain inactive. If the timer expires, the Annex terminates all sessions and resets the port. You can use input_is_activity and output_is_activity to dene activity as input to the port or output from the port. If you set these parameters to disabled, the timer runs independent of activity. To reset a port regardless of any activity, enter a number of minutes here, set input_is_activity and output_is_activity to disabled and set port_type to dialin.
Async 0 to 255 minutes 0 (timer disabled) Async Port, Idle Timer, Modem, Modem Internal
inet_addr
denes the Annexs IP address. This 32-bit address contains four 8-bit elds separated by periods. Each eld contains a number ranging from 0 to 255 or a hexadecimal number. The IP address always displays in decimal notation.
Annex For each eld: 0 to 255 or hexadecimal n/a Annex Only, Basic Annex
input_buffer_size
provides the number of 256-byte blocks allocated to receive input characters for a port.
Async 1 to 255 1 Async Port, Flow Control
19-47
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
input_flow_control
species the method of ow control for input received from a device connected to a serial port. You can enter:

input_is_activity
none
start/stop to designate ow control by recognizing xon and xoff characters.
to indicate that ow control is delegated to a lower level (e.g., a parallel port).

eia
Async none, start/stop, eia none Async Port, Printer Port, Flow Control, Modem
denes activity as input. If you choose enabled, the Annex sets the inactivity timer when it receives input at the port.
Async enabled or disabled enabled Async Port, Dedicated Port, Idle Timer, Modem
input_start_char
denes the control character sequence that restarts input if input_ow_control is set to start/stop.
Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + Q (displays as ^Q) Async Port, Flow Control
19-48
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
input_stop_char
denes the control character sequence that stops input if input_ow_control is set to stop/start.
Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + S (displays as ^S) Async Port, Flow Control
ip_forward_broadcast
allows an Annex to broadcast a packet to the SLIP or PPP interfaces. When an Annex receives a packet sent to a broadcast address (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255), it scans the interface list for SLIP or PPP and matches the broadcast address against the interfaces remote address using a subnet or net mask. If these addresses match, the Annex copies the packet to that interface. If you enter disabled, the Annex does not scan the interface list and does not copy broadcast packets.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Basic Annex
ipencap_type
indicates whether the Annex LAN interface encapsulates IP packets in Ethernet Version 2 format or IEEE 802.3 Data Link Layer format.
Annex ethernet or ieee802 ethernet Annex Only, Basic Annex
ipso_class
species the U.S. Department of Defense basic IP Security Option (IPSO) classication level included in TCP packets generated on Annex CLI, dedicated, or adaptive asynchronous ports. The option is not added to locally generated ICMP messages, RIP updates, or other system packets. The Annex does not check incoming packets for the presence of the IPSO.
Async none, secret, topsecret, condential, unclassied none Async Ports, Security
19-49
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
ipx_do_checksum
controls the IPX checksum feature, which is supported only on Netware version 3.12 and 4.xx.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, IPX
ipx_dump_password
contains a user password for logging on to the Novell le server before the Annex sends a dump le to the server. Annex Manager displays set or unset.
Annex 0 to 16 characters unset Annex Only, IPX
ipx_dump_path
species the full pathname that stores the uploaded Annex dump image on the Novell le server.
Annex 0 to 100 characters n/a Annex Only, IPX
ipx_dump_username
provides user name for logging on to the Novell le server before the Annex sends a dump le to the server.
ipx_le_server
contains the name of the Novell le server from which an Annex boots.
19-50
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
ipx_frame_type
denes framing used for IPX packets on the Ethernet interface.

Annex raw802_3, ethernetII, ccitt802, ccitt802snap raw802_3 Annex Only, IPX
ipx_security
controls whether IPX security is enabled on the port.

Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Security
ixany_ow_control
treats any input character as a start (XON) character if output has been suspended by a stop (XOFF) character.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Ports, Flow Control
keep_alive_timer
species the number of seconds that can elapse between the transmission of identication packets during times of network inactivity. This parameter works only for the LAT protocol. The packets serve only as notices to remote nodes that the hosts services are available.
Annex 10 to 255 seconds 20 seconds Annex Only, LAT
lat_key
restricts access to LAT-specic Annex commands, parameters, functions, and the LAT protocol within the Annex. Each Annex requires a unique key value. You must contact your supplier to obtain a LAT key. After you set the key, your system administrator must reboot the Annex.
Annex obtained from your supplier n/a Annex Only, LAT
19-51
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
lat_multicast_timer
denes the number of seconds that can elapse between service announcement transmissions for the LAT protocol.
Annex 10 through 180 seconds 30 seconds Annex Only, LAT
llat_sys_location
supplies host location or identication information for the LAT protocol.

Annex 0 to 32 characters Annex Only, LAT
lat_queue_max
limits the number of HIC (Host Initiated Connection) requests that an Annex can queue.
Annex 0 to 255 4 Annex Only, LAT
latb_enable
allows an Annex to decode a LAT hosts data-b packets, which change asynchronous port parameters. Refer to your LAT hosts documentation for details. If you enter enabled and the LAT host sends a data-b slot message requesting that ow control (XON/XOFF) be turned off, the Annex turns off ow control and passes XON/XOFF characters to the host. This scenario can adversely affect XON/XOFF and the terminals cursor keys.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Ports, LAT
19-52
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
line_erase
allows an Annex using CLI to echo line erase for a video terminal. If you choose enabled, the Annex erases all characters on the line and moves the cursor back to the beginning of the line. If you choose disabled, it echoes the line erase character for hard-copy terminals, making the deleted line visible and positioning the print head at the beginning of the next line.
Async enabled or disabled enabled Async Port, Command Line Editing
load_broadcast
denes, during a boot, whether the Annex requests the conguration or messageof-the-day les from other hosts. This parameter works only if the les are not available on the preferred load host.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Basic_Annex
load_dump_gateway
species the gateways IP address. A gateway is required if the preferred load or dump host is on a different network or subnet than the Annex.
Annex IP address 0.0.0.0 (no gateway) Annex Only, Basic Annex
19-53
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
load_dump_sequence
species available network interfaces and the order in which they are used for a down-line load or an up-line dump. You can list more than one interface by using commas to separate interface names. You can enter:
net
to specify a local area network.
(e.g., sl2) to specify a SLIP line. If you enter sl and a port number, you must enter an address in the slip_load_dump_host parameter.
sl + port number self
to instruct an Annex to boot its image from the Flash ROMs. Since the Annex cannot dump back to itself, you should include a secondary interface here by entering self, net or
Annex net, sl+ port number, self net Annex Only, Basic Annex
self,sl+port number.

local_address
denes the IP address for the port on the Annex side of the link. This IP address is used only when mode is set to slip, ppp, or autodetect.
Async IP address 0.0.0.0 Async Port, PPP, SLIP
location
denes a port location or description that displays at the CLI who command.
Async 0 to 16 characters (null string) Async Port, Basic Async Port
lock_enable
allows any port to use the LOCK DECServer command.

Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Security
19-54
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
long_break
allows an Annex to return a user to the CLI prompt after receiving a break signal of more than two seconds. If you enter disabled, the Annex passes the break to the local application.
Async enabled or disabled enabled Async Ports, Idle Timer
loose_source_route
controls the Loose Source Routing protocol, which denes a sequence of IP addresses that a datagram must follow. You can select enabled or disabled. When you select enable, the Annex:
Forwards IP packets that have the Loose Source Routing and Record option set. Forwards packets with the Strict Source Routing and Record option only if it can reach the next routing address directly. Drops packets that do not have either setting and sends an ICMP Destination Unreachable message with a Source Route Failed code.
If you enter disabled, the Annex accepts packets with Loose Source Routing and Record or Strict Source Routing and Record only when the Annex itself is the destination. If it is not the destination, it drops these packets and sends the same ICMP type message and code. Loose source routing may be a security problem if you use lters on your network router. If you are concerned with security, you should set this parameter to disabled.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Security
19-55
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
map
controls mapping of DS0s between the T1 Network Interface and the T1 Drop and Insert Interface, as well as mapping of modems to the T1 Drop and Insert Interface and the T1 Network Interface. You can enter a 4-digit number consisting of two parts. The right-hand two digits control the type of mapping. The left-hand two digits identify the destination modem, if any, and must be 00 if there is no destination modem. You can enter:
01
to mark a DS0 as unused. When you use 01, the next two digits must be 00.
02
to mark a T1 Network Interface DS0 as mapped to modem number nn, where nn represents the two digits that follow.
to mark a T1 Drop and Insert Interface DS0 as mapped to modem number nn, where nn represents the two digits that follow.
03
to mark a T1 Network Interface DS0 as mapped in voice mode directly to the Drop and Insert Interface. When you use 04, the next two digits must be 00.
04 05 to mark a T1 Network Interface DS0 as mapped in data mode directly to the Drop and Insert Interface. When you use 05, the next two digits must be 00.

map_to_lower
T1 DS0 4-digit number (see combinations above) 02 + a two-digit number equal to the DS0. T1_DS0
allows an Annex to convert uppercase characters sent from a terminal using CLI into lowercase characters. This parameter is used for older terminals that do not support lower case characters.
19-56
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
map_to_upper
allows an Annex to convert lowercase characters sent to a terminal using CLI into uppercase characters. This parameter is used for older terminals that do not support lower case characters.
max_chap_chall_ interval
species the maximum value for the random CHAP re-challenge interval.
Annex 0 to 65535 0 (Off) Annex Only, Security
max_modem_calls
indicates the number of modem calls for which the Annex keeps accounting information. You can use this parameter only for RA6100, Cabletron CSMIMT1, and Cabeltron MODMIM products.
Annex 0 to 255 255 Annex Only, Basic Annex, Virtual CLI
max_vcli
determines the maximum number of virtual CLI connections the Annex can create at a time. Entering 255 allows a number of connections limited only by the Annexs available memory.
Annex 0 to 255 255 Annex Only, Basic Annex, Virtual CLI
19-57
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
metric
denes the hop count to the remote end of the serial line when mode is set to slip or ppp. Modify this parameter only if you want the Annex to use a route other than the SLIP or PPP interfaces to the remote end.
Async 1 to 15 1 Async Port, PPP, SLIP
min_unique_hostname s
species whether you can identify a host in the host table by entering a minimal string rather than the full host name.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Modem
mode
sets the mode for access to an asynchronous port. For more information about modes, see the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX and the Annex Administrators Guide for DOS. You can enter:
to allow a port connected to a terminal or incoming modem access to CLI. CLI provides access to the network and connections to other hosts via the telnet, connect, rlogin and tn3270 commands.
cli
The tn3270 command is available only when option_key is set to an appropriate value.
slave to indicate that a port provides access to modems, serial line printers, and other serial devices attached to an outgoing port. It does not provide access to the CLI.
to allow slave and CLI capabilities. If a connection is initiated via an Annex, the port enters CLI mode. If a connection is initiated via a port server, the port enters slave mode.
adaptive
19-58
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
unused to indicate that a port has no connection. You should enter unused if a port is not connected to a device. slip
to specify that a port can perform as a network interface using SLIP. IP packets are encapsulated by SLIP.
to allow a port to communicate only with the host dened in the dedicated_address and dedicated_port parameters. The port can communicate via telnet or rlogin, but not via tn3270 or connect.
dedicated ppp
to specify that a port can perform as a network interface using PPP. IP packets are encapsulated by PPP.
arap
to specify that a port can perform as a network interface using ARAP. to allow a port to identify an incoming packets protocol and to convert to IPX, PPP, ARAP or CLI.
auto-detect
to allow a port to detect whether packets are incoming or outgoing. For incoming packets, the port behaves as if it were in auto-detect mode. For outgoing packets, it operates in slave mode.
auto-adapt ndp ipx
to allow Novell dial-in, dial-out, and routing.
to allow dial-in Novell access.
connect to allow a port to communicate with a LAT host via the connect command. This option works with the dedicated_arguments parameter. rlogin
to allow a port to communicate via the rlogin command. This option works with the dedicated_arguments parameter.
telnet to allow a port to communicate via the telnet command. This option works with the dedicated_arguments parameter. tn3270 to allow a port to communicate via the tn3270 command. This option works with the dedicated_arguments parameter.
19-59
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
Async cli, slave, adaptive, unused, slip, dedicated, ppp, arap, autodetect, auto-adapt, ndp, ipx, connect, rlogin, telnet, tn3270 cli Async Port, AppleTalk, Basic Async Port, Dedicated Port, IPX, Modem, PPP, SLIP, TN3270
modem_type
species the type of modem attached to the asynchronous port. If you enter a type that does not match the type_of_modem eld in the conguration le that was read most recently, the Annex logs a warning message. For more information about the conguration le modem management, see the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX.
Async 0 to 16 characters n/a Async Port, Modem
mop_login_password
species the password for all ports using a VMS interface. This parameter works only when cli_interface is set to vci and vci_login_port_password is set to enabled. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays values as set or unset.
Annex 0 to 16 characters unset Annex Only, MOP
mop_login_prompt
denes the prompt that appears for all ports using a VMS interface. This parameter works only when cli_interface is set to vci.
Annex 0 to 16 characters # Annex Only, MOP
19-60
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
mop_login_timer
species the number of minutes a port using a VMS interface can remain inactive. This parameter works only when cli_interface is set to vci. Entering 0 sets the timer to 30 minutes (Annex Managers default value).
Annex 0 through 60 minutes 30 minutes Annex Only, MOP
mop_password
contains the MOP maintenance password. This is an 8-byte password, where each byte consists of two hexadecimal digits. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays values as set or unset.
Annex 0 to 16 characters unset Annex Only, MOP
mop_pref_host
contains the Ethernet address of the preferred MOP load or dump host. This address consists of six parts separated by dashes. Each part contains a hexadecimal value.
Annex Ethernet address 00-00-00-00-00-00 Annex Only, MOP
motd_le
contains the message-of-the-day le name that is maintained on the load host. This le resides in the directory you choose during the host installation process (typically /usr/spool/erpcd/bfs).
Annex 0 to 16 characters motd Annex Only, Basic Annex
19-61
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
multisession
allows terminals (i.e., VT420 and VT 330) supporting DECs Terminal Device/ Session Management Protocol (TD/SMP) to display two active windows simultaneously. Entering enabled here makes this feature available to all ports on which the VCI command interface is congured.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, VCI_Interface
name_server_1
denes the type of name service used with the primary name server. This parameter works only when you specify a host in pref_name1_addr.
Annex dns, ien_116, none none Annex Only, Nameserver
name_server_2
denes the type of name service used with the secondary name server. The Annex uses this service when the service specied in name_server_1 is not available. This parameter works only when you specify a host in pref_name2_addr.
Annex dns, ien_116, none none Annex Only, Nameserver
nameserver_broadcast
denes whether the Annex broadcasts a name server request if the preferred name servers do not respond.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Modem
19-62
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
need_dsr
allows an Annex to use the DSR (Data Set Ready) signal to determine whether a device is attached to the corresponding asynchronous line. The Annex will not allow connection to a slave line port and will not activate CLI until the DSR signal is active. If DSR is deactivated, the connection to a slave line is terminated and CLI is deactivated. If you choose disabled, the DSR signal is not required to connect to a slave line, and is not required to activate a CLI line. DSR is always considered active on ports that do not have a DSR signal (ports with partial modem control lines).
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Flow Control, Modem
net_inactivity
denes the amount of time an asynchronous interface port can remain inactive before the port is reset. The net_inactivity_units parameter determines whether the number you enter here is in minutes or seconds.
Async 0 to 255 0 Async Ports, Idle Timer, PPP, SLIP
net_inactivity_units
determines the unit of time used for the ports serial protocol inactivity timer.
Async minutes or seconds minutes Async Port, PPP, SLIP
19-63
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
network_turnaround
controls the number of seconds that an Annex waits for a response from a security server. An algorithm denes the actual time, which is usually longer than the number of seconds in this parameter. This parameter works only when enable_security is set to enabled. You should not enter a high number here unless you need a long timeout for contacting a slow host or for waiting for a slow hosts response to a security request.
Annex 1 to 255 seconds 2 seconds Annex Only, Security
newline_terminal
interprets carriage returns and line feeds for CLI. When you enter disabled, a carriage return or a line feed terminates the input line and a carriage return followed by a line feed terminates output lines. When you enter enabled, a line feed terminates both the input and the output lines.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Command Line Editing
node_id
contains the address an Annex tries to acquire at the start of an AppleTalk session. If the address you enter here is in use, the Annex must acquire a new node ID. This new ID is stored in non-volatile RAM. Each ID has two parts, separated by a dot.
Annex 0 to 65534.255 0.0 Annex Only, AppleTalk
19-64
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
option_key
enables AppleTalk-specic functions and parameters, the CLI tn3270 command, active RIP, dial-out routing, ltering, and IPX. These features are available separately or in any combination. Each Annex requires a unique key value for the features you choose. You must contact your supplier to obtain the key value.
Lists Values Default Lists
Annex option key value from your supplier n/a Annex Only, Basic Annex, AppleTalk, IPX
output_flow_control
denes the method that a device uses to start or stop output from an Annex. You can choose:

output_is_activity
none
start/stop to designate ow control by recognizing xon and xoff characters. eia
to indicate that ow control is delegated to a lower level (e.g., a parallel port).

Async none, start/stop, eia none Async Port, Printer Port, Flow Control, Modem
denes activity as output. If you enter enabled, the Annex sets the inactivity timer when it sends output from the port.
Async enabled or disabled enabled Async Port, Dedicated Port, Idle Timer, Modem, Modem Internal
19-65
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
output_start_char
denes the control character sequence that restarts output if output_ow_control is set to start/stop.
Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + Q (displays as ^Q) Async Port, Flow Control
output_stop_char
denes the control character sequence that stops output if output_ow_control is set to start/stop.
Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + S (displays as ^S) Async Port, Flow Control
output_ttl
sets the time-to-live (TTL) for packets the Annex generates for RIP updates. TTL is a eld in IP packets that limits their lifetime on the network. Each time a packet crosses a router, the router decrements the packets TTL by 1. When the value reaches 0, the packet is discarded.
Annex 1 to 255 64 Annex Only, Routing
parity
denes the type of parity that the asynchronous port uses.

Async none, odd, even none Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal
19-66
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
password
modies the Annexs administrative password used for access to the superuser CLI commands and for administrative access to an Annex. This password overrides the CLI lock and virtual CLI passwords. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this value as set or unset.
Annex 0 to 15 characters unset Annex Only, Security
password_limit
denes the maximum number of times a user can attempt to enter a password before an Annex resets the port. Entering 0 sets the limit to 3 (Annex Managers default value).
Annex 0 through 10 3 Annex Only
phone_number
denes the default phone number used with demand dialing on the port. The number you enter must be compatible with the modem connected to the port.
Async 32 characters (null string) Async Port, PPP, SLIP
port_modem_cong
sets other parameters for a specic modem conguration. Each value you choose here sets values in the mode, port_type, speed, control_lines, input_ow_control, output_ow_control, need_dsr, bidirectional_modem, and broadcast parameters. The dialinautobaud and dialinoutautobaud selections set the autobaud parameter in addition to those listed above. The following list includes the parameter values that will be set. You can use this parameter only for RA6100, Cabletron CSMIM-T1, and Cabeltron MODMIM products.
19-67
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
None sets mode to cli, port_type to hardwired, speed to 9600, control_lines to none, input_ow_control to none, output_ow_control to start/stop, need_dsr to disabled, bidirectional_modem to disabled, and broadcast_direction to port. Dialinautobaud sets mode to cli, port_type to dialin, autobaud to enabled, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports), control_lines to both, input_ow_control to eia, output_ow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled, bidirectional_modem to disabled, and broadcast_direction to port.
sets mode to cli, port_type to dialin, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports), control_lines to both, input_ow_control to eia, output_ow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled, bidirectional_modem to disabled, and broadcast_direction to port.
Dialin Dialinoutautobaud sets mode to adaptive, autobaud to enabled, port_type to dialin, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports), control_lines to both, input_ow_control to eia, output_ow_control to eia, need_dsr to disabled, bidirectional_modem to enabled, and broadcast_direction to port. Dialinout sets mode to adaptive, port_type to dialin, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports), control_lines to both, input_ow_control to eia, output_ow_control to eia, need_dsr to disabled, bidirectional_modem to enabled, and broadcast_direction to port.
sets mode to slave, port_type to dialin, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports), control_lines to both, input_ow_control to eia, output_ow_control to eia, need_dsr to disabled, bidirectional_modem to enabled, and broadcast_direction to network.
Dialout
19-68
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Autodetect sets mode to auto_detect, port_type to dialin, autobaud to enabled, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports), control_lines to both, input_ow_control to eia, output_ow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled, bidirectional_modem to enabled, and broadcast_direction to port. Autoadapt sets mode to auto_autoadapt, port_type to dialin, autobaud to enabled, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports), control_lines to both, input_ow_control to eia, output_ow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled, bidirectional_modem to disabled, and broadcast_direction to port. Ipx sets mode to ipx, port_type to dialin, autobaud to enabled, speed to 115200 (or the highest speed that the hardware supports), control_lines to both, input_ow_control to eia, output_ow_control to eia, need_dsr to enabled, bidirectional_modem to disabled, and broadcast_direction to port.
You can set any parameter included in port_modem_cong separately. For example, you can choose dialin and then change the speed parameter to 57600. This change effects port_modem_cong in the following way: Each time you use a command that reads port_modem_congs value, the Annex tries to match the individual parameter values to existing port_modem_cong settings. If parameter values match, Annex Manager displays the appropriate value for port_modem_cong. If you have changed one or more parameter values so that they do not match port_modem_cong values, Annex Manager displays unknown. Unknown appears only under this circumstance. You cannot choose unknown for port_modem_cong.
19-69
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5

port_multisession
Async none, dialinautobaud, dialin, dialinoutautobaud, dialinout, dialout, autodetect, autoadapt, ipx none Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal
allows you to select ports that will display two active windows. You can use this parameter only for ports on which the VCI command interface is congured. To use the multisession feature, you must:

port_password
Have a valid LAT key. Enter enabled for the multisession parameter. Enter enabled for the multisession_port parameter. Reset an Annex if you change values for the multisession parameters.
Async enabled or disabled disabled VCI_Interface
denes a port password for local password protection. You can use this password as a back-up for host-based security if the security servers do not respond, or as an additional line of security after you enter a user name and password. For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this value as set or unset. If you use SecurID, set port_password to a null string (" "). Please refer to the Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX for more information about SecureID.
Async 0 to 15 characters unset Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal
19-70
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
port_server_security
enables a host-based security policy for access to the port through the port server. If you enter enabled, only authorized users can access the port.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal, Security
port_tcp_keepalive
overrides tcp_keepalive for connections to the host from adaptive, CLI, and dedicated ports, and for connections from the host to slave and adaptive ports. You can use 0 (Annex Managers default value) to specify that the keep-alive time is the value set in the tcp_keepalive parameter, or 255 to disable the keepalive mechanism for the port.
Async 0 to 255 minutes 0 minutes Async Port, Command Line Editing
port_type
denes the type of device attached to a port.

Async hardwired, dialin, x25, tn3270, pc, terminal, printer, modem hardwired Async Port, Command Line Editing, Dedicated Port, Modem
port_user_name
denes a default user name for this port.

Async 0 to 16 characters (null string) Async Port, Security
19-71
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
ppp_acm
species which of the rst 32 bytes (0x0 to 0x1F) of the ASCII character set can be sent as clear text and which should be protocol-escaped.
Async 8 character hexadecimal 00000000 Async Port, PPP
ppp_ipx_network
denes a unique network number for an IPX PPP connection assigned to a specic port. The number is negotiated when the IPX PPP connection is established. If the number at one end is zero (0), the number at the other end will be used. You can enter an 8-digit hexadecimal number here.
Async 0x00000001 to 0xFFFFFFFF 00000000 Async Port, PPP
ppp_ipx_node
denes a unique node number for an IPX PPP connection assigned to a specic port. You can enter a 12-digit hexadecimal number here, using dashes to separate sets of two numbers (e.g., 00-00-00-00-00-00). You cannot use a number that has 1 in the last bit of the rst octet, since these numbers are reserved for multicast addresses, or 0xFF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF, which is reserved as a broadcast node address.
Async 0x00-00-00-00-00-00 to 0xFF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FE 00-00-00-00-00-00 Async Port, PPP
ppp_mru
denes the maximum receive unit (MRU) that the Annex requests as its local MRU.
Async 64 to 1500 1500 Async Port, PPP
19-72
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
ppp_ncp
species the protocols that run on the interface. The Annex negotiates only for those protocols that are specied here. You can select a single protocol, all protocols, or a combination of two protocols from the following list:
all ipcp atcp ipxcp ipcp-atcp ipcp-ipxcp atcp-ipxcp

ppp_password_remote
Async all, ipcp, atcp, ipxcp, ipcp-atcp, ipcp-ipxcp, atcp-ipxcp ipcp Async Port, PPP
denes a PPP port users password For security reasons, Annex Manager displays this parameters value as set or unset.
Async 0 to 16 characters unset Async Port, PPP, Security
ppp_security_protocol
denes the security check for the peer that the Annex requires before it starts the network control protocol. If the Annex wants to use security and the peer refuses, the Annex closes the link. You can enter:
chap pap
to use challenge-handshake protocol.
to use password authentication protocol.
chap/pap
to use both challenge-handshake protocol and password authentication protocol.
none.
19-73
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5

ppp_username_remote
Async chap, pap, chap/pap, none none Async Port, PPP, Security
contains the username by which the Annex identies itself when the remote PPP peer asks for authentication.
Async 0 to 15 characters (null string) Async Port, Basic Annex, PPP, Security
pref_DHCP1_addr
contains the IP address of the DHCP server that the client attempts to use as the primary source for DHCP services. When enabled, the client broadcasts DHCP messages.
Annex IP Address n/a Annex Only
pref_DHCP2_addr
contains the IP address of the DHCP server that the client attempts to use as the backup source for DHCP services when the primary DHCP server does not respond. When enabled, the client broadcasts DHCP messages.
Annex IP Address n/a Annex Only
19-74
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
pref_dump_addr
contains an IP address for the preferred dump host. This is the host to which the Annex rst tries to dump.
Annex IP address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Basic Annex
pref_load_addr
species the IP address for the preferred load host. This is the host from which the Annex rst requests a load of its operational code. You should set this address to the boot hosts IP address.
Annex IP address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Basic Annex
pref_name1_addr
contains the IP address of the host specied in the name_server_1 parameter.

Annex IP address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Modem
pref_name2_addr
contains the IP address of the host listed in the name_server_2 parameter or the address of a back-up host that serves if name_server_2 is set to none.
Annex IP address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Modem
19-75
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
pref_secure1_host
contains the IP address of the security server to which the Annex rst sends security requests. This parameter works only if the enable_security parameter is set to enabled.
Annex IP address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Security
pri_analog_encoding
denes the coding type of an incoming analog (modem) call. If you choose auto, the ISDN Primary Rate Annex sets the coding type to mu_law (US) or a_law (Europe).
Annex auto, mu_law, a_law auto DS1 Line, PRI Line
pri_block_in_calls
facilitates ISDN Primary Rate Annex shutdown by automating incoming call attrition. If you choose enabled, existing calls are allowed to terminate but new incoming calls are blocked.
Annex enabled or disabled disable DS1 Line, PRI Line
pri_block_out_calls
facilitates ISDN Primary Rate Annex shutdown by automating outgoing call attrition. If you choose enabled, existing calls are allowed to terminate but new outgoing calls are blocked.
Annex enabled or disabled disable DS1 Line, PRI Line
19-76
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
pri_dsx1_line_length
denes the length, in meters, of the line from an ISDN Primary Rate Annex to an external CSU. The value is used when a dsx1 line driver is congured. Use the default value for an Annex with an internal CSU.
Annex r0-25, r26-65, r66-100, r101-135, r136-165, r166-185, r186-210 r0-25 DS1 Line, PRI Line
pri_ip_addr
denes the IP address for the remote end of a connection on a B channel. This parameter works only when the CallDef_mode parameter is set to autodetect, slip, or ppp.
Annex IP Address 0.0.0.0 DSO Channel, Channel
pri_ipx_network
denes a unique network number for an IPX PPP connection to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. The number is negotiated when the IPX PPP connection is established. If the number at one end is zero (0), the number at the other end will be used. You can enter an 8-digit hexadecimal number here.
Annex 0x 00000001to 0xFFFFFFFF 00000000 DSO Channel, Channel
pri_ipx_node
denes a unique node number for an IPX PPP connection to an ISDN Primary Rate Annex. You can enter a 12 digit hexadecimal number here, using dashes to separate sets of two numbers (e.g., 00-00-00-00-00-00). You cannot use a number that has 1 in the last bit of the rst octet, since these numbers are reserved for multicast addresses, or 0xFF-FF_FF_FF_FF_FF, which is reserved as a broadcast node address.
Annex 0x00-00-00-00-00-00 to 0xFF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FE 00-00-00-00-00-00 DSO Channel, Channel
19-77
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
pri_switch_type
denes the kind of switch the ISDN Primary Rate Annex uses.

printer_crlf
5ESS ni2
for At&Ts 5ESS switch.
for the switch that supports National ISDN2. for Nortels DMS100 switch.
dms100 default
to set the switch value to the default string ( ).
other if the Annex you chose is operating outside the United States.
Annex att5ESS, ni2, dms100, default, other att5ESS DS1 Line, PRI Line
converts a carriage return to a carriage return followed by a line feed before it is sent to the printer. If you enter disabled, a carriage return translates to a carriage return followed by a null string.
Printer enabled or disabled disabled Printer Port
printer_hardware_tabs
controls whether the Annex sends tab characters to a printer. If you enter disabled, the Annex converts a tab character to the corresponding number of spaces.
printer_host
species the IP address or fully qualied domain name of a machine running a Berkeley-style lpd server. The tn3270 command uses this server for the printscreen function.
Async IP address or domain name 0.0.0.0 Async Port, TN3270
19-78
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
printer_map_to_upper
allows an Annex to convert lower case characters to upper case before it transmits characters to a printer. This parameter is used for older printers that do not support lower case characters.
printer_name
species the printer used by the tn3270 commands print-screen function. You must enter a name listed in the /etc/printcap le on the remote host by the printer_host parameter. Please refer to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX for more information.
Async Printer name from /etc/printcap le (null string) Async Port, TN3270
printer_tcp_keepalive
overrides tcp_keepalive for connections from applications such as aprint or rtelnet to one or more printer ports. If you use 0 (Annex Managers default value), the keep-alive timer uses the value set by the tcp_keepalive parameter. You can enter 255 to disable the keep-alive mechanism for the printer port.
Printer 0 to 255 minutes 0 minutes Printer Port, Command Line Editing
printer_type
species the type of printer attached to the port.

Printer centronics or dataproducts centronics Printer Port, Command Line Editing
19-79
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
printer_width
sets the maximum number of characters per line. If you enter 0, the Annex does not insert a new line into the data stream.
Printer 0 to 132 characters 0 Printer Port, PPP
prompt
denes the CLI prompt for a specic port. This parameter uses formatting codes consisting of the percent character and a single lowercase letter. You can combine these codes (e.g. %a%c), using up to 16 codes. In addition, you can enter text that will appear in the prompt as long as your entire entry does not exceed 32 characters. You can enter:

%a to display Annex. % c to display a colon and a space. %d to display the date and time (e.g., Mon Mar 14 13:59:42 1996). %i to display an Annexs IP address. %j to display a new line character. %l to display the ports location. If no location is dened, the port number (e.g., port 10) appears. %n to display an Annexs name or its IP address. %p to display the port number of a virtual CLI connection number preceded by v. %r to display port. %s to display a space. %t to display the current time. %u to display the ports user name.
Annex %a, %c, %d, %i, %j. %l, %n, %p, %s, %t, %u Value in cli_prompt parameter Annex Only, Basic Async Port
19-80
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
ps_history_buffer
is used with the telnet command to indicate how much incoming data a slave port keeps in a buffer. Incoming data is buffered continuously before, during, and after the Telnet session. The port must be reset after you change this parameter value.
Async 0 to 32767 0 Async Ports, Basic Async Port
redisplay_line
denes the reprint line character for CLI users.

Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + R (displays as ^R) Async Port, Command_Line_Editing
remote_address
contains the IP address for a host at the other end of the serial line. This parameter works only when the mode parameter is set to autodetect, slip or ppp.
Async IP address 0.0.0.0 Async Port, PPP, SLIP
reset_idle_time_on
denes whether input or output resets the idle timer. The idle time is the time lapse between activity and inactivity at the device. This parameter works with the who command.
Async input or output input Async Port, Idle Timer
19-81
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
retrans_limit
indicates the number of times an Annex retransmits a packet before it noties a user about a network failure. This parameter works only for the LAT protocol.
ring
controls the audible ring for incoming calls. You can use this parameter only when you select wink or immediate for sigproto.
T1 DS0 enabled or disabled T1_DS0
rip_accept
denes the networks for which the Annex accepts advertised routes. You can enter all, none, or a list of one to eight IP addresses in decimal format, preceded by include or exclude.
Interface all, none, or one to eight IP addresses preceded by include or exclude n/a Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
rip_advertise
denes the networks for which the Annex will advertise routes. You can enter all, none, or a list of one to eight IP addresses in decimal format, preceded by include or exclude.
Interface all, none, or one to eight IP addresses preceded by include or exclude all Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
19-82
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
rupiahs
contains the password that controls authentication for RIP packets. Annex Manager displays this parameters value as set if you enter the password here, or as unset if you enter a null string. Unset indicates that authentication is turned off and that all RIP packets are accepted.
Annex 16 characters (null string) Annex Only, Routing
rip_default_route
allows an Annex to advertise that it is the default router. You can enter a number from 1 to 15 to indicate the hop count that will be advertised. Entering 0 turns off the advertisement.
Interface 0 through 15 0 Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
rip_horizon
controls the split horizon algorithm for RIP. You can enter:
off
to disable split horizon.
split
to enable split horizon without poison. Split horizon prevents a route from being advertised over the interface on which it was learned.
poison to enable split horizon with poison reverse. Poison reverse advertises the route over the interface on which it was learned, but sets the hop count to 16.

rip_next_hop
Interface off, split, poison poison Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
species whether the next hop value is included in RIP version 2 advertisements.
Interface never, needed, always needed Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
19-83
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
rip_recv_version
controls the RIP versions that an Annex accepts. You can enter:

rip_routers
1 2
to accept version 1 packets only. to accept version 2 packets only. to accept version 1 and 2 packets.
both
Interface 1, 2, both both Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
lets you force RIP to send periodic updates to a router list instead of broadcasting updates. You can enter the IP addresses of one to eight directly reachable routers, or you can enter all to restore broadcasting. The Annex ignores any address that is not on an attached subnet.
Annex IP address, all all Annex Only, Routing
rip_send_version
controls the RIP versions that an Annex sends over IP interfaces You can choose:

rip_sub_accept
rip-1 rip-2
to send version 1 packets to the broadcast address. to send version 2 packets to the RIP multicast address. to send version 2 packets to the broadcast address.
compatibility
Interface 1, 2, compatibility compatibility Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
controls whether subnet routes are accepted over the SLIP, PPP, and Ethernet interfaces. You can enter enabled to accept subnet routes or disabled to reject them.
Interface enabled or disabled enabled Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
19-84
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
rip_sub_advertise
controls whether the Annex advertises subnet routes over the SLIP, PPP, and Ethernet interfaces.
Interface enabled or disabled disabled Enet Port, Async Port, Routing
routed
determines whether the RIP routing daemon is enabled. When you enter enabled, the Annex performs active RIP routing only if option_key is set to the correct value. If option_key is not set correctly, the Annex performs passive RIP routing when the daemon is enabled. If you enter disabled, no RIP routing occurs. If you disable the RIP routing daemon and the Annex does not reside on the same subnetwork as the Annex Managers host, you will not be able to contact the Annex after you reboot it or after you reset the routing subsystem.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Basic Annex, Routing
rts_signal
controls the RTS (Request to Send) signal for the port. Entering a value for an idle port produces an error condition.
If you change the value for this parameter and then reset a port or reboot an Annex, the parameter will return to its original default value. Therefore, you must press Cancel in the Reset Parameters window to prevent the reset process and to use the parameter values you entered.
Async unknown, high, low unknown Async Port
19-85
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
rwhod
determines whether the Annex listens for RWHO broadcasts when it builds the host table.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Modem
security_broadcast
determines whether an Annex broadcasts for security validation if the preferred security servers are not available.
Annex enabled or disabled enabled Annex Only, Security
server_capability
denes an Annex as a le server host. You can enter:

all to dene the Annex as a le server for the conguration, operational image, and message-of-the-day les. cong to dene the Annex as a le server for conguration les. image to dene the Annex as a le server for Annex operational
code.
motd to dene the Annex as a le server for the message-of-the-
day le.
none
to indicate that the Annex is not a le server.
Annex all, cong, image, motd, none none Annex Only, Basic Annex
19-86
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
server_name
names the Annex in the LAT protocol. The name you enter should match the VMS hosts node name used in the HIC conguration le. Annex Managers default value is LAT followed by the physical ethernet address (for example, LAT_080002BF0020).
Annex 1 to 16 characters LAT + physical ethernet address Annex Only, LAT
service_limit
indicates the maximum number of services that an Annex can maintain in its local service table. When the table is full, the Annex removes the service that has been idle longest. If all services are busy and the table is full, the Annex discards a new service.
session_limit_annex
species the maximum number of active sessions the Annex allows at one time.
session_limit_port
species the maximum number of active sessions the Annex allows on a port at one time. You can enter -1 to indicate that there is no maximum set.
Async -1 to 16 3s Async Port, Basic Async Port,
19-87
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
short_break
allows an Annex to return a user to the CLI prompt after receiving a break of less than two seconds.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, Idle Timer
sigproto
indicates the signal protocols supported by each DS0 T1 channel.

Type Values
Default Lists
slip_allow_dump
T1 DS0 loop-loop, loop-none, none-loop, ground-ground, groundnone, none-ground, wink-wink, wink-none, none-wink, immed-none, none-immed, none-none. loop-loop T1_DS0
enables an Annex to dump its operational code across a SLIP link.

Async Port enabled or disabled enabled Async Port, SLIP
slip_load_dump_host
contains the IP address of the host from which an Annex receives a load or to which it sends dumps over the SLIP interface. If you entered sl and a number in load_dump_sequence, you must enter a valid address here. This parameters value overrides values in pref_load_addr and pref_dump_addr.
Async IP address 0.0.0.0 Async Port, SLIP
slip_mtu_size
sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size on a SLIP/CSLIP port. This parameter forces the SLIP interface to use large (1006) or small (256) MTUs.
Async large or small small Async Port, SLIP
19-88
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
slip_no_icmp
discards ICMP packets directed to the SLIP link. This parameter allows the Annex to reduce unnecessary trafc and messages over the SLIP link.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, SLIP
slip_ppp_security
controls dial-up SLIP/PPP access. When enable_security and slip_ppp_security are set to enabled, ports congured for SLIP and PPP will use the ACP security server. The Annex determines whether CLI users are authorized to execute SLIP or PPP commands.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, PPP, SLIP, Security
slip_subnet_mask
contains the Annexs IP subnet mask for a SLIP interface. The parameters default is based on the network portion of the Annexs IP address. Setting this parameter incorrectly can cause routing problems.
Async IP address 0.0.0.0 Async Port, SLIP
slip_tos
allows an Annex to send interactive trafc (such as telnet, rlogin, and ftp control sessions) before it sends other trafc. This parameter provides a type-of-service based SLIP queuing.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port, SLIP
19-89
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
speed
denes the baud rate of the asynchronous line between a device and an Annex. The value you enter must match the devices baud rate. If you want line speed to be determined automatically, use the autobaud parameter. If you enter disabled in the autobaud parameter, you must enter a value here. Not all Annexes support all port speeds. Please refer to your Annex hardware guides for detailed information.
Async 2000, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115,200, and others 9600 Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem
stop_bits
species the number of stop bits for a port.

Async one, two, one-and-half, dynamic one Async Port, Basic Async Port, Modem, Modem Internal
subnet_mask
contains the Annexs IP subnet mask. The parameters default is based on the network portion of the Annexs IP address. Setting this parameter incorrectly can cause routing problems.
Annex Only IP address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Basic Annex
sysContact
identies the contact person for this managed node, including information on how to contact this person.
Type Default Values Lists
Annex n/a 0 to 255 characters Annex Only
19-90
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
sysLocation
identies the physical location of this node (e.g., third oor lab).
sysName
contains this nodes fully-qualied domain name.

sys_location
supplies host location or identication information for the LAT protocol.

Annex 0 to 32 characters (null string) Annex Only, LAT
syslog_facility
denes the local facility to which the Unix syslogd daemon sends Annex syslog messages. Please refer to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX for a detailed syslog conguration description, and to your Unix system documentation.
Annex log_local0 to log_local7 log_local7 Annex Only, Syslog
syslog_host
contains the IP address of the host that logs Annex messages. If you use Annex Managers default setting (0.0.0.0), the Annex broadcasts its log messages.
Annex IP Address 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, SysLog
19-91
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
syslog_mask
determines the priority levels that the Annex logs. You can enter all, none, a single option from the list below, or a combination of options separated by commas (e.g., emergency, alert). The following list includes options in priority order. You can enter:
emergency alert
to log hardware failures.
to log all Annex reboots.
critical to log conguration and initialization problems such as conguration le format errors or lack of memory. error
to log all line initialization errors, including CLI errors. to log minor problems.
warning notice
to log time server queries and information about responses. created by
info to start and end CLI sessions and Annex jobs rlogin, telnet, connect, ping and tap commands. debug
to start and end any Annex process.
For more information about event logging, please refer to the Remote Annex Administrators Guide for UNIX.
syslog_port
Annex emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notice, info, debug, all, none none (disables logging) Annex Only, SysLog
routes syslog messages to an asynchronous port where messages are time and date stamped. You can enter 0 for syslogging to take place over the network, or a number to indicate the port to which syslog messages are sent.
Annex 0 or a port number 0 Annex Only, SysLog
19-92
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
t1_info
contains information about the T1 line supplied by the telephone company.

T1 DS1 0 to 16 characters n/a T1_DS1
tcp_keepalive
species the length of time a TCP connection must be idle before an Annex sends keep-alive messages. A keep-alive message contains no data, but solicits an acknowledgment from the other end of a connection to determine whether the connection is still active. If the recipient does not acknowledge the message after eight retries, the Annex drops the connection. You can use 0 (Annex Managers default value) to set the keep-alive time to 120 minutes, or you can enter 255 to disable the keep-alive mechanism. The port_tcp_keepalive and printer_tcp_keepalive parameters override values in this parameter for those individual ports.
Annex 0 to 255 minutes 0 minutes Annex Only, Basic Annex
tdi_distance
indicates the length of the cable that runs between the equipment and the Drop and Insert Interface.
T1 DS1 1 to 655 feet 1 foot T1_DS1
tdi_framing
selects the superframe format used on the T1 Drop and Insert Interface. If there is terminal equipment on this interface, your selection must match the terminal equipments format.
T1 DS1 esf, d4 esf T1_DS1
19-93
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
tdi_line_code
selects the line code format used on the T1 Drop and Insert Interface. Your selection must match the codes assigned to the terminal equipment.
T1DS1 b8zs, ami b8zs T1_DS1
telnet_crlf
converts a carriage return in a Telnet session to a carriage return followed by a line feed. If you enter disabled, a carriage return translates to a carriage return followed by a null string.
telnet_escape
denes the character that returns a CLI user to the telnet prompt. You can press Ctrl and enter U to disable the telnet escape character.
Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + ] (displays as ^]) Async Port, Command Line Editing
term_var
identies the type of terminal using the CLI connection. You must enter a valid terminal type for the host. The Annex passes the terminal type setting to the host.
Async 0 to 16 characters (null string) Async Port, Basic Async
19-94
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
tftp_dump_name
provides the file name used to dump an Annexs core image via tftp if the Annex operational image and erpcd fail. This parameter must include the entire path of the dump file, including parent directories. The file you enter must exist with read/write permissions.
Annex path and le name n/a Annex Only, Basic Annex
tftp_load_dir
contains the string that precedes all files (e.g., image name, configuration, and motd files) when you boot an Annex via tftp. This strings value is determined by the system serving the tftp requests. It does not precede the tftp_dump_name.
Annex provided by tftp system n/a Annex Only, Basic Annex
time_broadcast
denes whether the Annex broadcasts for the current time if the preferred load host is not available or does not provide a time server.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Time of Day
19-95
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
time_server_addr
lists the IP address that an Annex queries for time service. You can enter:

timezone_minuteswest
A loopback address (127.0.0.1) to disable time service queries. A host address to send queries to a specic host. A broadcast address to send queries to a specic network or networks instead of sending a general broadcast to all networks.
0.0.0.0
to direct the Annex to query the boot host.
Annex loopback address, host address, broadcast address, 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Annex Only, Time of Day
denes the time zone in which the Annex resides. You can enter a positive number of minutes for time zones west of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or a negative number for time zones east of GMT. For example, you would enter 300 for U.S. Eastern Standard Time, which is ve hours west of GMT, or -60 for Paris, which is one hour east of GMT.
Annex positive or negative number of minutes 300 Annex Only, Time of Day
tmux_delay
provides the maximum number of milliseconds during which small packets can accumulate to form larger packets. When the time expires, the multiplexed packet is sent. Entering 0 sets this parameter to 20 (Annex Managers default value).
Annex 0 through 255 20 Annex Only, TMux
19-96
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
tmux_enable
controls whether an Annex uses TMux to multiplex small TCP or UDP packets into a single IP packet. The host must support TMux. If you choose enabled and the host does not support TMux, the Annex will not support multiplexing.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, TMux
tmux_max_host
species the maximum number of host addresses allowed in the TMux address table. If the number of host addresses exceeds the number you enter here, the Annex discards the oldest entry.
tmux_max_mpx
species the largest user packet that can be placed in a TMux packet. The Annex does not multiplex larger packets, but passes them directly to the IP layer.
tni_circuit_id
contains the transmission vendors circuit identier used for customer service calls.
T1 DS1 0 to 128 characters T1_DS1
19-97
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
tni_clock
denes the transmit clock for the T1 Network Interface. You can select:

tni_esf_fdl
looptiming
to use the recovered receive clock at the transmit to use the local clock as the transmit clock.
clock.
localtiming
throughtiming to use the recovered receive clock from the other interface as the transmit clock.
T1 DS1 looptiming, localtiming, throughtiming looptiming T1_DS1
denes the protocol used by the telephone company to read the statistics maintained by an Annex and perform diagnostic tests. You can select none, att, ansi, or other.
T1 DS1, PRI none, att, ansi, or other att T1_DS1, PRI Line
tni_framing
selects the superframe format used on the T1 Network Interface. Your selection must match the format supplied by the telephone company.
T1 DS1 esf, d4 esf T1_DS1
tni_line_buildout
contains the cable loss measurement, in decibels, between the last T1 signal regenerator and your location. This measurement is supplied by the telephone company at installation. You need to adjust your buildout based on this measurement.
T1 DS1, PRI 0_db, 7.5_db, 15_db, 22.5_db 0_db T1_DS1, PRI Line
19-98
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
tni_line_code
selects the line code format used on the T1 Network Interface. Your selection must match the codes supplied by the telephone company.
T1 DS1 b8zs, ami b8zs T1_DS1
tni_loop_bak_cong
denes the DS1 interfaces loopback conguration. Users cannot access T1 lines when you change this parameters value. You can select:
noloop
to prevent the signal from looping through the T1 engine.
payloadloop to allow the incoming signal to be looped through the T1 engine after it passes through the framing function. lineloop to cause the incoming signal to loop to the network without passing through the T1 engine. localloop to
cause the T1 engines outgoing signal to loop back to the incoming side. T1 lines are available to users only when you choose
noloop.

tni_ones_density
T1 DS1 noloop, payloadloop, lineloop, localloop noloop T1_DS1
disables the T1 engines built-in ones density monitor. When you select enabled, this monitor provides the network with the correct number of pulses. You should select enabled here when you set the tni_line_code parameter to ami.
T1 DS1 enabled or disabled disabled T1_DS1
19-99
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
toggle_output
denes the character that ushes the output buffer for CLI users.
Async Ctrl + any character Ctrl + O (displays as Ô) Async Port, Command Line Editing
vci_autobaud
indicates whether the Annex automatically detects line speed when a connection is opened and whether it sets matching terminal port characteristics on the next login. This parameter works only when the DECServer command interface is congured (i.e., when cli_interface is set to vci). For more information, please refer to the Annex Interface for VMS Environments Administrators Guide.
Async enabled or disabled disabled Async Port
vci_login_port_ password
enables the port password when the DECServer command interface is congured (i.e., when cli_interface is set to vci). For more information, please refer to the Annex Interface for VMS Environments Administrators Guide.
vci_login_timeout
enables a login timer when the DECServer command interface is congured (i.e., when cli_interface is set to vci). For more information, please refer to the Annex Interface for VMS Environments Administrators Guide.
19-100
Part 5
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
vcli_groups
specifies which remote group code is assigned to virtual CLI users. All virtual CLI users have the same group code. You can enter all to enable all groups, none to disable all groups, a series of numbers separated by commas (e.g., 1, 5, 7), or a range of numbers separated by dashes (e.g. 1, 5, 200-255).
Annex all, none, numbers between 0 and 255 none Annex Only, LAT
vcli_password
denes a password required for virtual CLI connections to the Annex and as a back-up to host-based security. This parameter serves as host-based security backup: the Annex requests a password on a virtual CLI connection if the security server does not respond. For local password protection, you can set enable_security to enabled, choose disabled for vcli_security, and enter a password here.
Annex 0 to 15 characters unset Annex Only, Security, Virtual CLI
vcli_security
controls user validation on virtual CLI connections to and from an Annex. If you choose enabled, the Annex enables connection security for all virtual CLI connections and executes the same user validation, including user name and password, that it uses with CLI security on asynchronous ports. This parameter works with host-based security only if you set enable_security to enabled.
Annex enabled or disabled disabled Annex Only, Security, Virtual CLI
19-101
Chapter 19
Annex Parameters
Part 5
zone
provides the AppleTalk zone name that the Annex uses at start-up. You must use spaces to separate zone names (e.g., general engineering lab). To escape embedded spaces, use the backslash (\).
Annex 0 to 32 characters (null string) Annex Only, AppleTalk
19-102
Chapter 20 Troubleshooting
his section provides answers to the questions frequently asked by Annex Manager users.
Starting Annex Manager
Annex Managers startup procedure reads all the parameter, group denitions, and other data les. This may take several seconds or more, depending on your workstation and its current load. Annex Manager displays an in-progress message to indicate that it is initializing its database.
Not Reachable Status
REACHABLE
You may try to connect to an Annex and receive the NOT message. This may be caused by one of the conditions described below. If you check these situations and still cannot connect to the Annex, call technical support. Did you enter a correct Annex name or IP address? Annex Manager can connect to an Annex if the name or IP address you entered are correct. The Annex name you enter must match a name in the Annex in the local /etc/hosts le. Is the Annex booted? Open a direct connection to an Annex through one of its asynchronous ports. You should be able to log onto the Annex and run CLI commands. If you cannot log on, try to reboot the Annex. Can you reach the Annex from the Annex Manager's workstation? Use the ping or telnet commands to reach the Annex from a window on Annex Manager's workstation. If you cannot do this, you may not have a path from your workstation to the Annex in the network.
20-1
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting
Part 5
Is the SNMP agent running on the Annex? Annex Manager cannot communicate with an Annex unless the Annex is running the SNMP daemon process. You should use the su CLI command to go to the superuser or administrative mode from the direct connection to the Annex, and then use the proc CLI command to nd a line for the snmpd process. For example, this line may read:
407 0 S0 7e8d0 103c 7f7f4 12 12 0 18 0:00.017 ? snmpd.
If there is no snmpd process: Check the Annex's conguration le to make sure there is at least one snmp community dened. Reboot the Annex if you change the conguration le. Check the disabled_modules parameter using the admin or na tool. If this parameter indicates that SNMP is disabled, the Annex discards SNMP messages. You should remove snmp from the parameters list of disabled modules and reboot the Annex.
Did you enter the correct community name? The community name you enter must match an entry in the Annex's conguration le. Check the conguration le and look for all snmp community denitions. The Annex can have up to four different community names.
Are the Annex and Annex Manager's workstation on different subnetworks? Using the superuser proc CLI command, check to see if the routed process is running. If it is not, the Annex may not be able to reply to the messages received from Annex Manager. Use the superuser admin CLI command to change the routed conguration parameter to yes and reboot the Annex.
20-2
Part 5
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting
Annex Manager Command Availability
Annex Manager provides Setup and Customize modes. Customize mode includes all commands except Setup mode windows. Setup mode does not include the View Script, Create Script, Execute Script, Compare, Copy, Set, Show, User-dened Parameter Groups and Site Parameters commands. To use these commands, you must select Customize from the Mode menu.
Show and Set Commands
Annex Manager may prevent you from changing parameter values based on the value of the allow_snmp_sets parameter. If allow_snmp_sets is set to disabled, you can use the telnet command to reach the Annex and run the superuser admin CLI command to set allow_snmp_sets to yes. The Annex default value does not allow changes to conguration parameters through SNMP. Annex Manager and the Annex SNMP agent use SNMP version 1. The only security check performed by the SNMP agent is to match the community string in an incoming SNMP packet with the dened community strings for the Annex. Since the community string in the SNMP packet is transmitted in the clear, there is a potential security risk in allowing changes to the conguration through SNMP messages. If you wish to congure the Annex using Annex Manager, please be aware of this situation.
20-3
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting
Part 5
Returning to Previous Setup mode Window
Because Setup mode windows display based on your selections in previous windows, you cannot display a second window and then return to another window. For example, you must close the General (continued) window in order to return to the General window. In addition, you must close all Setup mode windows to return to the main window.
Saving All Conguration Parameters
To save all parameter values for an Annex, use the Create Script command and select all parameters and all ports on the Annex. This may take some time for Annexes with a large number of asynchronous ports.
Saving Parameters in Scripts
Some Annex conguration parameters include sensitive information. These parameters include all the Annex and port password parameters, the option key that applies only for a specic Annex, and the Annex's IP address.
Parameter does not exist Message?
Not all parameters apply to all Annex hardware congurations or all software releases. Since Annex Manager must support all parameters for all Annex hardware and software, you may see this message when you compare one Annexs port conguration to a port on a different Annex, when you copy parameters from one Annex to another, or when you use the Show or Set commands.
20-4
Part 5
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting
SNMP Communication
In order for Annex Manager to communicate with an Annex, the Annex's SNMP agent must be up and the specied community string must match one of the Annexs community strings. To perform operations which will change parameters (e.g., the Set command), the allow_snmp_sets parameter on the Annex must be set to Y (Yes). You can set this parameter only by using the non-SNMP na and admin tools.
OpenLook/OpenWindow Issues
When you run Annex Manager in an OpenLook/OpenWindows environment, make sure that the latest xnews server patch is installed. If the application appears to hang after simple actions like a menu selection, it is likely that the xnews server and OpenLook window manager are causing the problem.
OpenLook Window Manager Close Menu Item
Do not use the OpenLook Window Manager Close menu option from the menu bar. Use the Annex Manager Close buttons instead. If you use the OpenLook Window Manager menu option, Annex Manager will terminate unexpectedly. This termination is not always immediate.
Ethernet Interface Numbering
Annex Manager numbers the ethernet interfaces starting with 1. The na and admin tools number the ethernet interfaces starting with 0 (zero).
20-5
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting
Part 5
BadWindow Error on Startup
Some X window terminals (possibly depending on the type of Xserver or on other applications which have been run recently), will display a BadWindow error when you start Annex Manager. Currently, the only known way to clear this problem is to reset the X window server. Annex Manager will then come up correctly.
Initialization Window
Some window managers require that a window be placed once it appears as an outline. If you use such a window manager, and the Annex Manager main window is not placed within a few seconds, the initialization window may appear as a small sliver. You can expand this window. It will disappear automatically when Annex Manager completes its start up.
Cut and Paste
Some operating systems seem to have a problem cutting and pasting text from one portion of a window to another. This issue does not seem to be exclusive to Annex Manager.
Help on File Selection Windows
When you use F1 or Help to display help on a le selection window, the you cannot acknowledge the help window until you complete the le selection window action.
Set Command Issues
You may experience intermittent problems with setting a large number of parameters on multiple Annexes. Using the SNMP Information command to increase the timeout value may reduce the frequency of the problem.
20-6
Part 5
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting
Modifying or Deleting Parameter Groups
Any user with write access to Annex Manager data les (i.e., who has the ability to create, modify, or delete parameter groups) can modify any parameter group even if the user did not create the le.
Resetting Modems
If you encounter problems resetting modems using the Reset commands or the Modem windows in the Setup mode, increasing the SNMP timeout values may alleviate this problem.
Boot Status
Annex Manager does not automatically update the current status of each Annex (e.g., NOT REACHABLE) when you attempt a boot operation. You must select Verify Annex State from the Status menu to determine the current status.
MOP Issues
If the Annex has booted from a MOP host, the Annex Information window shows the boot host address as 0.0.0.0.
20-7
Chapter 20
Troubleshooting
Part 5
20-8
Index
A
a_router parameter 19-2 acp_key parameter 19-2 alarmsyslog parameter 19-2 allow_broadcast parameter 19-2 allow_compression parameter 19-3 Annex lists 4-5 to 4-17 automatic 4-5 to 4-6 changing 4-9 creating 4-7 to 4-8 obtaining Annex information from 4-11 opening saved lists 4-16 to 4-17 saving 4-15 to 4-16 selecting Annexes from 4-8 See also Save Annex List and Open Annex List commands Annex Manager windows 3-1 Cancel 3-11 Confirmation 3-10 File Selection 3-7 to 3-8 Help 3-14 to 3-20 overview of 3-2 to 3-3 Reset Parameters 3-12 secondary 3-6 to 3-12 Warning 3-13 Annex Status command 17-1 to 17-5 displaying the window 17-2 loading box 17-3 mbufs box 17-4 memory box 17-4 push buttons 17-5 understanding the window 17-3 to 17-5 arap_v42bis parameter 19-3 Async Port Status command 17-5 to 17-10 displaying the window 17-5 to 17-6 entering port information 17-7 port information box 17-8 port totals box 17-7 push buttons 17-10 step-by-step instructions 17-10 understanding the window 17-6 to 17-10 Async Ports window 7-2 at_guest parameter 19-3, 19-8 at_nodeid parameter 19-3 at_security parameter 19-4 attn_string parameter 19-4 authoritative_agent parameter 19-4 authorized_groups parameter 19-4 autobaud parameter 19-5
B
backward_key parameter 19-5 banner parameter 19-5 bidirectional_modem parameter 19-6 Boot command 16-1 to 16-9 displaying the window 16-2 messages 16-6 options 16-3 push buttons 16-5 step-by-step instructions 16-6 to 16-9 text fields 16-4 to 16-5 understanding the window 16-3 to 16-6 Broadcast command 16-15 to 16-18 choosing a broadcast destination 16-17 displaying the window 16-16 push buttons 16-18 step-by-step instructions 16-18 understanding the window 16-16 to 1617 writing a message 16-17 broadcast_addr parameter 19-6 broadcast_direction parameter 19-6 bypass 19-6
C
Call Defaults window 8-3 to 8-10 CallDef_allow_broadcast parameter 19-7 CallDef_allow_compression parameter 19-7 CallDef_arap_v42bis parameter 19-7 CallDef_at_guest parameter 19-7 CallDef_at_nodeid parameter 19-8 CallDef_at_security parameter 19-8
Annex Manager User Guide Index-1
Index
CallDef_attn_string parameter 19-8 CallDef_authorized_groups parameter 19-9 CallDef_backward_key parameter 19-9 CallDef_banner parameter 19-9 CallDef_broadcast_direction parameter 19-9 CallDef_char_erase parameter 19-10 CallDef_cli_imask7 parameter 19-10 CallDef_cli_inactivity parameter 19-10 CallDef_cli_interface parameter 19-11 CallDef_cli_security parameter 19-11 CallDef_connect_security parameter 19-11 CallDef_dedicated arguments parameter 1911 CallDef_def_session_mode parameter 1912 CallDef_dialup_addresses parameter 19-12 CallDef_do_compression parameter 19-13 CallDef_echo parameter 19-13 CallDef_erase_char parameter 19-13 CallDef_erase_line parameter 19-13 CallDef_erase_word parameter 19-14 CallDef_forward_key parameter 19-14 CallDef_forwarding_count parameter 19-14 CallDef_forwarding_timer parameter 19-15 CallDef_hardware_tabs parameter 19-15 CallDef_inactivity_timer parameter 19-16 CallDef_input_is_activity parameter 19-16 CallDef_input_start_char parameter 19-16 CallDef_input_stop_char parameter 19-17 CallDef_ipso_class parameter 19-17 CallDef_ipx_security parameter 19-17 CallDef_ixany_flow_control parameter 19-17 CallDef_latb_enable parameter 19-18 CallDef_line_erase parameter 19-18 CallDef_local_address parameter 19-18 CallDef_location parameter 19-19 CallDef_long_break parameter 19-19 CallDef_map_to_lower parameter 19-19 CallDef_map_to_upper parameter 19-19 CallDef_mask_7bits parameter 19-15 CallDef_max_session parameter 19-20
CallDef_metric parameter 19-20 CallDef_mode parameter 19-20 CallDef_net_inactivity parameter 19-21 CallDef_net_inactivity_units parameter 1922 CallDef_newline_terminal parameter 19-22 CallDef_ouput_start_char parameter 19-23 CallDef_output_flow parameter 19-22 CallDef_output_is_activity parameter 19-23 CallDef_output_stop_char parameter 19-23 CallDef_port parameter 19-24 CallDef_port_input_flow_control parameter 19-25 CallDef_Port_multisession parameter 19-25 CallDef_port_password parameter 19-25 CallDef_port_server_security parameter 1926 CallDef_port_user_name parameter 19-26 CallDef_ppp_acm parameter 19-26 CallDef_ppp_mru parameter 19-26 CallDef_ppp_ncp parameter 19-27 CallDef_ppp_password_remote parameter 19-27 CallDef_ppp_security_protocol parameter 19-28 CallDef_ppp_username_remote parameter 19-28 CallDef_printer_host parameter 19-28 CallDef_printer_name parameter 19-29 CallDef_redisplay_line parameter 19-29 CallDef_reset_idle_time_on parameter 1929 CallDef_resolve_protocol parameter 19-29 CallDef_rs232_async_data_bits parameter 19-30 CallDef_rs232_async_parity parameter 1930 CallDef_rs232_async_stop_bits parameter 19-30 CallDef_rs232_sync_clock_source parameter 19-30
Index
CallDef_short_break parameter 19-30 CallDef_slip_mtu_size parameter 19-31 CallDef_slip_no_icmp parameter 19-31 CallDef_slip_ppp_security parameter 19-31 CallDef_slip_subnet_mask parameter 19-31 CallDef_slip_tos parameter 19-32 CallDef_tcp_keepalive parameter 19-32 CallDef_telnet_crlf parameter 19-32 CallDef_telnet_escape parameter 19-32 CallDef_term_var parameter 19-33 CallDef_toggle_output parameter 19-33 CallDef_v120_mru parameter 19-33 CallDef_vci_login_port_ password parameter 19-33 CallDef_vci_login_timeout parameter 19-34 Cancel window 3-11 Channels window 8-10 to 8-12 chap_auth_name parameter 19-34 char_erase parameter 19-34 check buttons 2-18 circuit_timer parameter 19-34 cli_imask7 parameter 19-35 cli_inactivity parameter 19-35 cli_interface parameter 19-35 cli_prompt parameter 19-36 cli_security parameter 19-37 Compare command 15-1 to 15-10 comparing an Annex and a script 15-6 comparing two Annexes 15-5 comparing two scripts 15-7 displaying the window 15-1 to 15-2 options 15-3 to 15-4 push buttons 15-9 reading comparison output 15-7 selecting Annexes and scripts 15-5 step-by-step instructions 15-9 to 15-10 comparing and copying parameters 15-1 to 15-20 config_file parameter 19-37 Confirm Auto Reset option 3-12 Confirmation window 3-10
confirming commands 3-10 connect_security parameter 19-37 control_lines parameter 19-38 Copy command 15-11 to 15-20 confirmation window 15-18 displaying the window 15-11 to 15-12 message box 15-15 options 15-13 push buttons 15-16 selecting Annexes and ports 15-14 to 1515 step-by-step instructions 15-16 to 15-18 Create Script command 14-7 to 14-14 displaying the window 14-8 errors generated by 14-22 to 14-23 message box 14-10 options 14-9 to 14-10 push buttons 14-11 step-by-step instructions 14-11 to 14-14 Customize mode 4-3 and Setup mode 4-1 to 4-3 configuration area in 4-12 to 4-14 main window in 4-4 to 4-14
D
data_bits parameter 19-38 daylight_savings parameter 19-38 dedicated_arguments parameter 19-39 dedicated_port parameter 19-39 def_session_mode parameter 19-39 default_image_name parameter 19-40 default_zone_list parameter 19-40 demand_dial parameter 19-40 DHCP box 6-6 DHCP_broadcast parameter 19-40 dialup_addresses parameter 19-41 disabled_modules parameter 19-42 Discover Annexes/Network command displaying the window 17-50 to 17-51 finding on a network 17-52 to 17-53 understanding the window 17-51
Index
Discover Annexes/Search Device command discovering Annexes 17-48 displaying the window 17-44 push buttons 17-47 understanding the window 17-45 to 1747 updating and saving discovery lists 1749 to 17-50 do_compression parameter 19-42 documentation conventions xxi documentation overview xvii to xix dtr_signal parameter 19-43 DVS Status command 17-39 to 17-42 displaying the window 17-39 to 17-40 push buttons 17-42 step-by-step instructions 17-42 understanding the GRE information box 17-40 to 17-41 understanding the tunnel information box 17-41 to 17-42 understanding the window 17-40 to 1742
reading from output boxes 2-24 See also troubleshooting Execute Script command 14-16 to 14-24 displaying the window 14-16 to 14-17 errors generated by 14-23 list box 14-17 message box 14-18 push buttons 14-18 step-by-step instructions 14-19 to 14-21 text field 14-17
F
facility_num parameter 19-44 File Selection window 3-7 to 3-9 editing files saved in 3-9 push buttons 3-9 understanding the format 3-8 forward_key parameter 19-44 forwarding_count parameter 19-45 forwarding_timer parameter 19-45
G
group_value parameter 19-45
E
echo parameter 19-43 Edit Async Ports (continued) window 7-4 Edit Async Ports window 7-4 enable_security parameter 19-43 environment variables DISPLAY 1-8 GUI_AM_DIR 1-8 PATH 1-8 setting 1-8 erase_char parameter 19-44 erase_line parameter 19-44 erase_word parameter 19-44 errors in script commands 14-22 to 14-24 in Set and Show commands 13-16 to 1317 reading from message boxes 2-23
H
hardware_tabs parameter 19-46 Help windows 3-14 to 3-20 changing default value displays See Site Parameters command displaying 3-14 to 3-17 help for a command or parameter 3-16 to 3-17 help for a field, box, or button 3-15 push buttons 3-18 saving contents of 3-19 to 3-20 understanding formats of 3-18 host_table_size parameter 19-46
I
image_name parameter 19-46
Index
imask_7bits parameter 19-46 inactivity_timer parameter 19-47 inet_addr parameter 19-47 input_buffer_size parameter 19-47 input_flow_control parameter 19-48 input_is_activity parameter 19-48 input_start_char parameter 19-48 input_stop_char parameter 19-49 installing Annex Manager 1-1 to 1-7 delivery media 1-1 software platforms supported 1-1 Interface Status command 17-11 to 17-14 displaying the window 17-11 to 17-12 general information box 17-12 to 17-13 push buttons 17-14 statistics box 17-13 understanding the window 17-12 to 1714 introduction to Annex Manager xxiii to xxvii environment xxv features xxiii to xxiv memory requirements xxvi platforms supported xxvi system requirements xxvi ip_forward_broadcast parameter 19-49 ipencap_type parameter 19-49 ipso_class parameter 19-49 ipx_do_checksum parameter 19-50 ipx_dump_password parameter 19-50 ipx_dump_path parameter 19-50 ipx_dump_username parameter 19-50 ipx_file_server parameter 19-50 ipx_frame_type parameter 19-51 ipx_security parameter 19-51 ixany_flow_control parameter 19-51
L
lat_key parameter 19-51 lat_multicast_timer parameter 19-52 lat_queue_max parameter 19-52 lat_sys_location parameter 19-52 latb_enable parameter 19-52 line_erase parameter 19-53 list boxes. See lists lists 2-19 to 2-22 deselecting items in 2-22 selecting items in 2-19 to 2-21 See also Annex lists load_broadcast parameter 19-53 load_dump_gateway parameter 19-53 load_dump_sequence parameter 19-54 local_address parameter 19-54 location parameter 19-54 lock_enable parameter 19-54 long_break parameter 19-55 loose_source_route parameter 19-55
M
main window 4-1 to 4-22 annotated examples of 2-2, 4-3 map parameter 19-56 map_to_lower parameter 19-56 map_to_upper parameter 19-57 max_modem_calls parameter 19-57 max_vcli parameter 19-57 menus, overview of 3-3 to 3-5 message boxes 2-23 metric parameter 19-58 min_unique_hostnames parameter 19-58 mode parameter 19-58 modem_type parameter 19-60 mop_login_password parameter 19-60 mop_login_prompt parameter 19-60 mop_login_timer parameter 19-61 mop_password parameter 19-61 mop_pref_host parameter 19-61, 19-62
K
keep_alive_timer parameter 19-51 keyboard commands. See window management
Index
motd_file parameter 19-61 mouse usage. See window management multisession parameter 19-62
N
name_server_1 parameter 19-62 name_server_2 parameter 19-62 nameserver_broadcast parameter 19-62 need_dsr parameter 19-63 net_inactivity parameter 19-63 net_inactivity_units parameter 19-63 network_turnaround parameter 19-64 newline_terminal parameter 19-64 node_id parameter 19-64
O
Open Annex List command 4-16 to 4-17 option buttons 2-16 option_key parameter 19-65 output boxes 2-24 output_flow_ control parameter 19-65 output_is_activity parameter 19-65 output_start_char parameter 19-66 output_stop_char parameter 19-66 output_ttl parameter 19-66
P
parameter groups 12-1 to 12-9 creating 12-3 to 12-8 modifying user-defined groups 12-8 predefined, list of 12-1 to 12-2 User Defined Parameter Groups command 12-3 to 12-9 parameter types displaying 12-5 parameters changing values of 4-14 displaying values of 4-14 selecting 4-12 to 4-14 See also individual parameter names parity parameter 19-66
password parameter 19-67 phone_number parameter 19-67 port_modem_config parameter 19-67 port_multisession parameter 19-70 port_password parameter 19-70 port_server_ security parameter 19-71 port_tcp_keepalive parameter 19-71 port_type parameter 19-71 port_user_name parameter 19-71 possword_limit parameter 19-67 ppp_acm parameter 19-72 ppp_ipx_network parameter 19-72 ppp_ipx_node parameter 19-72 ppp_mru 19-72 ppp_ncp parameter 19-73 ppp_password_remote parameter 19-73 ppp_security_protocol parameter 19-73 ppp_username_remote parameter 19-74 pref_DHCP1_addr parameter 19-74 pref_DHCP2_addr parameter 19-74 pref_dump_addr parameter 19-75 pref_load_addr parameter 19-75 pref_name1_addr parameter 19-75 pref_name2_addr 19-75 pref_secure1_host parameter 19-76 PRI Channels Status command 17-15 to 1720 async and sync boxes 17-18 displaying the window 17-15 to 17-16 entering channel information 17-17 push buttons 17-19 step-by-step instructions 17-19 understanding the window 17-16 to 1718 PRI Internal CSU Status command 17-20 to 17-28 alarms box 17-23 displaying the window 17-20 to 17-21 entering interval information 17-22 interval errored seconds box 17-26 interval errors box 17-25
Index
push buttons 17-27 status box 17-24 step-by-step instructions 17-27 understanding the window 17-21 to 1726 PRI Internal Modems command 16-19 to 1622 displaying the window 16-19 push buttons 16-22 step-by-step instructions 16-22 understanding the window 16-20 pri_analog_encoding parameter 19-76, 1978 pri_block_in_calls parameter 19-76 pri_block_out_calls parameter 19-76 pri_dsx1_line_length parameter 19-77 pri_ip_addr parameter 19-77 pri_ipx_network partameter 19-77 pri_ipx_node parameter 19-77 pri_switch_type parameter 19-78 printer_crlf parameter 19-78 printer_hardware_tabs parameter 19-78 printer_host parameter 19-78 printer_map_to_upper parameter 19-79 printer_name parameter 19-79 printer_tcp_keepalive parameter 19-79 printer_type parameter 19-79 printer_width parameter 19-80 prompt parameter 19-80 ps_history_buffer parameter 19-81 push buttons 2-16
understanding the window 16-11 to 1613 Reset Parameters window 3-12 reset_idle_time_on parameter 19-81 retrans_limit parameter 19-82 ring parameter 19-82 rip_accept parameter 19-82 rip_advertise parameter 19-82 rip_auth parameter 19-83 rip_default_route parameter 19-83 rip_horizon parameter 19-83 rip_next_hop parameter 19-83 rip_recv_version parameter 19-84 rip_routers 19-84 rip_send_version parameter 19-84 rip_sub_accept parameter 19-84 rip_sub_advertise parameter 19-85 routed parameter 19-85 rts_signal parameter 19-85 running Annex Manager 1-12 rwhod parameter 19-86
S
Save Annex List command 4-15 to 4-16 scripts 14-1 to 14-24 editing 14-15 See also View Script command, Create Script command, Execute Script command security_broadcast parameter 19-86 server_capability parameter 19-86 server_name parameter 19-87 service_limit parameter 19-87 session_limit_annex parameter 19-87 session_limit_port parameter 19-87 Set command 13-7 to 13-15 changing parameter values 13-12 to 1315 displaying the window 13-7 errors generated by 13-16 to 13-17
R
radio buttons 2-17 redisplay_line parameter 19-81 remote_address parameter 19-81 Reset command 16-9 to 16-15 displaying the window 16-10 entering port information 16-13 push buttons 16-13 step-by-step instructions 16-14 to 16-15
Index
message box 13-11 prerequisites for using 13-1 push buttons 13-11 specifying ports 13-9 work area 13-10 Setup mode 5-1 and Customize mode 4-1 to 4-3, 5-1 AppleTalk window 11-1 to 11-2 Async Ports windows 7-1 to 7-18 confirmation windows 5-9 displaying the windows 5-4 to 5-6 Edit Modem window 9-1 to 9-4 General windows 6-1 to 6-10 IP window 11-3 to 11-5 IPX window 11-6 to 11-7 LAT window 11-8 to 11-10 modem definitions 9-1 to 9-9 push buttons 5-7 to 5-8 Security window 10-1 to 10-4 understanding the window fields 5-6 understanding the windows 5-3 short_break parameter 19-88 Show command 13-2 to 13-6 controlling amount of output from 13-4 displaying parameter values 13-6 displaying the window 13-2 errors generated by 13-16 to 13-17 output box 13-5 prerequisites for using 13-1 push buttons 13-6 specifying ports 13-4 verbose output button 13-4 sigproto parameter 19-88 Site Parameters command 3-20 to 3-24 choosing lists and parameters 3-22 default value area 3-22 displaying the window 3-21 push buttons 3-23 step-by-step instructions 3-23 understanding the window 3-21 sizing a window. See window management
slip_allow_dump parameter 19-88 slip_load_dump_host parameter 19-88 slip_mtu_size parameter 19-88 slip_no_icmp parameter 19-89 slip_ppp_security parameter 19-89 slip_subnet_mask parameter 19-89 slip_tos parameter 19-89 SNMP Information command 4-18 to 4-22 check buttons 4-21 community string field 4-20 displaying the window 4-19 push buttons 4-21 retries field 4-20 step-by-step instructions 4-22 text fields 4-20 timeout field 4-20 understanding the window 4-20 to 4-21 SNMP protocol 18-1 to 18-15 agents 18-3 Annex restrictions on standard MIBs 188 to 18-15 AppleTalk MIB restrictions 18-15 Character MIB restrictions 18-10 configuring the Annex for 18-4 to 18-5 defining allow_snmp_sets 18-5 defining disabled_modules 18-5 defining the community string 18-4 DS1 MIB restrictions 18-16 Ethernet MIB restrictions 18-10 management stations 18-2 message delivery 18-3 MIB object hierarchy 18-6 MIB-II restrictions 18-9 MIBs supported by the Annex 18-5 to 1815 object names and syntaxes 18-6 overview 18-1 to 18-3 parallel printer MIB restrictions 18-13 RIPv2 MIB restrictions 18-14 RS-232 MIB restrictions 18-12 setting port speed 18-13
Index
traps and trap hosts 18-7 speed parameter 19-90 status reading from message boxes 2-23 reading from output boxes 2-24 See also Annex Status, Async Port Status, and Interface Status commands stop_bits parameter 19-90 subnet_mask parameter 19-90 SunNet Manager linking 1-8 sys_location parameter 19-91 sysContact parameter 19-90 sysLocation parameter 19-91 syslog_facility parameter 19-91 syslog_host parameter 19-91 syslog_mask parameter 19-92 syslog_port parameter 19-92 sysName parameter 19-91
T
T1 Internal CSU Status command 17-28 to 17-35 alarms box 17-31 displaying the window 17-28 to 17-29 entering interval information 17-30 interval information box 17-33 to 17-34 push buttons 17-34 status box 17-32 to 17-33 understanding the window 17-29 to 1734 T1 Modem Calls Status command 17-35 to 17-38 displaying the window 17-36 push buttons 17-38 understanding the window 17-37 T1/PRI Line window 8-13 to 8-15 t1_info parameter 19-93 tcp_keepalive parameter 19-93 tdi 19-94
tdi_distance parameter 19-93 tdi_framing parameter 19-93 tdi_line_code 19-94 telnet_crlf parameter 19-94 telnet_escape parameter 19-94 term_var parameter 19-94 tftp_dump_name parameter 19-95 tftp_load_dir parameter 19-95 Ti Internal CSU command 17-35 time_broadcast parameter 19-95 time_server_addr parameter 19-96 timezone_minuteswest parameter 19-96 tmux_delay parameter 19-96 tmux_enable parameter 19-97 tmux_max_host parameter 19-97 tmux_max_mpx parameter 19-97 tni_circuit_id 19-97 tni_clock parameter 19-98 tni_esf_fdl parameter 19-98 tni_framing parameter 19-98 tni_line_buildout 19-99 tni_line_buildout parameter 19-98 tni_line_code parameter 19-99 tni_loop_bak_config parameter 19-99 tni_ones_density parameter 19-99 toggle_output parameter 19-100 troubleshooting 20-1 to 20-4 "parameter does not exist" message 204 Annex Manager slow to start 20-1 Annex not reachable 20-1 to 20-2 problems saving parameters 20-4 Set command not usable 20-3
U
User Defined Parameter Groups command. See parameter groups
V
vci_autobaud parameter 19-100
Index
vci_login_port_ password 19-100 vci_login_timeout parameter 19-100 vcli_groups parameter 19-101 vcli_password parameter 19-101 vcli_security parameter 19-101 verbose output button 13-4 View Script command 14-1 to 14-6 displaying the window 14-3 list box 14-5 message box 14-5 push buttons 14-6 step-by-step instructions 14-6 text field 14-5 Viewing 17-35
W
Warning windows 3-13 window management 2-1 to 2-24 check buttons 2-18 icons 2-8 to 2-9 keyboard commands 2-5 list boxes 2-19 to 2-22 lowering a window 2-14 message boxes 2-23 mouse usage 2-4 moving a window 2-13 option buttons 2-16 output boxes 2-24 overview of 2-2 to 2-4 push buttons 2-16 radio buttons 2-17 scrolling 2-10 to 2-11 sizing a window 2-7 to 2-8, 2-14
Z
zone parameter 19-102

Annex Manager

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Annex Manager

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Annex Manager

Part No. 166-024-389 December 1996

Copyright 1996 Bay Networks, Inc.

Restricted Rights Legend

Notice for All Other Executive Agencies

Trademarks of Bay Networks, Inc.

Third Party Trademarks

Part 1 Annex Manager Basics

Chapter 2 Window Basics

Annex Manager User Guide

Chapter 3 Working with Annex Manager Windows

Chapter 4 Using the Main Window

Part 2 Setup Mode

Annex Manager User Guide iv

Chapter 6 Selecting General Settings

Chapter 7 Setting Asynchronous Port Values

Chapter 8 Setting ISDN Primary Rate Annex Values

Chapter 9 Editing Modem Definitions

Chapter 10 Setting Security Values

Annex Manager User Guide v

Part 3 Customize Mode

Chapter 12 Using and Creating Parameter Groups

Chapter 13 Viewing and Changing Parameters

Chapter 14 Viewing, Creating, and Executing Scripts

Annex Manager User Guide vi

Chapter 15 Comparing and Copying Parameters and Values

Part 4 Control and Status Commands

Annex Manager User Guide vii

Changing Internal Modem Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22

Chapter 17 Displaying Status Information

Annex Manager User Guide viii

Part 5 Reference Information

Chapter 19 Annex Parameters Chapter 20 Troubleshooting

Annex Manager User Guide ix

Annex Manager User Guide x

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide xii

Figure 18-1. Network Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Annex Manager User Guide xiii

Annex Manager User Guide xiv

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide xvi

About the Documentation

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager Features

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager Environment

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Annex Manager User Guide

Chapter 1 Installing Annex Manager

Annex Manager Delivery and Platforms

Annex Manager User Guide

Installing Annex Manager

Annex Manager Basics

Installing the Annex Manager Application